Reinforced Concrete Mechanics Design Sol

Chapter 3
3-1 What is the signicance of the critical stress?

(a) with respect to the structure of the concrete?
A continuous pattern of mortar cracks begins to form. As a result there are few
undamaged portions
to carry load and the stress-strain curve is highly nonlinear.
(b) With respect to spiral reinforcement?
At the critical stress the lateral strain begins to increase rapidly. This
causes the concrete core within
the spiral to expand, stretching the spiral. The tension in the spiral is
equilibrated by a radial
compression in the core. This in turn, biaxially compresses the core, and thus
strengthens it.
(c) with respect to strength under sustained loads?
When concrete is subjected to sustained loads greater than the critical stress,
it will eventually fail.
3-2 A group of 45 tests on a given type of concrete had a mean strength of 4780
psi and a
standard deviation of 525 psi. Does this concrete satisfy the requirements of
ACI Code
Section 5.3.2 for 4000-psi concrete?
From Eq. 3-3a:
f c = f gr 1. 345
Using fgr = 4780 psi
(for design) f'c = 4780 1. 34 * 525 = 4080 psi
From Eq. 3-3b:
f'c = fgr 2.335 + 500
Using fgr = 4780 psi
(for design) f'c = 4780 2.33 * 525 + 500 = 4060 psi
Because both of these exceed 4000 psi, the concrete satisfies the requirements
of ACT Code
Section 5.3.2 for 4000 psi concrete.
2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved.
This publication is protected by Copyright and written
permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited
reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle
River, NJ 07458.
3-3 The concrete containing Type I cement in a structure is cured for 3 days at
700 F
followed by 6 days at 400 F. Use the maturity concept to estimate its strength
as a
fraction of the 28-day strength under standard curing.
Note: C 2301732) , so 70 F: 21.10 C and 40 F=4.4 C
From Eq. 3-6:

M = 20,. +10)(t,)
izl
= (21.1+10)(3) +(4.4+10)(6) = 180 C days
From Fig. 3-8 the compressive strength will be between 0.60 and 0.70 times the
28-day strength
under standard curing conditions.
3-4 Use Fig. 3-12a to estimate the compressive strength 0'2 for bi-aXially
loaded concrete
subject to:
(a) (51 = 0.0, 62 = fc
(b) 61 = 0.75 ft' in tension, 62 = 0.5 fc'
(c) 61 = 0.5 fc' in compression, 62 = 1.2 fc'
3-5 The concrete in the core of a spiral is subjected to a uniform confining
stress 0'3 of 750
psi. What will the compressive strength, 0'1 be? Assume f c = 4500 psi.
From Eq. 3-16:
01 : f6, + 4.103
01 = 4500 + 4.1 * 750 = 7580 psi
River, NJ 07458.
3-6 What factors affect the shrinkage of concrete?
(a) Relative humidity. Shrinkage increases as the relative humidity decreases,
reaching a
maximum at RH 5 40%.
(b) The fraction of the total volume made up of paste. As this fraction
increases,
shrinkage increases.
(c) The modulus of elasticity of the aggregate. As this increases, shrinkage
decreases.
(d) The water/cement ratio. As the water content increases, the aggregate
fraction
decreases, causing an increase in shrinkage.
(e) The neness of the cement. Shrinkage increases for nely ground cement that
has
more surface area to attract and absorb water.
(f) The effective thickness or volume to surface ratio. As this ratio increases,
the
shrinkage occurs more slowly and the total shrinkage is likely reduced.
(g) Exposure to carbon dioxide tends to increase shrinkage.

3-7 What factors affect the creep of concrete?
(a) The ratio of sustained stress to the strength of the concrete. The creep
coefcient, ,
is roughly constant up to a stress of 0.5 , but increases above that value.
(b) The humidity of the environment. The amount of creep decreases as the RH
increases
above 40%.
(c) As the effective thickness or volume to surface ratio increases, the rate at
which creep
develops decreases.
(d) Concretes with a high paste content creep more that concretes with a large
aggregate
fraction because only the paste creeps.
River, NJ 07458.
3-8 A structure is made from concrete containing Type 1 cement. The average
ambient
relative humidity is 70 percent. The concrete was moist-cured for 7 days. 12' =
4000 psi.
(a) Compute the unrestrained shrinkage strain of a rectangular beam with crosssectional dimensions of 8 in. X 20 in. at 2 years after the concrete was placed.
1. Compute the humidity modification factor from Eq. (3-30a):
yrh = 1.40 0.01 * RH = 1.4 0.01 * 70 = 0.70
2. Use Eq. (3-31) to compute the volume/surface area ratio modification factor:
Volume per foot ofbeam = 12 * 8 * 20 = 1920 in3
Surface area per foot ofbeam = 2 * [(12 * 8) + (12 * 20)] = 672 in.2
yvs = 1.2-0-12V/5 = 1.2-0-12*192/ 672 = 0.939 g 0.94
3. Use Eq. (3-29) to compute the ultimate shrinkage strain:
(ssh)u = yrh * yvs * 780x106 = 0.70 * 0.94 * 780x106 2 513x106 strain
4. Use Eq. (3-28) to compute the shrinkage strain after 2 years:
t=2*3657=723days
t 72 3 _6 _6 _6 .
(ssh)t = mesh), 2 m513x10 2 489x10 E 490x10 straln
(b) Compute the stress dependent (creep) strain in the concrete of a 20 in. x 20
in. x
12 ft column at age 3 years. A compression load of 400 kips was applied to the
column at 30 days.
1. Compute the ultimate shrinkage strain coefcient, Cu, using Eqs. (3-36)-(339).
A, = 1.27 0.0067 * RH = 1.27 0.0067 * 70 = 0.80
4w = 1.25 * 1550118 = 1.25 * 300118 = 0.84
2,5 = 0.67 * [1 + 1.13-0-54*V/5],
Where: V = 20 in. * 20 in. * 12 ft * 12% = 57,600 in.3

5 = 4sides * 20 in. * 12 ft * 12% = 11,520 in.2
River, NJ 07458.
2. Compute the creep coefficient for the time since loading, Ct, using Eq. (335).
t = 3 * 365 30 = 1065 days
C t0-6 C 10650-6
= _ * 2
t 10 + t0-6 10 + 10650-6
* 1.82 = 1.58
3. Compute the total stress-dependent strain, C(total), using Eqs. (3-5), (318), and (3-35).
First, calculate the creep strain since the load was applied:
fem = 1.2 * fc' = 1.2 * 4000 = 4800 psi
EC(28) = 57,000 * m = 57,000 * W = 3.95 * 106 psi
400,000 lbs
Mtg) _ 20 in. * 20 in.
_ 1.58 : CA. 103 t Ec(28) * t 3.95 >l< 106 psi * * S rain
Sec (t, to) 2

Then, calculate the initial strain when the load is applied:
30
= 4000 * = 4070 psi
to
I t : I 28
fc(a) fc( )*4+0.85*ta 4+0_85*30
fcm(ta) = 1.2 * min) = 1.2 * 4070 = 4880 psi
Ec(ta) = 57,000 * ,/fcm(t,,) = 57,000 * x/4880 = 3.98 * 106 psi
400,000 lbs
0500) 20 in * 20 in t = = + = 0.25 10-3 t
SA ) 5,00) 3.98 * 106 psi * 5 ram
Thus,
sc(t0tal) = sc(ta) + scc(t,ta) = 0.25 * 103 + 0.4 * 103 = 0.65 * 103 strain

River, NJ 07458.
35
Chapter 4
4-1 Figure P4-1 shows a simply supported beam and the cross-section at midspan.
The
beam supports a uniform service (unfactored) dead load consisting of its own
weight
plus 1.4 kips/ft and a uniform service (unfactored) live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The
concrete strength is 3500 psi, and the yield strength of the reinforcement is
60,000
psi. The concrete is normal-weight concrete. Use load and strength reduction
factors
from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3. For the midspan section shown in part (b) of
Fig. P4-1, compute Mn and show that it exceeds Mu.
1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.
24><12
Weight/ft = x 0.15 = 0.3 kips/ft

2. Compute the factored moment, M u :
Factored load/ft: w, = 1.2(030 + 1.40) + 1.6(1.50) = 4.44 k/ft
Mu = w 72/8 = 4.44>< 202/8 = 222 kip-ft
3. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: AS = 3 No. 9 bars = 3>< 1.00 in.2= 3.00 in.2
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, 05 , assuming that
tension steel is
yielding. From equilibrium (using Eq. (4-14)):
A f
052,516: 5X =M=504 m
0.85 fcb 0.85x3500x12
' = _ .2 a = 5.04 = For fC 3500ps1, ,610.85.Therefore, c /,31 4.85 5.93 in.

Check whether tension steel is yielding:
. d c 21.5 5.93
Us1ng Eq.(4-18) 5s (= at) =( c but = (593] x 0.003 = 0.00788
Thus, as > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f5 = fy ).
Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):
3.00x 60000x (21.5 E

M =Af 01Z =]=285kip
n sy 2 12000
Since, at = 0.00788 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and q :
09. Then,
Mn = 0.9 >< 285 kip-ft = 256 kip-ft. Clearly, Mn > Mu
4-2 A cantilever beam shown in Fig. P4-2. The beam supports a uniform service
(unfactored) dead load of 1 kip/ft plus its own dead load and it supports a
concentrated service (unfactored) live load of 12 kips as shown. The concrete is
normal-weight concrete with f 'c = 4000 psi and the steel is Grade 60. Use load
and
strength-reduction factors form ACI Code Section 9.2 and 9.3. For the end
section
shown in part (b) of Fig. P4-2, compute Mn and show it exceeds Mu.
1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.
Weight/ft =
3(1): 18 X 0.15 = 0.563 kips/ft
2. Compute the factored moment, M u .
Factored distributed load/ft: Wu = 1.2(0.563 + 1.0) = 1.88 k/ft
Factored live load is a concentrated load: PM = 1.6 X 12 = 19.2 kips
Mu = 7(wu 2/2) I; (I? 1)= 7(1.88><102/2)(19.2>< 9) = 4267 kip-ft
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: AS = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 x 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, 0! , assuming that
tension steel is
A f
a=1c= 5y, =M=279 in.
085be 0.85X4000X30
'2 ~ = :07 22.79 2 ~

For fC 4000ps1, ,Bl O.85.Therefore, c :31 0.85 3.28 in.
Using. Eq.(4-18) 8 (=5 )={d_c]g ={ij0.003=0.011> 0.0021

5 t c C 3.28
Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f; = fy ).
4.74 x 60000 x (15.5 E
M =Af 01z =]=334kip-ft

n s y 2 12000
Since, at = 0.011 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and q :09.
Then,
Mn = 0.9 X 334 = 301 kip-ft = 267 kip-ft. Clearly, Mn > Mu
4-3 (a) Compare Mn for singly reinforced rectangular beams having the following
properties. Use strength reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and
9.3.
Beam b d f; f
. . Bars
No. (in) (in)
1 12 22 3 No.
2 12 22 2 N0.
3 12 22 3 No.
4 12 22 3 No.
5 12 33 3 No.
Beam No.1
y
(psi) (psi)
7 4,000 60,000
9plus 1 N0. 8 4,000 60,000
7 4,000 80,000
7 6,000 60,000
7 4,000 60,000
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block,ot, assuming that
tension steel is
yielding.
_ Asfy _3*0.60*60000
_ _ = 2.65 ' .
0.85fcb 0.85 * 4000 * 12 1
012,816
For f; = 4000 psi, . =0.85 . Therefore, c = 01/ 1 = 2-65/0_85 = 3.12 in.
d C 22 3.12
85(2 St) = (T) ecu = (T) 0.003 = 0.018
Thus, as > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f5 = fy ).
Since, at > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and :09.
a 0.9 * 3 * 0.60 * 60000 (22 22$) .
M. = Asfy (4 5) = 12000 = 167 k1p-ft
For Beam 1, qun = 167 kip-ft

Beam No.2
tension steel is
yielding.
_ Asfy _ (2 * 1.00 + 0.79) * 60000
_ 0.85fcb T 0.85 r 4000 r 12
a: = [316 = 4.10 in.

For f; = 4000 psi, . =O.85 . Therefore, c = 01/ 1 = 4-10/0_85 = 4.82 in.
@2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This
publication is protected by Copyright and written
River, NJ 07458.
d C 22 4.82
85(2 St) = (T) ecu = (W) 0.003 = 0.0107
Thus, 85 > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( = fy ).
Since, at > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and :09.
a 0.9 * (2 * 1.00 + 0.79) * 60000 (22 #) .
M. = Asfy (4 7) = 12000 = 250 k1p-ft

Beam No.3
tension steel is
yielding.
_ Asfy _ 3 * 0.60 * 80000 _
T 0.85fcb T 0.85 * 4000 * 12 T
a: = [31C 3.53 in.

For f; = 4000 psi, . =O.85 . Therefore. C = /51 T 353/085 T 4'15 in
d C 22 4.15
85(2 St) = (7)8511 = (T) 0.003 = 0.013
Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f5 = fy ).
Since, at > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and q :09.
0.9 * 3 * 0.60 * 80000 (22 323)
a .
>Mn =>Asfy(d) = 12000 =219k1p-ft

Beam No.4
tension steel is
yielding.
_ Asfy _3*0.60*60000
_ _ = 1.76 ' .
0.85fcb 0.85 * 6000 * 12 1
azlc
For fc = 6000 psi, [31 = 0.75. Therefore, C = /[31 2 1'76/075 = 2.35 in.
d C 22 2.35
35(2 St) = (7)8611 = (T) 0.003 = 0.025
River, NJ 07458.
Thus, 85 > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f5 = fy ).
Since, 51 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and :09.
0.9 * 3 * 0.60 * 60000 (22 %)
a .
M. = Asfy(d 7) = 12000 = 171 k1p-ft

Beam No.5
tension steel is
yielding.
_ Asfy _3*0.60*60000
_ _ = 2.65 ' .
0.85fcb 0.85 * 4000 * 12 1
azlc
For f; = 4000 psi, . =0.85 . Therefore. C = /51 T 265/085 T 3'12 in
d C 33 3.12
85(2 St) = (T) ecu = (T) 0.003 = 0.029
Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fx 2 fy ).
Since, 81 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and :09.
a 0.9 * 3 * 0.60 * 60000 (33 Z'Z)
M : A d : : I _
9 n <i> sfy( 2) 12000 257 klp ft

(b) Taking beam 1 as the reference point, discuss the effects of changing
As, fy, f c and d on Mn. (Note that each beam has the same properties as
beam 1 except for the italicized quantity.)
Beam Mn
NO. (kip-ft)
1 167
2 250
3 219
4 171
5 257
River, NJ 07458.
Effect of AS (Beams 1 and 2)
An increase of 55% in AS (from 1.80 to 2.79 in.2) caused an increase of 50% in
Mn . Increasing
the tension steel area causes a proportional increase in the strength of the
section, with a loss of
ductility. Note that in this case, the strength reduction factor was 0.9 for
both sections.
Effect of fy (Beams 1 and 3)
An increase of 33% in fy caused an increase of 31% in Mn . Increasing the steel
yield strength
has essentially the same effect as increasing the tension steel area.
Effect of f; (Beams 1 and 4)
An increase of 50% in f; caused an increase of 2% in Mn. Changing the concrete
strength has
approximately no impact on moment strength, relative to changes in the tension
steel area and
steel yield strength.
Effect of d (Beams 1 and 5)
An increase of 50% in 61 caused an increase of 54% in Mn. Increasing the
effective exural
depth of the section increases the section moment strength (without decreasing
the section
ductility).
(c) What is the most effective way of increasing Mn? What is the least
effective way?
Disregarding any other effects of increasing d ,AS or fy such as changes in
cost, etc., the most
effective way to increaseMn is to increase the effective exural depth of the
section,d ,
followed by increasing fy and AS . Note that increasing fy and AS too much may
make the beam
over-reinforced and thus will result in a decrease in ductility.
The least effective way of increasing Mn is to increase f5! . Note that
increasing f; will cause a
significant increase in curvature at failure.
River, NJ 07458.
4-4 A 12-ft-long cantilever supports its own dead load plus an additional
uniform
service (unfactored) dead load of 0.5 kip/ft. The beam is made from normalweight
4000-psi concrete and has b = 16 in., d = 15. 5 in., and h = 18 in. It is
reinforced
with four No. 7 Grade-60 bars. Compute the maximum service (unfactored)
concentrated live load that can be applied at 1ft from the free end of the
cantilever.
Use load and strength reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3.
Also
check A Smln.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: AS = 4 No. 7 bars = 4>< 0.60in.2 =2.40 in.2
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, 05 , assuming that
tension steel is
Af
s y _ 2.4><60000 _2.65 in.
a : : _ _
0.85fCb 0.85X4000Xl6
lC
' 2 ~ _ ._ _2.65 _ For fC 4000ps1, ,Bl _O.85 . Therefore, 6 /61 _ ABS31 in.
. dc 15.53.1
Us1ngEq.(4-18) gs(=st)=( c ]SCM=(T]x0.003=0.012
Thus, as > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fx 2 fy ).

2.4 x 60000x (15.5 E
M =Af dZ =]=170kip-ft
n sy 2 12000
Since, at = 0.012 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and,
Mn = 0.9 X 170 kip-ft = 153 kip-ft
2. Compute Live Load
Set Mu =Mn =153kip-ft
Weight/ft of beam = % x 0.15 = 0.3kips/ft
Factored dead load = 1.2(0.3 + 0.5) = 0.96 kips/ft
Factored dead load moment = WI 2 / 2 = 0.96 X 122 / 2 = 69.1 kip-ft
Therefore the maximum factored live load moment is: 153 kip-ft 69.1 kip-ft =
83.9 kip-ft
Maximum factored load at 1 ft from the tip = 83.9 kip-ft/ 11 ft = 7.63 kips
h/[nvi nnnnnnnnnn mun-l nnnnnnn 1;Y\1f\(\A _ "I (Q lrien I 1 _ A "I"!
lrien
River, NJ 07458.
3. Check of A
s,min
The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of
this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 34f; is equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in
the numerator:
200 200
S min : bwd :
, fy 60, 000
x16x15.5=0.82 in.2< AS (o.k.)


River, NJ 07458.
4-5 Compute Mn and check A Smln for the beam shown in Fig. P4-5. Use f c =
4500
psi and fy = 60000 psi.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6x 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the
distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d =
19 in.
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the
thickness of the
compression ange, (05 S hf) and that the tension steel is yielding, (SS 2 8y ),
using Eq. (4-16):
Asf y _ 4.74x60000
or = _
085be 0.85 X 4500 X 48
c e
= 1.55 in. < hf = 6 in. (o.k.)
' 2 ~ _ _ a _1.55 _ For fC 4500ps1, 610.825.Therefore, c ,3] _ 4825188 in.
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and
d2, it is clear that
the tension steel strain, 85: easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the
strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, SI, exceeds the limit for tensioncontrolled sections
(0.005). Thus, :09 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate Mn :
4.74x60000x(191%j
M =Af dZ ==432kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
Mn =0.9><432 kip-ft: 389 kip-ft
2. Check of A
s,min
this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 34f; is equal to 201 psi, so use 34f; in the
numerator:
s,min
3 .
A 2 )Iwad=&x12xl9=0.76 in.2< A. (9k)

f 6 00
9
River, NJ 07458.
4-6 Compute Mn and check A Smln for the beam shown in Fig. P4-6. Use f c =
4000
psi and fy = 60000 psi.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: AS = 6 No. 8 bars = 6><0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the
distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d =
18.5 in.
thickness of the
compression ange, (or S hf) and that the tension steel is yielding, (83 2 8y) ,
using Eq. (4-16):
Asfy _ 4.74x60000
or = _
0.85f'b 0.85 X 4000 X 20
C e
24.18 in. <hf =5 in. (o.k.)
For f; =4000 psi, .31 =O.85 . Therefore, c 2/3 =4-18 24.92 in.
l
0.85
Using Eq.(4-18) 8 = d_c 8 = M x0.003=0.0082
S c C 4.95
Thus, SS > 0.002 and it is clear that the steel is yielding in both layers of
reinforcement.
It is also clear that the section is tension-controlled ( :09), but just for
illustration the value of
El can be calculated as:
g : dzc g = w x0.003=0.0089
r C CH 4.92
We can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :

4.74 x 60000 x (18.5 E]
M =Af 01g 222389kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
Mn = 0.9 X 389 kip-ft = 350 kip-ft
2. Check of AS,min
this section, so we
should use 17W in Eq. (4-11). Also, 31 f E is equal to 190 psi, so use 200 psi
in the numerator:
2%,]: 200
mm W ><12><18.5 = 0.74 111.2 < A (o.k.)
fy 60,000
River, NJ 07458.
4-7 Compute the negative-moment capacity, Mn, and check As,min for the beam
shown in Fig. P4-7. Use fc = 4000 psi and fy = 60, 000 psi.
1. Calculation of Mn
This section is subjected to negative bending, so tension will develop in the
top ange and the
compression zone is at the bottom of the section. ACI Code Section 10.6.6
requires that a portion
of the tension reinforcement be distributed in the ange, so assuming that the
No. 6 bars in the
ange are part of the tension reinforcement: AS = 6>< 0.44 = 2.64 in.2
The depth of the Whitney stress block can be calculated using Eq. (4-16), using
[7 :12 in., since
the compression zone is at the bottom of the section:
Asfy 2.64 * 60000 .
a=,==3.881n.
0.85)ch 0.85 * 4000 * 12
For f, = 4000 psi, 4 =0.85 . Therefore, c = 01/ 1 = 338/085 = 4.56 in.
d c 19.5 4.56
as =( C )scu = (T) 0.003 = 0.010
The steel is yielding (.93 > 8y 2 0.00207) and it is tension-controlled (8, >
0.005) so = 0.9.
a 0.9 * 2.64 * 60000 (19.5 32E) .
<i>Mn Asfy (4 5) 12000 _ 209 k1p-ft
2. Check of A
s,min
The anged portion of the beam section is in tension because the beam is
subjected to negative
bending. Therefore, the value of As,min will depend on whether the beam is
statically determinate.
Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate oor
system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw in Eq. (4-11). Also,
34f; is
equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200 . 2
s,min = 7de = W12 * 19.5 = 0.78 In. < As (OK)
However, for a statically determinate beam, 17W should be replaced by the
smaller of
2bw (2 24 in.) or be . Given that be is 48 in. for this beam section,
2 0 0 2 00
s,min = 7de 2 W24 * 19.5 = 1.56 in.2 < As (OK)
River, NJ 07458.
4-8 For the beam shown in Fig. P4-8, fc 2 3500 psi and fy 2 60, 000 psi.
(a) Compute the effective ange width at midspan.
The limits given in ACI Code Section 8.12 for determining the effective
compression ange, be ,
for a anged section that is part of a continuous oor system are:
(7
4
b S bw + 2(8hf)
e
bw + 2(clear trans. distance)/2
Assuming that the columns are 18 in. >< 18 in., the longitudinal span is
approximated as:
18 in.
in.
12 /ft
The clear transverse distance for the 9 ft.6 in. span is: 9.5 ft
E221ft+ ft222.5 ft
12 in.
in.
12 41
2 9.75 ft
28.5 ft
l 12 in. 18 in.
+
2121% 121%
So, the average clear transverse distance is 9.125 ft
and for the 11ft. span is: 11 f

The effective compression ange can now be computed as:
22.5 ft (12 iii/ff)
f
b s 12 in.+2(8><6in.)2108 in.
12 in.+2(9.125 ft (12 in./ft))/22122 in.
2 67.5 in.
The rst limit governs for this section, so be 267.5 in.
(b) Compute Mn for the positive- and negative-moment regions and check
As,min for both sections. At the supports, the bottom bars are in one layer; at
midspan, the No. 8 bars are in the bottom, the No. 7 bars in a second layer.
Positive moment region
1. Calculation of Me
Tension steel area: AS 2 3 No. 8 bars + 2 No. 7 bars 2 3><0.79+2><0.60 23.57
in.2
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming
the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance
from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is
approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension
reinforcement, d, ,
can be calculated to be:
de 221 in. 2.5 in. 218.5 in.
The minimum spacing required between layers of reinforcement is 1 in. (ACI Code
Section
7.6.2). Thus the spacing between the centers of the layers is approximately 2
in. So the distance
from the tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is:
(3 X 0.79) X 2.5 + (2 X 0.60) X 4.5
3.57
23.17in.
Therefore, the effective exural depth, d , is:
d 221 in. 3.17 in. 217.8 in.
thickness of the
compression ange, (05 S hf 2 6 in.) and that the tension steel is yielding, (8e
2 8y) ; using Eq.(416) we have:
A f
or: S Iy =w=L07in<hf26m (o.k.)
0.85f b 0.85X3500X675
C e
For fe 23500 psi, ,61 20.85 . Therefore, c z/IBI 21.0%.85 = 1.26 in.
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and
d2, it is clear that
the tension steel strain, gs, easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the
strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, 8e, exceeds the limit for tensioncontrolled sections
(0.005). Thus, gt 20.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate Mn :
3.57 x 60000x (17.8 ]
M 2Af d 222308kip-ft
n sy 2 12000
Me = 0.9x 308 kip-ft = 277 kip-ft
Check of AeImin : The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at
the bottom of this
section, so we should use bw in Eq. (4-11). 3"]?! is equal to 177 psi, so use
200 psi in the
numerator .
River, NJ 07458.
A, m = de = 200 X 12 X 17.8 = 0.71 111.2 < A (o.k.)
. fy 60,000
Negative moment region

The tension and compression reinforcement for this section is provided in single
layers.
Assuming the section will include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to
assume that the
distance from the extreme tension or compression edge of the section to the
centroid of the
tension or compression layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
AS = 7 No. 7 bars = 7><0.6024.2 111.2, d = 18.5 in.
A; = = 2 No. 8 bars = 2x079 21.58 111.2, d' = 2.5111.
Because
tension
and use
neutral
this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the

steel is yielding
the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the
axis depth, c.
Try 0 251/4245 in.

g; = (d )see = ($) ><0.003 =0.00133
C
f; = E38; = 29,000 ksi x 0.00133 = 38.6 ksi(s fy)
Ce = A; ( 0.85fe) 21.58 in.2(38.6 ksi 2.98 ksi) = 56.3 kips
Ce 2 0.85feblc 2 0.85 X 3.5 ksi X 12 in. X 0.85 X 4.5 in.2137 kips
T = Aefy = 4.20 in.2 X 60 ksi = 252 kips
Because T > Ce + C e, we should increase C for the second trial.
Try 6 2 5.9 in.
e; = 0.00173
f; = 50.2 ksi(s fy)
CS 2 74.6 kips
Ce 2179 kips
T 2 254 kips 2 Ce + Ce 2 254 kips
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the
tension steel is
yielding.
using Eq.(4-18) 8s = (d _ c)seu = (W) x 0.003 = 0.0064
C .
Thus, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

section (8, >83 2 0.0102) .
So, usinga 2 le 2 0.85 X 5.9 in. 2 5.0 in. , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate Mn .
Mn = Ce [d%)+Ce (dd)=179 kips><l6 in.+74.6 kips><l6 in.
Mn 2 2865 k-in. + l 195 k-in 2 4060 k-in 2 338 k-ft

River, NJ 07458.
Me 2 0.9 X 338 kip-ft = 304 kip-ft
Check of A : The anged portion of the beam section is in tension and the value
of AeImin will
s,min
depend on the use of that beam. Since the beam is part of a continuous,
statically indeterminate
oor system, the minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using be in
Eq. (4-11).
Also, 3jife' is equal to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator.
@b d2 200 ><12><18.520.74 in.2< Ae (o.k.)
s,min _ fy w 60, 000
River, NJ 07458.
4-9 Compute Mn and check A SIM-n for the beam shown in Fig. P4-9. Use f c 2
4000
psi and fy 2 60,000 psi, and
(a) the reinforcement is six No. 8 bars.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: AS 2 6 No. 8 bars 2 6><0.79 in.22 4.74 in.2
thickness of the
top ange, (06 S 5 in.) and that the tension steel is yielding, (6e 2 8y), using
Eq. (4-16) with
b 2 30 in. :
Asfy 4.74 * 60000
==2.79'. h=5'.01<
a 0-85f6b6 0.85*4000*30 1< f 1n( )
For fc 2 4000 psi, ,61 20.85 . Therefore, C 2 /[31 Z 279/035 = 3.28 in.
d C 32.5 3.28
85(2 6,) =( C )scu = (T) 0.003 = 0.027
Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fe 2 fy ).

Since, 81 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and (0 20.9.
a 0.9 * 4.74 * 60000 (32.5 222) I
M. <1>Asfy (4 5) 12000 _ 663 166-6
2. Check of AeImin
The anged ponion of the beam section is in tension and the value of A
s,min
use of that beam. Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically
indeterminate oor
system, the minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw = 2x 5 =
10 in. in Eq.
(4-11). Also, 3Jfe is equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
A _b d: 200 ><10><32.521.08 in.2< Ae (o.k.)
m T fy W 60,000
will depend on the
However, for a statically determinate beam, 17W should be replaced by the

smaller of
222W (2 20 in.) or be . Given that be is 30 in. for this beam section,
A, m = de = 200 X 20>< 32.5 = 2.17 111.2 < Ae (o.k.)
f, 60,000
River, NJ 07458.
(b) the reinforcement is nine No. 8 bars.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: As 2 9 No. 8 bars 2 9 x 0.79 in.2 27.11 in.2
thickness of the
compression ange, (05 S hf 2 5 in.) and that the tension steel is yielding, (8e
2 8y), using Eq. (416) with b 2 30 in. :
_ Asfy _ 7.11*60000 _418. <h _5. 0K

T0.85fgbeT0.85*4000*30T' m' fT m'( )
For f; = 4000 psi, A 20.85 . Therefore, C = 01/ 1 = 418/085 = 4.92 in.
d C 32.5 4.92
85(2 St) = (T) ecu = (T) 0.003 = 0.017
Since, 51 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and q 20.9.
a 0.9 * 7.11 * 60000 (32.5 g)

M : : : I _
p n Asfy(d 2) 12000 973 klp ft
2. Check of AeImin
AeImin is the same as in part (a).
River, NJ 07458.
4-10 Compute Mn and check A SIM-n for the beam shown in Fig. P4-10. Use f c 2
5000
psi and fy 2 60,000 psi.
reduction factor, .
Tension steel area: As 2 8 No. 7 bars 2 8 x0.60in.2 24.8 in.2
Tension will develop in the bottom ange and the compression zone is at the top
of the section.
Thus, assuming that the tension steel is yielding, (8e 2 8y) , in Eq. (4-16) we
should use
b 2 2>< 6 212 in. and we nd the depth of the Whitney stress block as:
a_ Asfy _ 4.8x60000
_ 1 _25.65 in.
085be 0.85X5000X12
For fe 25000 psi, .31 20.80. Therefore, 6 2 /B 2 5-6 2 7.06 in.

l
5
0.80
using Eq.(4-18> es =(s. =)(d;c)ec,, =(233gg6)x0.003=o.007
Since, 81 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and q 20.9.

4.8 x 60000 x (23.5 E)
M 2Af 613 222496kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
Mn 20.9><496 kip-ft = 446 kip-ft
2. Check of A
s,min
The anged ponion of the beam section is in tension and the value of A
s,min
will depend on the
use of that beam.
Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate oor
system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw = 2 X 6 = 12 in. in
Eq. (4-11). Also,
note that 34f; is equal to 212 psi:
A _g d _ 212
m, _ W _ ><12><23.521.00 in.2 < Ae (o.k.)
, fy 60,000
However, for a statically determined beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller

of
222W (2 24 in.) or be . Given that be is 42 in. for this beam section,
A: .6. = de = i X 24 X 23.5 = 1.99 111.2 < Ae (o.k.)
f, 60,000
River, NJ 07458.
4-11 (a) Compute Mn for the three beams shown in Fig. P4-11. In each case,
f'c 2 5000 psi and fy 2 60 ksi, b 2 12 in., d 2 32.5 in.,andh 2 36 in.
Beam No. 1
Tension steel area: As 2 6 No. 9 bars 2 6><1.00in.2 26.00 in.2
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming
the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance

from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is
approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension
reinforcement, d, ,
can be calculated to be:
d, 2 36 in. 2.5 in. 233.5 in.
The effective exural depth, d , is given as : d 2 32.5 in.
Assuming that the tension steel is yielding, (6e 2 8y) , using Eq. (4-16):
Asfy 6.00 * 60000 I
a,22 7.06m.
0.85be9 0.85 * 5000 * 12
For f; = 5000 psi, ,81 = 0.80. Therefore, 6 = 01/ 1 2 7'06/080 = 8.83 in.
d 6 32.5 8.83
as = ( C )scu = (W) 0.003 = 0.008

Also, 81 > 0.005 , the section is tension-controlled and (0 20.9.
a 0.9 * 6.00 * 60000 (32.5 %) I
M. <1>Asfy (4 5) 12000 _ 782 166-6
Beam No. 2
Compression steel area: A; 2 2 No. 9 bars 2 2>< 1.00in.2 22.00 in.2
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d 232 in., d, 233.5 in. and d' is given as d' 2
2.5in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the
tension steel is yielding
nnr I1no +142. h~inl nnr ownr nv-nnor11v-o Aonnrikorl in Conf;nn A "I +n
{33.4.4 +142. marsh-n1 nvin Aon+k n
River, NJ 07458.
Try 0 2 d/4 28 in.
C d 8 2.5
as 2 3611 2 0.003 2 0.00206
< C > < 8 )
fs' 2 Esss 2 29,000 * 0.00206 2 59.7 ksi (<fy)

Cs' 2 As'(fs' 0.85fc) 2 2.00(59.7 0.85 * 5) 2 111 kip
CC 2 0.85fc'blc 2 0.85 * 5 * 12 * 0.80 * 8 2 326 kip
T 2 Asfy 2 6.00 * 60 2 360 kip
Because T < Ce + Cs , we should decrease C for the second trial.
Try C 2 6.5 in.

as 2 0.00185
fs' 2 53.6 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 98.7 kip
CC 2 265 kip
T = 360 kip 2 cs + Cs' 2 364 kip
With section equilibrium established, we must conrm the assumption that the
tension steel is
yielding.
d 6 32.5 6.5
as =( C )asu = (T) 0.003 = 0.012
Clearly, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

section.
So, using a: 2 [31C 2 0.8 * 6.5 2 5.2 in., use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M.
qun = 6 [cs (61 g) + Cs(d (1')] = 0.9 [265 (32.5 522) + 99(325 2.5)] =
816 kip-ft
Beam No. 3
Compression steel area: A; 2 4 No. 9 bars 2 4><1.00in.2 24.00 in.2
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d 232.5 in., and d7 233.5 in.
The compression reinforcement for this beam section is provided in two layers
and d' is given as
3.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will the same procedure as for
beam No. 2
(assuming that the tension steel is yielding).
The depth of the neutral axis for this section should be smaller compared with
beam section No.
2, since the compression reinforcement is increased for this section.
Try C = 6.0 in. (Note that both layers of the compression steel will be in the
compression zone)
as' = 0.00125
fs' = 36.3 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 128 kip
Cs 2 245 kip
River, NJ 07458.
T = 360 kip < Cs + Cs' 2 373 kip
Because T < Ce + C e, we should decrease C for the second trial.
Try C 2 5.8 in.
as 2 0.00119
fs' 2 34.5 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 121 kip
CC 2 237 kip
T = 360 kip 2 cs + Cs' 2 358 kip
tension steel is
yielding.
d 6 32.5 5.8
as =( C )asu = (T) 0.003 = 0.014
Clearly, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

section.
So, using a: 2 [31C 2 0.8 * 5.8 2 4.6 in., use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M.
qun = 6 [cs (d g) + Cs(d (1')] = 0.9 [237 (32.5 $) + 121(32.5 3.5)]
= 800 kip-ft
(b) From the results of part (a), comment on Whether adding compression
reinforcement is a cost-effective way of increasing the strength, Mn, of a
beam.
Comparing the values of M e for the three beams, it is clear that for a given
amount of tension
reinforcement, the addition of compression steel has little effect on the
nominal moment capacity,
as long as the tension steel yields in the beam without compression
reinforcement. As a result,
adding compression reinforcement in not a cost effective way of increasing the
nominal moment
capacity of a beam. However, adding compression reinforcement improves the
ductility and
might be necessary when large amounts of tension reinforcement are used to
change the behavior
from compression controlled to tension controlled.

River, NJ 07458.
4-12 Compute Mn for the beam shown in Fig. P4-12. Use fc 2 4500 psi and fy 2
60, 000 psi. Does the compression steel yield in this beam at nominal strength?
A. = 6 No. 8 bars = 6x079 111.2: 4.741112, 61 = 25 in.2.5 in. = 22.5 in.
A; = 2 No. 7 bars = 2x 0.60in.2=l.2 111.2, 61' = 2.5 in.
Because
tension
and use
neutral
this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the

steel is yielding
the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the
axis depth, c.
Try C 2 61/4 2 5.5 in.

For fs' = 4500 psi, ,81 = 0.825. Thus, a = ,81 r 6 = 0.825 r 5.5 = 4.54 in. <
5.0 in.
Since the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than 5.0 in. ,(0! <5.0 in),
the width of the
compression zone is constant and equal to 10 in., i.e. b 210 in.
C d 5.5 2.5
as 2 3611 2 <) 0.003 2 0.00164
C 5.5
fs' = Esas' = 29,000 * 0.00164 2 47.6 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 As'(fs 0.85fs') = 1.2(47.6 0.85 r 4.5) = 52.5 kip
Cs 2 0.85fc'b,81C = 0.85 r 4.5 r 10 r 0.825 r 5.5 = 173.5 kip
T = Asfy = 4.74 r 60 = 284 kip
Because T > CC + C s , we should increase C for the second trial.
Try C 2 6.5 in.
C d 5.5 2.5
as 2 $611 2 <) 0.003 2 0.00185
C 5.5
fs' = Esas' = 29,000 * 0.00164 2 53.7 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 As'(fs 0.85fs') = 1.2(47.6 0.85 r 4.5) = 59.9 kip
Since a: 2 5.4 in. > 5 in., the width of the compression zone is not constant.
Using a similar
reasoning as in the case of anged sections, where the depth of the Whitney
stress block is in the
web of the section, the compression force can be calculated from the following
equations (refer to
Fig. S4-12):
Csw = 0.85fs'ba = 0.85 * 4.5 * 10 * 5.4 = 207 kip
Q, = 0.85fs'(20 10)(a 5): 0.85 * 4.5 * 10 * 0.4 = 15 kip
Cs 2 Csw + Cs, 2 222 kip
T = 284 kip 2 cs + Cs' 2 282 kip
tension steel is
yielding.
d _ 6 22.5 6.5
as 2 ( C )geu = (T) 0.003 = 0.0074
Thus, the tension steel is yielding (6s > 0.00207) and it is a tensioncontrolled section.
River, NJ 07458.
Summing the moments about the level of the tension reinforcement:
6pm,, 2 [ch(d%) + Ccf<daT55)+Cs'(dd)]
.4 5
2 5) + 59.9(225 2.5)] = 415 kip-ft
5.4
Mn = 0.9 [207 (22.5 7) + 15 (22.5
The strain in the compression steel at nominal moment capacity is 0.00185, the
compression steel
has not yielded at nominal strength.
River, NJ 07458.
%bw%
2 +0.85%
11'; Q Q T
f 1
ff's
h
9 Q) Q) Q) Q Q) =
f
QSnyV
Ha (assumed)
a) total beam section and stress distribution
432
i i
| |
I I
H92
2 ER
29:2
QHQ
a
:7
T1
%
| F
Ha
b) Part 1: web of section and corresponding internal forces
(a+li\t)/2
Ccf
h
T2
HE
C) Part 2: overhanging anges and corresponding internal forces
Fig. S4-12.1 Beam section and internal forces for the case of a > h;2012 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This
River, NJ 07458.

River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 5
5-1 Give three reasons for the minimum cover requirements in the ACI code.
- To ensure enough concrete is present to develop the reinforcement.
- To protect reinforcement from corrosive agents.
- To insulate reinforcement in case of fire.
Under what circumstances are larger covers used?
- Highly corrosive environments.
- Situations where abrasion to the concrete surface may result in a reduction in
cover provided.
Note: See Section 5.3 Concrete Cover and Bar Spacing for further discussion.
5-2 Give three reasons for using compression reinforcement in beams.
- To reduce long-term deections (i.e. creep).
- It tends to lead to a more ductile failure mode.
- Some compression reinforcement is always required for fabrication of rebar
cages.
5-1
5-3 Design a rectangular beam section, i.e. select b, d, h, and the required
tension
reinforcement, at midspan for a 22 ft-span simply supported rectangular beam
that
supports its own dead load, a superimposed service dead load of 1.25 kip/ft, and
a
uniform service load of 2 kip/ft. Use the procedure in Section 5.3 for the
design of
beam sections Where the dimensions are unknown. Use f c 2 4500 psi and fy 2 60
ksi.
Step 1: Estimate the dead load due to self-weight of the beam:
Method 1; DL20.10 to 0.15 X (SDL + LL)
1120.10 to 0.15 ><(1.25 k/ft + 2 k/ft)
DL 2 3251b/ft to 490 lb/ft
Method 2: .C/18ShS5/12, so estimateh222 in
1720871218 in
DL _{7h2 2 X nglg 15222 12 x15011:=413E
144 in /ft ft 144 in /ft ft ft
Therefore, DL 2 410 lb/ft seems like a good first estimate of the weight of the
beam.
Step 2: Compute the total factored load and factored design moment, MM:
From ACI-08 Chapter 9:
w 2 1.2 wD + 1.6 wL , or 1.4 wD
1.2><(0.41 k/ft +1.25 k/ft) + 1.6><(2 k/ft), or 1.4x (0.41 k/ft + 1.25 k/ft)
5.20 k/ft, or 2.35 k/ft
W
M
W
M
For this simply supported span,
M _ 77,72 _ 5.20 k/ft x(22 ff)2
e 2 315 kft 2 3775 kin
8 8
Step 3: Select p and the corresponding R-factor:
Assume the desirable strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to 2
0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
,Blf 'e _ 0.825 x 4,500 psi
2 20.0154 Note: 2 0.825 for s2 4,500 si

p 4 fy 4>< 60,000 psi m f p
From Eq. (5-21):
60 : Pfy : 0.0154><60,000 ps1 20205
f e 4,500 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R 2 wf 'e (1 0.59m) 2 0.205 X 4.5 ksi ~ (1 0.59 X 0.205) 2 0.81 1 ksi
(Note that this R-factor is reasonable based on values given in Table A-3)
5-2
River, NJ 07458.
Step 4: Select section dimensions, 17 and h:
From Eq. (5-23):
M _.
d2 ==3775 k m I =5170 in3
R 0.9 X 0.811 ksr
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the
designer can
assume any reasonable 01 value. Here we assume or 2 0.7
% - %
012 M" = & =19.5 in
aR 0.7 x 0.9x 0.811ks1
h2d+2.5in222in
b=06d=0.7><19.5 in213.65 in214 in
Note that both h and b are rounded up to the nearest even inch value for
constructability.
Step 5: Determine As and select the reinforcing bars:
First, go back and recalculate the weight of the beam with the final selected
dimensions:
aAhe e X LIE14111532 12 x1501be=321E
SO, W = 5.09 k/ft and MM = 308 kft = 3695 kin
DL
Calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd 2 0.961 :
From Eq. (5-16):
AI = M 2 3695 1 . = 3.90 in2
a] 0.9 X 60 ksr X (0.9 X 19.5 in)
(d-E
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, 3.90 in2 x 60 ksi
a = = _ _ 24.37 in
0.85f 'e b 0.85 X 4.5 ksr X 14 in
From Eq. (5-16):

A = M, 3695 k-in
e a 2 . . 23.95in2
fy dE 0.9><60ks1>< 19.5 in-
4.37 in]
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very
reasonable. Select 4#9
bars as bottom reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
A 24A,, 24x1.0in2 24.0 in2 23.95 in2 OK
Step 6: Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b 2 14
in is sufciently
wide for 4 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
5-3

River, NJ 07458.
2) Use ACI08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than
the minimum
required.
Forfs 2 4,500 psi, 3")"e 2 2012 200 so use 3"f 'e
3 l l
min 2 f bwd2x14inx19.5in20.92in2S4.0in2 OK
fy 60,000 ps1
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that
assuming 2 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
A ' 2 '
a : sfy : 4.01n ><60ks1 24.481n
0.85f e b 0.85 x 4.5 ksi x 14 in
We know that ,8] = 0.825 (see above).
C_ i _ 4.48 in
T ,6, T 0.825
From Eq. (4-18):
d -C 19.5 in -5.43 in
St : gcu : .
C 5.43 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use 2 0.9 for this beam design.
2 5.43 in
X 0.003 2 0.0078 2 0.005 OK
4) Finally, verify that the nominal exural strength is sufcient for the
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
Aafy {d %) = 0.9x 4.0 in2 x 60 ksi x {195 in _ 4.48 in
M
n
) 2 3725 k-in
M 310 kft 2 308 kft 2 Me
n
Therefore, this design is sufficient without being too conservative.
Note that other combinations of b, h, and As may also be correct if different

assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Step 6 are satisfied, without
being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
214in.2-
22in.
4 #9 bars
2.5inH
Fig. S5-4 Cross-section of nal design at mid-span
54
5-4 The rectangular beam shown in Fig. P5-4 carries its own dead load (you must
guess
values for b and h) plus an additional uniform service load of 0.5 kip/ft and a
uniform
service live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The dead load acts on the entire beam, of
course, but
the live load can act on parts of the span. Three possible loading cases are
shown in
Fig. P5-4. Use load and strength reduction factors from ACI Code sections 9.2
and
9.3.
a) Draw factored bending-moment diagrams for the three loading cases shown
and superimpose them to draw a bending-moment envelope.
Begin by estimating the dead load due to self-weight of the beam:
Method 1; DL20.10 to 0.15 X (SDL + LL)
DL20.10 to 0.15 X (0.5 k/ft + 1.5 k/ft)
DL 2 200 lb/ft to 300 lb/ft
Method 2: {/18S h S[/12, so estimate h 222 in
1920871218 in
DL gAhe 2 X LE=_181IX32;%1501_E=4132
144 in /ft ft 144m /ft ft ft
We select DL 2 350 lb/ft as a first estimate of the weight of the beam.
So, using Wu 2 1.2wD + 1.6wL from ACI 318-08, Chapter 9, the bending-moment
envelope is as
follows:
2261.0 fr Ci-
1535 144
Fig. S5-5a Bending moment envelope
5-5
River, NJ 07458.
b) Design a rectangular beam section for the maximum positive bending moment
between the supports, selecting b, d, h, and the reinforcing bars. Use the
procedure in Section 5.3 for the design of beam sections where the dimensions
are unknown. Use 1", 2 5000 psi and fy 2 60 ksi.
It is necessary to design this beam section for both negative and positive
bending. The
need for a practical design makes it reasonable to assume that the outer
dimensions of the beam
will be constant along the length, and that these dimensions will be controlled
by the design of the
section subjected to the largest absolute value of moment. As seen in Part (a),
the largest expected
moment is a positive moment of 226 kip-ft (2715 k-in). Therefore, it is
reasonable to begin the
beam design by designing the beam at this location.
Assume the strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to = 0.9 I
From Eq. (5-19):
if 's _ 0.80>< 5,000 psi
2 0.0167 Note: 0120.80 forfs2 5,000 psi
4 fy 4 X 60, 000 psi
p2
From Eq. (5-21):
m _ pf, _ 0.0167 X 60,000 psi
f 'e 5,000 psi
2 0.20
From Eq. (5-22):

R 2 wf 'e (1 0.59m) 2 0.20 X 5 ksi X (1 0.59 X 0.20) 2 0.882 ksi
Step 2: Select section dimensions, b and h:
From Eq. (5-23):
d2 = Me = 2715 k-rn .=3420 in3
R 0.9><0.882 ksr
designer can
assume any reasonable 01 value. Here we assume or 2 0.7
% ~ %
012 M" = & 217.0in217.5in
07R 0.7 x 0.9 x 0.882 ksi
h2d+2.5in220in
b=06d=0.7><l7.51n=12.51nEl41I1
constructability.
Step 3: Determine As and select the reinforcing bars:
First, go back and recalculate the weight of the beam with the final selected
dimensions:
bh lb 14 in x 20 in
lb lb
L Ex TZX15032292
So, using pattern loading again, the maximum positive moment is: Me 2 222 kft 2
2670 kin
5-6
River, NJ 07458.
Now calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd 2 0.961 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A = Me 2670 his
I I I = 3.14 in2
d a 0.9 X 60 ksr X (0.9 X 17.5 in)
fy 5
III
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 3.14 in2 x60 ksi
- 23.16 in
0.85feb 0.85x5 ksix14 in
From Eq. (5-16):
A = Me _ 2670 k-rn = 3.11 in2
pf, (d %) O.9>< 60 ksi>< (17.5 in 316 1)

AS 24A,,24x0.79in223.16in223.11in2 OK
Step 4: Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
For fs = 5,000 psi, 3. / f 'e = 212 2 200 so use 3 l f 'e
3 ' 3"
e mi 2 42570, 2 x 14 in X175 in 2 0.87 in2 S 3.16 in2 OK
fy 60, 000 ps1
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 3.16 in2 x60 ksi
_= 3.19 in
0.85feb 0.85x5 ksi><14 in
6=i=319 1 =3.99 in
0. 0.80
From Eq. (4-18):
6 za 2Mx000320010220005 OK
C C 3.99 in
5-7
River, NJ 07458.
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
7547, (d %) = 0.9 X 3.16 in2 X 60 ksix (17.5 in 319 1
M
\J 2 2715 k-in
M 2 226 kft 2 222 kft 2 M u
n
Therefore, this design for positive bending is sufficient without being too
conservative.
c) Using the beam section from part (b), design flexural reinforcement for the
maximum negative moment over the roller support.
Since the outer dimensions are selected, the design for negative bending follows
the method for
designing a rectangular section where the section dimensions are known. The
maximum expected
negative moment, considering pattern loading, is Mu 2 138.5 kip-ft 2 1660 kipin.
Determine As and select the reinforcing bars for negative bending:
Assume jd 2 0.9d:
From Eq. (5-16):
A _ Mu _ 1660
S _ a _
(Pfy (d _ 7) 0.9 * 60(0.9 >i< 17.5)
2 1.95 in.2
From Eq. (5-17):

_ Asfy _ 195*60 _197.
a T 0.85fs'b T 0.85 * 5 * 14 T ' m'
From Eq. (5-16):

Mu 1660
= = = . '.2
s fy(d%) 0.9*60(17.5%) 186m
No further iterations are necessary since the solution has essentially

converged. Select 2#9 bars as
top reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As 2 2.4,, = 2 r 1.0 = 2 in.2 2 1.86 in.2
Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
For fs = 5,000 psi, 3% = 212 so use 3 fs'

3 f 's b d 3s/5000
I mm _ W 2 IX 14 in x175 in 20.87 in2 S 2.0 in2
fy 60,000 ps1
OK
5-8
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 2.0 in2 X 60 ksi
0.85feb T 0.85x5 ksix14 in
2 2.02 in
1 _ 2.02 in
,6] 0.80
2 2.53 in
From Eq. (4-18):
at = 6. = M x 0.003 = 0.0178 2 0.005
C 2.53 in OK
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
2.02 in
Me = ijy (d g) = 0.9 X 2.0 in2 X 60 ksi X (17.5 in ) 21780 k-in

qun 2 148 kip-ft > 138.5 kip-ft 2 Mu
The cross-sections of the beam design at maximum positive and negative bending
moments is
shown below.
214in.2- 214in.22.5m.A
2 #9 bars
20m. 20m.
4 #8 bars
2.51nH
Fig. S5-5b Cross-sections of nal designs for positive and negative bending
respectively
Note that other combinations of b, h, and As may also be correct if different
assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Steps 4 and 6 are satisfied,
without being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-9
River, NJ 07458.
5-5 Design three rectangular beam sections, i.e. select b and d and the tension
steel area
As, to resist a factored design moment, M, 2 260 kip-ft. For all three cases
select a
section with b 2 0.511 and use f, 2 4000 psi and fy 2 60 ksi.
a) Start your design by assuming that s, 2 0.0075 (as was done in Section 5.3)
The equations presented in section 5 .3 initially assumed that s, 2 0.0075. So,
while no changes
need to be made, their derivation will briey be shown to easy comparisons with
the solutions to
parts (b) and (c).
0.003
6: gm xd2xd20.286d
gee + 5e 0.003 + 0.0075

Ce = 0.85 f 'e p136 = 0.85 f 'I pp X 02864 = 0.24p1 f 'e bd
Now, enforce equilibrium:

Ce 2 T
0.24lfebd 2Aefy
Thus we have an expression for the initial p value when 8, 2 0.0075 is assumed,
from Eq. 5-19:
_ 0.24lfe _ 0.24x 0.85 x 4,000 psi
pinitial fy 60, 000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
m 2 pf, 2 0.0136 X 60,000 psi
f 'e 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R 2 wf 'e (1 0.59m) 2 0.204 X 4 ksi ~ (1 0.59 X 0.204) 2 0.718 ksi
From Eq. (5-23):
612 2 2 3120 k-in
R 0.9 x 0.718 ksi
We are told to assume or 2 0.5
% - A
612(Mu) =() =21.3ih221.5 in
2 0.0136
2 0.204
2 4830 in3 Note that with s, 2 0.0075, (0 2 0.9
aR 0.5x0.9x0.718 ksi
b =Otd 20.5><21.5 in 210.8 in 212 in
Note that both d and b are rounded up so that h and b both result in even inch
values for
constructability.
Now, determine As and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd 2 0.961 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A = M 2 3120 1 =2.99iu2
S a 0.9X60ksix 0.9><21.5 in
fy(d_E\J ( )
5-10
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 2.99 in2 X 60 ksi
- 24.40 in
0.85feb 0.85x4 ksix12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
A 2 Me 3120 k-1n 23.00in2
x
fy (d T?) 0.9x60 ksi>< (21.5 in- 4421)

AS 23A,,23x1.0in223.0in223.0in2 OK
Now do the required checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
Forfs 2 4,000 psi, 3sf e 2190 S 200 so use 200.
_ 200 psi b d _ 200 psi
mm _ W _ I><12 in><21.5 in20.86 in2S3.0 in2 OK
fy 60,000 ps1
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy _ 3.0 in2 X 60 ksi
24.4lin
0.85), b 0.85 X 4 ksi X 12 in

We know that ,6] = 0.85 .
6:1: 441] =5.19 in
p, 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
6 2 2 w >< 0.003 = 0.0094 2 0.005 OK
6
t C C 5.19 in
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
4.41 in
M
7 ijy (d %) = 0.9x 3.0 in2 x60 ksix (21.5 in )= 3125 k-in
M
260 kft 2 260 kft 2 M u
n
b) Start your design by assuming that s, 2 0.005
5-11
River, NJ 07458.
We need to re-derive an expression for p, using the same approach used in part
(a).
6: gm d=&xd=0.375d
gee + Ce 0.003 + 0.005
Ce = 0.85fe p136 = 0.85fe lbx 0.37561 20.319>< lfebd
Ce 2 T
0.319p1febd 2 Aefy
Thus we have an expression for the initial p value when 8, 2 0.005 is assumed:
_ 0319,61) 'e _ 0.319 x 0.85 X 4,000 psi
p,,,.,,.,, T f, T 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
m 2 pf, 2 0.0181x 60,000 psi
f e 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R 2 wf 'e (1 0.59a)) 2 0.271>< 4 ksi X (1 0.59 X 0.271) 2 0.911 ksi
From Eq. (5-23):
2 = M = = 3805 in3 Note that with a, = 0.005, (0 = 0.9

R 0.9 X 0.911 ksr
We are told to assume or 2 0.5
% . %
612 = & =19.7iu219.5iu
aR 0.5 x 0.9 x 0.911ksi
h2d+2.51n222in
b206d20.5><19.5 in210 in
20.0181
2 0.271
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability.
Normally these values
would be rounded up, but since the estimate for d is so much nearer to 19.5 in
than 21.5 in, it is
rounded down in this solution. Adequate strength of the section will still be
achieved by selection
of an appropriate As value.
Now, determine As and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd 2 0.961 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A 2 Me 3120 k-in
I I I = 3.29 in2
a 0.9x60 ks1><(0.9><19.5 in)
fy d 2
III
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 3.29 in2 x 60 ksi
25.81 in
0.85f'e b 0.85 X 4 ksi X 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
M _.
A = 3120 k m = 3.48 in2
fy (d %) O.9>< 60 ksi X (19.5 in

Iterate once more to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
5.81 in]
5-12
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 3.48 in2 x60 ksi
26.14 in
0.85feb 0.85x4 ksi><10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
M _.
A = 312% m =3.52 in2
s
fy (d %) 0.9x60 ksi>< (19.5 in

N 0 further iterations are necessary, since the solution has converged. Select
3#10 bars as bottom
reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
AS 2 3A,, 2 3><1_27 in2 23.81 in2 23.52 in2 OK
6.14 in]
in is sufciently
wide for 3 #10 bars to be placed in a single layer. NOT OK
So, either different bars must be selected, or the beam must be widened. Here we
choose to widen
the beam so that b 2 12 in.
the minimum
required.
Forfs 2 4,000 psi, 34f e 2190 S 200 so use 200.
A. m 2 200 W W 2 me 12 in ><19.5 in = 0.78 in2 2 3.81 in2 OK
fy 60,000 ps1
From Eq. (5-17):
Asf, _ 3.81in2 x60 ksi
_ = 5.60 in
0.85f 'I b 0.85 X 4 ksi>< 12 in

We know that ,6] = 0.85 .
6=i=560m 26.59 in
p; 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
6 2 2 m X 0.003 = 0.0059 2 0.005 OK
8
t C C 6.59 in
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
Mf, (d %) = 0.9x 3.81iu2 X 60 ksi X (195 in _ 5-60 1n
M
n
] 2 3435 k-in
M 2 286 kft 2 260 kft 2 Me
n
5-13
River, NJ 07458.
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Since Me is 10% larger than M u , this
design is perhaps too
conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting different
bars, or slightly
resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efcient, so
different initial
assumptions can lead to different designs.
c) Start your design by assuming that s, 2 0.0035. You will probably need to add
compression reinforcement to make this a tension-controlled section.
We need to re-derive an expression for p, using the same approach used in part
(a).
asu _ 0.003 d _ 046m
asu + as T 0.003 + 0.0035 T '
Cs 2 08511111316 = 0851112131 * 0.4-62d = 0393111311161
C:
Ce 2 T
0.393fclbd 2 Asfy
Thus we have an expression for the initial p value when 8, 2 0.0035 is assumed:
0.393fc,81 _ 0.393 * 4000 * 0.85
pinitial = fy 60000 = 0-0223
From Eq. (5-21):

pfy 0.0223 * 60000
0.) : :
fc 4000 = 0.335
From Eq. (5-22):
R 2 wfc(1 0.590)) 2 0.335 * 4(1 0.59 * 0.335) 2 1.075 ksi
Before we can estimate the dimensions of the beam with Eq. (5-23), we need to
determine .
Although we began by assuming that 8,2 0.0035, tension controlled sections are
so desirable that
we will ensure that the section is tension controlled. Compression reinforcement
might be required.
Set q!) 2 0.9.
From Eq. (5-23):
Mu 3120 k-in.
bdz : :
qu 0.9 * 1.075 ksi
= 322 5 in.3
We are told to assume or 2 0.5. Also, since we had difculty placing all the
steel required in part
(b) due to insufficient beam width, and part (c) requires a higher reinforcement
ratio to limit the
tensile strains, we will begin by assuming that two layers of reinforcement will
be required.
d><Mu)1/3_< 3120k-in. )1/3186' ~185'
01qu T 0.5*0.9*1.075ksi T 'm'T 'm'
h2d+3.5222in.
Recall that we use 3.5 in. instead of 2.5 in. to account for the effect the
second layer of steel has on
the location of the centroid of the tension reinforcement.
5-14
River, NJ 07458.
b 2 ad 2 0.5 * 18.5 2 10 in.
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability.
Now, Determine As and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd 2 0.961 :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3 120
As 2
913 (d %) T 0-9 * 60(0.9 r 18.5)
2 3.47 in.2
From Eq. (5-17):
_ Asfy _ 347*60 612'
a T 0.85fs'b T 0.85 * 4 * 10 T ' m'
From Eq. (5-16):

Mu 3120
s T 913 (d %) T 0.9 * 60(18.5 _6-23)
2 3.74 in.2
Iterate once more to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy 3.74 * 60 I
0! = = = 6.6111.
0.85fs'b 0.85 * 4 * 10
From Eq. (5-16):

Mu 3120
s T 913 (d %) T 0.9 * 60(18.5 %)
2 3.8 in.2
N 0 further iterations are necessary, since the solution has converged. Select
5#8 bars as bottom
reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As 2 5A,, 2 5 r 0.79 = 3.95 in.2 > 3.8 in.2 OK

Check whether the section is tensioned controlled:
_ Asfy _ 3.95*60 697'
a T 0.85fs'b T 0.85 * 4 * 10 T ' 1'
6:1: 697 m 28.2 in
,6] 0.85
d C 18.5 8.2
st 2 3611 2 70.003 2 0.0037 < 0.005
Compression steel must be added to have a tension-controlled section.
Try adding 2 #8 bars in the compression zone, which is approximately 0.5/1s,
with d' 2 2.5 in.
Try C 2 7.5 in.
7 C d 7.5 2.5
as 2 < C >3, 2 (T) 0.003 2 0.002
fs' 2 Esss 2 29,000 >i< 0.002 2 58 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 As'(fs 0.85fc) 2 1.58(58 0.85 >i< 4) 2 86 kip
5-15
River, NJ 07458.
Cs 2 0.85fs'bp16 = 0.85 * 4 * 10 * 0.85 * 7.5 = 217 kip
T = Asfy = 3.95 * 60 = 237 kip < Cs' + Cs 2 303
Try C 2 5.8 in.
as 2 0.00171
fs' 2 49.6 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 73 kip
CC 2 168 kip
T 2 Asfy 2 3.95 * 60 2 237 kip < Cs' + CC 2 241
in is sufciently

the minimum
required.
Forfs 2 4,000 psi, 3 if e 2190 S 200 so use 200.
A. m 2 200 p51 W 2 LN X 10 in X 20.5 in = 0.68 in2 2 3.95 in2 OK
fy 60, 000 ps1
assuming q!) 2 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (4-18):
at 6 18.5 5.8
C asu = T0.003 = 0.0066 > 0.005
St:
Ok, 6 = 0.9.
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
or 5.8 I
6pm,, 2 6 [cs (61 2) + Cs(d (1')] = 0.9 [168 (18.5 7) + 73(18.5 2.5)] =
284 klp-ft
qun 2 284 kip-ft > 260 kip-ft 2 Mu
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Again, since 675M is 10% larger than M
u , this design is perhaps
too conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting
different bars, or slightly
resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efcient, so
different initial
assumptions can lead to different designs.
5-16
River, NJ 07458.
(1) Compare and discuss your three section designs.
212in.2
24in.
. i
2.51IIH 3 #9 bars
212in.2
22in.
2.5inH
Fig S5-6 Cross sections of section designs from parts (a), (b), and (c),
respectively
3 #10 bars
210in. 2
2 #8 bars
22in.
if
3.51n.
i 5 #8 bars
Note that the area of reinforcement provided is higher in the third design
compared to
either of the first two, even though the section size is smaller. The design for
part (c) also required
compression steel to ensure a tension controlled section, whereas the sections
in parts (a) and (b)
were tension controlled as singly-reinforced sections.
5-17
River, NJ 07458.
5-6 You are to design a rectangular beam section to resist a negative bending
moment of
275 kip-ft. Architectural requirements will limit your beam dimensions to a
width of
12 in. and a total depth of 18 in. Using those maximum permissible dimensions,
select
reinforcement to provide the required moment strength following the ACI Code
provisions for the strength reduction factor, (I). Use f c 2 5000 psi and f y 2
60 ksi.
Begin by trying to design the section as singly reinforced, with one layer of
tension steel.
Set at 2 15.5 in.
M, 3300
= = = 4.381112
5 a
(pfy (d _ 7) 0.9 * 60(0.9 >i< 15.5)
A
Either 5 #9 bars of 6 #8. To t within the 12 in. beam width, 2 layers of bars
are required.
Try 5 #9 bars:
3*15.5+2*13.5 I
d 2 f 2 14.7 In.
Asfy 5 * 60
2 2 2 5.88 ' .
a 0.85fs'b 0.85 * 5 * 12 m
_ a _5.88_735I
C_,81_0.80_' In.
Check whether the tension steel has yielded, and whether the section is tension
controlled.
at C 14.7 7.35
as 2 C 3611 2 T0003 2 0.003 > 0.00207 2 3y
dt C 15.5 7.35 I I
st 2 C 3611 2 T0003 2 0.0033 < 0.005,wh1ch1s not ok.
Add compression steel so that A's z 0.5/1s; try 3 #8 bars so that A's 2 3 * 0.79
2 2.37 in.2
By iteration, C 2 5.05 in.
as' = 0.00151
fs' = 43.9 ksi (<fy)
Cs' 2 94.0 kip
Cs 2 206 kip
T = 300 kip 2 Cs + Cs' 2 300 kip
Check whether the section is tension controlled.
d, 6 15.5 5.05
a, = C asu = T0.003 = 0.0062 > 0.005, 0K
Calculate the nominal moment capacity:

a 2 [31C 2 0.8 * 5.05 2 4.04 in.
a 4.04
qun = 6 [cs (d E) + Cs(d d')] = 0.9 [206 (14.7 T?) + 94(14.7 2.5)] = 282
kip-ft
szn = 282 kip-ft > 275 kip-ft
5-18
River, NJ 07458.
in. is sufficiently
the minimum
required.
Forfs 2 5,000 psi, 3%? 2 212 > 200 so use 212.
_ 3 fc _ 212 _ I 2 I 2
As,min fybwd mlz * 14.7 0.623111. < 5111. ,OK
Already verified that q!) 2 0.9 is OK, and calculated the nominal moment
capacity.
5-19
River, NJ 07458.
5-7 For column line 2, use the ACI Moment Coefcients given in ACI Code section
8.3.3
to determine the maximum positive and negative factored moments at the support
faces for columns A-2 and B-2, and at the midspan of an exterior span and the
interior span.
First, conrm that the ACI moment coefficients can be used.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Two or more spans OK

Longer span length within 20% of shorter OK
Loads are uniformly distributed OK
Unfactored LL load does not exceed 3 times DL OK
Members are prismatic OK
Now, estimate the dead load supported by column line 2:

Dead load from beam, per foot of beam:
12 ' 1 ' 1b 1b
L281 x1503 = 225E
144 111/
ft2
Dead load from slab, per foot of beam:
6 m ((12 ft +11 ft%]
12 1%
Superimposed dead load, per foot of beam:
12 ft+11 ft X20132: 230E
2 ft ft
x1501b3 =863E
ft ft
Can the live load be reduced? From Eq. (5-3):
At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam:
L, = L 0.25 + i = 0.050 k/ftz x [0.25 + #] = 0.041 k/ftz
JKLLAT \I2x11.5 ftx30ft
At column B-2:
15 2 15 2
Le 2 L 0.25 + 2 0.050 k/ft X 0.25 + 2 0.034 k/ft
(KLLAT \I2x11.5 ftx55 ft
At midspan of interior span:
L7 2 L 0.25 +i 2 0.050 k/ft2 x 0.25 +# 2 0.044 k/ft2
"KLLAT \I2x11.5 ftx25 ft
Live load, per foot of beam:
At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam: Lyl x 41f1T; 2 4721f2
t t
At column B-2: w x 3411)2 = 391E
2 ft ft
At midspan of interior span: L2 x 44% 2 5061f2
t t
5-20
So, using we 2 1.2DL + 1.6LL, the factored loads are:
we 21.2>< (0.225 k/ft + 0.863 k/ft + 0.230 k/ft) +1.6 >< (0.472 k/ft) : 2.34
k/ft
At column B-2:
we :1.2 X (0.225 k/ft + 0.863 k/ft + 0.230 k/ft) +1.6>< (0.391 k/ft) : 2.21 k/ft
we 21.2>< (0.225 k/ft + 0.863 k/ft + 0.230 k/ft) +1.6 >< (0.506 k/ft) : 2.39
k/ft
Calculate the clear span length, LII :
At
At
At
At
At
column A-2: C 2 30 ft 16 in 2 28.67 ft

midspan of exterior span: 6 2 30 ft 16 in
column B-2 (exterior): 6,:(30 ft + 25 f/t /)
column B-2 (interior): 23::(30 ft + 25 f/t /)
midspan of interior span: 25 ft 16 m: 23. 67
28. 67 ft
16 in : 26.17 ft
16 in : 26.17 ft
ft
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coefcients from section 8.3.3:

WILIZ _ 2.34 k/ftx(28.67 ft)2
At column A-2: M 2 2 120 k-ft
16 16
w L 2 2.34 k/ft>< (28.67 ft)2
At midspan of exterior span: M e 2 A 2
14 14
w 6 2 2.21k/ft><(26.17 ft)2
At column B-2 (exterior): Me 2 # 2
10 10
2 2.21 ft 26.17 ft 2
At column B-2 (interior): Me 2 % 2 #
/ 2 2.39 k/ft 23.67 ft 2
At midspan of interior span: M e 2 % 2
2137 kft
2 151k-ft
2 138 kft
# 2 83.7 kft
5-21
2012 Pearson Education, Inc, Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This
to: Rights and Permissions Department, Pearson Education, Inc, Upper Saddle
River, NJ 07458.
5-8 Repeat problem 5-7, but use structural analysis software to determine the
maximum
positive and negative moments described in problem 5-7. The assumed beam, slab
and column dimensions are given in the gure. Assume 12 ft story heights above
and
below this floor level. You must use appropriate live load patterns to maximize
the
various factored moments. Use a table to compare the answers from Problems 5-7
and 5-8.
From Problem 5-7, the factored loads are:
At column B-2:
Properties of elements used for model:
Column:
Ag 216 inX16 in 2256 in2
1g = (16 in)4 / 12 = 5,460 m
Beam (Use properties of the web as an approximation of the cracked properties):
Ag 212 in x 24 in 2 288 in2
Ig = 12 in X (24 in)3 /12 213,800 m
w, = 2.34 k/ft
w = 2.21 k/ft
w = 2.39 k/ft
We assume story heights of 12 ft above and below the continuous beam being
modeled, and
include columns, xed at their ends, in our model. Then we apply the appropriate
load
combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design moments result:
Location ACI Design Moment Design Moment

(From Problem 5-7) (From software)
At column A-2: -120 kip-ft -135 kip-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 137 kip-ft 93.0 kip-ft
At column B-2 (exterior): -151 kip-ft -159 kip-ft
At column B-2 (interior): -138 kip-ft -114 kip-ft

At midspan of interior span: 83.7 kip-ft 55.0 kip-ft
5-22
River, NJ 07458.
5-9 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for column line 1.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Now, estimate the dead weight supported by column line 1:

Dead weight from beam, per foot of beam:
12 in x 18 in
__2
H1
144 A,
Dead weight from slab, per foot of beam:
6 in x 6.5 ft
12 1%
6.5 ft >< 201b2 =130E
ft ft
5011: =225E
ft ft
x1501b3=488E
ft ft
L 2 L 0.25 +i 2 0.050 k/ft2 X 0 25 +; 2 0.052 k/ft2
,IKLLAT_ _ x/2x6ftx30ft_
since Lr ZLL, no reduction is possible, so use LL 2 0.050 k/ft2
At column B-l:
L = L 0.25 +i = 0.050 k/ft2 x 0 25 +; = 0.042 k/ft2

JKLLA, _ ' x/2x6ftx55ft_
L, = L 0.25 +i = 0.050 k/ft2 x 0 25 +; = 0.056 k/ft2
.lKLLA,_ _ \/2x6ftx25ft_
since L, ZLL, no reduction is possible, so use LL 2 0.050 k/ft2

At column A-1 and midspan of exterior beam: 6.5 ft x 50% 2 325%
At column B-l: 6.5 ft x 4213 2 273E
ft ft
. . . lb lb
At m1dspan of 1nter1or span: 6.5 ft x soft2 2 325?
5-23
So, using w = 1.2DL + 1.6LL, the factored loads are:
w, :12 X (0.225 k/ft + 0.488 k/ft + 0.130 k/ft) + 1.6 X (0.325 k/ft) = 1.53 k/ft
At column B-l:
w, :12 X (0.225 k/ft + 0.488 k/ft + 0.130 k/ft) +1.6 >< (0.273 k/ft) =1.45 k/ft
w, :12 X (0.225 k/ft + 0.488 k/ft + 0.130 k/ft) + 1.6 X (0.325 k/ft) =1.53 k/ft
Calculate the clear span length, (n :
At
At
At
At
At
column A-1: C 2 30 ft 16 in 2 28.67 ft

midspan of exterior span: 6 = 30 ft 16 in 28. 67 ft
column B-l (exterior): (30 ft + 25 f/t /) 16 in = 26.17 ft
column B-l (interior): :(30 ft + 25 f/t /) 16 in = 26.17 ft
midspan of interior span: 25 ft 16 m: 23. 67 ft
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coefficients from section 8.3.3:

wunz _ 1.53 k/ftx (28.67 ft)2
At column A-1: M 2 2 78.6
16 16
w 6 2 1.53 k/ft>< (28.67 ft)2
At midspan of exterior span: M
14 14
w r 2 1.45 k/ftx (26.17 ft)2
At column B-l (exterior): MM 2
10 10
w 6 2 1.45 k/ft><(26.17 ft)2
At column B-l (interior): MM 2
k-ft
u 2 A 2 2 89.8 kft
# 2 2 99.3 k-ft
1 1" 2 11 2 90.3 kft
,/ 2 1.53 k/ft 23.67 ft 2

At midspan of interior span: M u 2 % 2 # 2 53.6 kft
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following
properties:
Column:
Ag = 16 inx 16 in =256 in2
1g = (16 in)4 / 12 = 5,460 m
Ag 212 inx 24 in 2288 in2
I" g 12 in X (24 in)3 /12 213,800 in4
5-24
River, NJ 07458.
modeled, and
load

(From software)
At column A-1: -78.6 kip-ft -88.8 kip-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 89.8 kip-ft 60.9 kip-ft
At column B-l (exterior): -99.3 kip-ft -103 kip-ft
At column B-l (interior): -90.3 kip-ft -74.7 kip-ft
5-25
River, NJ 07458.
5-10 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the beam m-n-o-p in Fig. P5-7. Be sure to
comment
on the factored design moment at the face of the spandrel beam support at point
In.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Now, estimate the dead weight supported by beam m-n-o-p:

_12 15128 m x 15011)3 = 225E
144 1n%2 ft ft
12
6 1 1112 ft X150; = 900:3
12 t t
12 ft x 201b2 2 240E
ft ft
At m and midspan of exterior beam:
L, = L 0.25 + i = 0.050 k/ft2 x [0.25 + L] = 0.040 k/ft2
, KLLAT J2 x 12 ft x 30 ft
At 11:
15 2 15 2
L, 2 L 0.25 + 2 0.050 k/ft x 0.25 + 2 0.033 k/ft
JKLLAT \/2x12 ftx55 ft
L, 2 L 0.25 + i 2 0.050 k/ft2 x [0.25 + #] 2 0.043 k/ft2
KLLAT 2x12ftx25 ft
At m and midspan of exterior beam: 12 ft x 40% 2 480%
t t
At n: 12 ftx331E2396E
ft ft
. . . lb lb
At m1dspan of 1nter1or span: 12 ft x 43ft2 2 516E
5-26

At m and midspan of exterior beam:
w, :12 X (0.225 k/ft + 0.900 k/ft + 0.240 k/ft) +1.6 >< (0.480 k/ft) = 2.41 k/ft
At 11:
w, 21.2>< (0.225 k/ft + 0.900 k/ft + 0.240 k/ft) +1.6>< (0.396 k/ft) = 2.27 k/ft
w, 21.2>< (0.225 k/ft + 0.900 k/ft + 0.240 k/ft) +1.6>< (0.516 k/ft) = 2.46 k/ft
Calculate the clear span length, C" :
Atm: C" 2 30ft12in229ft
At midspan of exterior span: C = 30 ft 12 in 29 ft
At n (exterior): =(30 ft + 25 f/t A) 12 in = 26.5 ft
At n (interior): ::3( 0 ft + 25 f/t A) 12 in = 26.5 ft
At midspan of interior span: 25 ft 12 m2 24 ft
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coeff1cients from section 8.3 .3:
may _ 2.41k/ft><(29 ft)2 _
At m: M = 24 24 84.5 k-ft
2 2.41 k/ft 29 ft 2
At midspan of exterior span: M u 2 M 2 # 2145 kft
14 14
2 2 2.27 k/ft 26.5 ft 2
At n (exterior): MM 2 % 2 + 2 159 k-ft
,, 2 2.27 ft 26.5 ft 2
At n (interior): M, = % = # = 145 kft
2 2.46 k/ft 24 ft 2
At midspan of interior span: M u 2 % 2 + 2 88.6 kft
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following
properties:
Ag :12 in>< 24 in =2881n2
Ig = 12 in X (24 in)3 /12 213,800 1114
Here we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that
the beam is
pinned at m and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at n, o, and p.
This neglects the
relatively small amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to
their torsional
rigidity.
5-27
River, NJ 07458.
Now apply the appropriate load combinations following Example 5-2, and the
following design
moments result:

(From software)
At m: -84.5 kip-ft -14.6 kip-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 145 kip-ft 184 kip-ft
At n (exterior): -159 kip-ft -195 kip-ft
At n (interior): -145 kip-ft -200 kip-ft
The software model assumes that there is no torsional rigidity supplied by the
supporting beams.
Therefore, the moment that is predicted by the software at m is only due to the
fact that the beam is
offset from the centerline of the supporting spandrel beam. While neglecting the
torsional rigidity
of the spandrel beams is not realistic, it is also unlikely that the spandrel
beam is torsionally rigid
enough to result in a moment as high as the ACI Design Moments.
5-28
5-11 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the one-way slab strip shown in Fig. P5-7.
For this
problem, find the factored design moments at all the points, a through i,
indicated in
Fig. P5-7.
a) Two or more spans OK
b) Longer span length within 20% of shorter OK
c) Loads are uniformly distributed OK
d) Unfactored LL load does not exceed 3 times DL OK
e) Members are prismatic OK
Now, estimate the dead load supported by slab strip a-i:
Dead load from slab, per foot of slab:
61nx121nx1502751f
t
- 2 3
144 1n/2 ft
ft
Superimposed dead load, per foot of slab:
1 ft >< 201t: = 20E
ft ft
Live load, per foot of slab:
1 ft >< 501132 = 50E
ft ft
This live load cannot be reduced due to the very small inuence area of the slab
strip.
w, :12 X (0.075 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft) +1.6 >< (0.050 k/ft) = 0.194 k/ft
Calculate the clear span lengths, C" :
C" 212 ft12 in 211 ft
C" 211 ft12 in 210 ft
Also, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following
cracked properties:
Beam:
Ag 212 inx6 in272 in2
I 2 0.51g 2 0.5 x 12 in x (6 in)3 / 12 2108 in4
Here, we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that
the slab strip is
pinned at a, and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at c, e, g, and
i. Note that although i
is a point of geometrical symmetry, it cannot be modeled as fixed, since the
pattern loads are not
necessarily symmetrical. Also note that pinning these supports neglects the
relatively small
amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to their torsional
rigidity.
Once the model is constructed, apply the appropriate load combinations following
Example 5 -2.
5-29
River, NJ 07458.
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coeff1cients from section 8.3.3, compared to
design moments
resulting from software model:
Location ACI Moment ACI Design Moment Design Moment

Coeff1cient (From Software)
a -1/24 -0.978 kip-ft 0.423 kip-ft
b 1/ 14 1.68 kip-ft 2.14 kip-ft
c -1/11 -2.13 kip-ft -2.86 kip-ft
d 1/ 16 1.47 kip-ft 1.29kip-ft
e -1/11 -1.76 kip-ft -1.99 kip-ft
f 1/ 16 1.21 kip-ft 1.29 kip-ft
g -1/11 -1.76 kip-ft -1.99 kip-ft
h 1/ 16 1.21 kip-ft 1.24 kip-ft
i -1/11 -1.76 kip-ft -1.94 kip-ft
5-30
River, NJ 07458.
5-12 Use structural analysis software to find the maximum factored moments for
the
girder on column line C. Find the maximum factored positive moments at o and y,
and the maximum factored negative moments at columns C-1, C-2, and C-3.
Estimate the loads supported by the beam along column line C:
Distributed dead load from beam, per foot of beam:
_12 15224 1 X15021: =300
144 1n%2 it it
t
The remaining loads are transferred to the girder as a point load at mid-span.
Loads transferring
from the adjacent interior span will transfer directly to the girder, whereas
loads from the adjacent
exterior span must be amplified by 15% according to the ACI shear coeff1cient.
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder between C1 and C-2:
l2inxl8inX 25ft_ 6in +6inxl2ftx 25ft_ 6in
' 2 in in in
144 111/ft, 2 12 A 12 A 2 12 A
121n.xl281nX 302ft_ 61:1n +61nxii2ftX 302ft_ 6111111 x150is2l88k
144111/ft2 12A 12 A 12 A t
18.8 k+13.5 k232.3 k
><1501b3 213.5 k
ft
1.15><
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the
interior spans:
12inx18inX 25ft_ 6in +6inxllftX 25ft_ 6in
' 2 2 in in 2 in
144 111A2 12 A 12 A 12 A
121n.xl281nX 302ft_ 6111111 +61nxiilftx 302ft_ 6111111 X150f132l75k
144 111A, 12 A 12 ft 12 A t
12.6 k+17.5 k 230.1 k
><1501b3 212.6 k
ft
1.15><
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the exterior
spans:
l2ftx x201b223.0k
2 ft
1.15>< 12 ft><{30 ft] x2011:=4.141<
2 ft
3.00k+4.14k27.14k
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the interior
spans:
llftx E x201b22275k
2 ft
1.15>< llft>< 30ft x20113=3.80k
2 ft
5-31
2.75 k +3.80 k 26.55 k
Live load, applied as a point load:
For negative moment at C-1 and positive moment at o:
15 2 15 2
L 2Lx 0.25+ 2501b/ft x 0.25+ 233lb/ft
[ 4A,} [ J24ftx55ft]
3
LL, =33 lb/ftz xzszftjxm ft+1.15x( 02ft]><12 ft]211.8 k
For negative moment at C-2:

15
15 2
L 2Lx 0.25+ 2501b/ft x 0.25+
[ 4A,} [ J46 ftx55 ft
LLO = 27.4 lb/ft2 >< Hg] X 12 ft +1.15 >< {30 ft] X 12 ft] 2 9.78 k
] = 27.4 1b/ft2
2
30 ft
2
LLy = 27.41b/ft2 >< Hg] X 11 ft + 1.15 X
x11ft]=8.97 k
For positive moment at y:
15
15 2
L 2Lx 0.25+ 2501b/ft x 0.25+
[ ,(AA [ J22 ftx55 ft
LLy =34lb/ftzXH%\JX11ft+1.15x(%}<11ft]211.1k
] 2 34 lb/ft2
For negative moment at C-3:
15 .2 15 ~2
L 2Lx 0.25+ 2501b/ft x 0.25+ 227.7lb/ft
[ 4A,} [ J44ftx55ft]
3
LLy = 27.7 lb/ft2 >< Hg] X 11 ft + 1.15 X (%] X 11 ft] 2 9.06 k
Calculate the clear span length, C" :
Between C-1 and C-2:
Between C-2 and C-3:
C" 224 ft16 in 222.67 ft
C" 222 ft16 in 220.67 ft
Now assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following
cracked properties:
Column:
Ag 216 in x 16 in 2 256 in2
1g = (16 in)4 / 12 = 5,460 m
Ag 212 in x 24 in 2 288 in2
I" g 12 in X (24 in)3 /12 213,800 in4
5-32
River, NJ 07458.
modeled, and
load
Location Design Moment

(From Software)
Negative at C-1 -121 kip-ft
Positive
Negative
Negative
Positive
Negative
at
at
at
at
at
o 236 kip-ft
C-2 (o-side) -224 kip-ft
C-2 (y-side) -198 kip-ft
y 175 kip-ft
C-3 -164 kip-ft
5-33
River, NJ 07458.
5-13 Assume the maximum factored positive moment near midspan of the floor beam
between columns A-2 and B-2 is 60 kip-ft. Using the beam dimensions given in
Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to satisfy all
the ACI
Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select bars and
provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected positive moment is given as M u 2 60 kft 2 720 kin
Determine the effective ange width:
By ACI code section 8.12:
bf 230 ft/427.5 ft2901n
Check that:
2><8><6 in+12 in2108 in
bf< 11ft12in OK
><2+12in2132 in
Determine AS and select the reinforcing bars:
Assume jd 2 0.95d:
From Eq. (5-16):
A _ M u 720 k-in
S _ f (d _g] 0.9x60 ksi><(0.95><21.5 in)
y 2
III
2 0.65 in2
From Eq. (5-17):
14.5 _ 0.65 in2 X 60 ksi
2 0.13 in
0.85fcb 0.85x4 ksi><90 in
From Eq. (5-16):
A = M 720 1 = 0.62 1112
(dg] 0.9x60 1814215 in- 01:1)

This seems like a very small area of required steel, so check minimum steel
requirement before
selecting bars.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
Forfc 2 4,000 psi, 3 x (If; 2189 S 200 so use 200
3 l
min = lfbwdzidein><21.51n20.86in2
f 60,000 ps1
The minimum steel requirement will govern here. Select 3 #5 bars.
A. =3A, 23x0.31in2 =0.93 in2 20.86in2 OK
5-34
River, NJ 07458.
Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required. Since this requirement governed our bar selection, this is satisfied
by default. OK
From Eq. (5-17):
4.72 _ 0.931112 X 60 ksi
0.85fcb _ 0.85x4 ksi><90 in
20.182 in
We know that1 = 0.85 forfc 2 4,000 psi
a _ 0.182 in
c=__ =0.214 in
,6] 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d-c 21.5 in-0.214 in
St = X gm : _-
c 0.214 1n
>< 0.003 2 0.297 2 0.005 OK
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
21075 k-in
W. = rAjy (d 3] = 0.9x0.93 1112 ><60 ksix (21.5 in 0182 1]
Mn = 89.6 kft 2 60 kft = Mu
Therefore, this design is sufficient. It seems too conservative, but that is
because the minimum
area requirement governed bar selection.
90in.
44%; LIL
44%,; LL
24in.
. l
2.51nH 3 #5 bars
Fig. S5-13 Cross-section of final design for positive bending region
Note that other selections AS may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied,
without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-35
River, NJ 07458.
5-14 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column B-2 for
the
floor beam along column line 2 is -120 kip-ft. Using the beam and slab
dimensions
given in Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to
satisfy all
the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select
bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as MM 2 120 kft 2 1440 kin
Although this is a T-section, there is no need to determine the effective ange
width since the
compression zone is located in the web of the beam.
Assume jd 2 0.903 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A: M N l440k-1n :138m2
. a Z 0.9><60ks1>< 0.9><21.5 in
fy(dE] ( )
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy _ 1.38 in2 x 60 ksi
- 2 2.03 in
0.85fcb 0.85x4ksix12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
A = M 1440 k-1n 21.30in2
fy(d%] 0.9x60 1814215 in- 20231)

Select 3 #5 bars over the web, and 4 #3 bars in the ange. This will result in
part of the
reinforcement (about 1/3) being spread into the ange, and most (2/3) remaining
over the web.
A 23AM +4A32 2 3x0.31in2 +4X 0.11 in2 21.37 in2 21.30 in2 OK
Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
Forfc 2 4,000 psi, 3Jf C 2190 S 200 so use 200 psi
s,min
3 l .
= fmmwxminx21.5in=0.86in2<1.371112 OK
f 60,000ps1
5-36
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy _ 1.37 in2 x60 ksi
0.85fcb _ 0.85x4 ksix12 in
2 2.01 in
1_ 2.01 in
,6] 0.85
2 2.36 in
From Eq. (4-18):
_al-c>< _21.51n-2.36in
c 2.36 in
>< 0.003 2 0.024 2 0.005 OK
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
Mf, (d %] = 0.9><1.37 inz X60 km (21.5 m_ 2.01 1n
M
It
)21515 k-in
M
n
126 kft 2 120 kft 2 MM
Therefore, this design is sufficient.
901m.
3 #5 bars and 4 #3 bars
% . . \ . . %
Lurk
24in.
Fig. S5-14 Cross-section of final design for negative bending region

Note that other selections of AS may also be correct. If all checks are
satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that
all ange
reinforcement that is considered to contribute to the negative bending capacity
of this section is
placed within two ange depths of the web.
5-37
River, NJ 07458.
5-15 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at support 11 of the floor beam
m-n-o-p is -150 kip-ft. Using the design procedure for singly reinforced beam
sections
given in Section 5-3 (design of beams when section dimensions are not known),
determine the beam dimensions and select the required area of tension
reinforcement
to satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement
area. Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as MM 2 150 kft 2 1800 kin
width since the
0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
,Blf 'C _ 0.85 X 4,000 psi
4 fy _ 4 X 60,000 psi
p s 2 0.0142 Note: 120.85 forfc2 4,000 psi

From Eq. (5-21):
m _ pf, _ 0.0142>< 60,000 psi
f 'C 4, 000 psi
20.2125
From Eq. (5-22):
R 2 wf 'C (1 0.59a)) 2 0.2125 X 4 ksi X (1 0.59 X 0.2125) 2 0.743 ksi
Step 2: Select section dimensions, 17 and h:
From Eq. (5-23):
bdz = M2 :Lkd. 22690 1113
R 0.9 X 0.743 ks1
designer can
assume any reasonable 01 value. Here we assume a 2 0.5
A - %
d2 M" = L1, 217.6in217.5in
agoR 0.5 x 0.9 x 0.734 ks1
h2d+2.51n2201n
b205d20.5><17.5in28.751n10in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for
constructability.
Assume jd 2 0.903 : From Eq. (5-16):
A: = M E 1800 k-1n . = 2121112
a 0.9x60 ks1><(0.9><17.5 1n)
fy 612
5-38
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy 2.12 in2x60 ksi
a 2 2+23.74in
0.85fcb 0.85><4ks1><101n
From Eq. (5-16):
A = M = 1800 k-1n =2.131112
fy [d %] 0.9x60 ksi>< (17.5 111 374 111]
Since I am not satisfied that any of the possible bar combinations that fulfill
this requirement are
not too conservative, I will choose to widen the beam slightly to help get a
more efficient design.
Select 17 2 12 in.
Now re-determine AS and select the reinforcing bars:
Assume jd 2 0.903 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A: Z M S 0 9 60 30060-91 17 5 )2 2.121112
a . x s1 x . x . in
111 (d 2]
From Eq. (5-17):
A ' 2 '
a = sf, 2 2.12m ><60ks1 23.12in
0.85f C b 0.85 x 4 ksi x 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
A = M = 1800 k-1n =2.091112
fy(d%] 0.9x60 1614175 111 312 111]
part of the
over the web.
A, = 3A,,1+4A,,2 = 3>< 0.441112 +4>< 0.21112 = 2.121112 2 2.09 inZOK
Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
Forfc 2 4, 000 psi, 3Jf - _190S 200 so use 200
_3_.(f
mm _ baw 2_OOPSIx12111x17.5111=0.70111 <2.12111 OK
fy 60,000psi
5-39

River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy _ 2.12 in2 x60 ksi
0.85fcb _ 0.85x4 ksix12 in
23.12 in
1_ 3.12 in
,6] 0.85
23.67 in
From Eq. (4-18):
_al-c>< _17.51n-3.67in
c 3.67 in
>< 0.003 2 0.0112 0.005 OK
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
Mf, (d %] = 0.9x 2.121112 X 60 ksi X (17.5 111 312 111
M
n
]2 1820 k-in
M
n
152 kft 2 150 kft 2 M1.
l 90in. l
l 3 #6 bars and 4 #4 bars 1
l . . . .
6' . A A
*n l \ l
L12in.2 201n.
212in.2

Note that other selections AS may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied,
without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that
all ange
of this section is
5-40
River, NJ 07458.
5-16 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column C-2 for
the
girder along column line C is -250 kip-ft. Using the design procedure given in
section 5-4 for the design of doubly reinforced sections, determine the beam
dimensions and select the required areas of tension and compression
reinforcement to satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum
reinforcement area. Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section
design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as M1. 2 250 kft 2 3000 kin
width since the
Select p and the corresponding R-factor:
0.9 .
From Eq. (5-25):
N 0.36lf'c _ 0.36 x 0.85 X 4,000 psi
p : fy _ 60, 000 psi
2 0.0204 Note: 120.85 forfc2 4,000 psi

From Eq. (5-21):
m _ pf, _ 0.0204 X 60,000 psi
f '6 4,000 psi
2 0.306
From Eq. (5-22):

R 2 wf 'C (1 0.59m) 2 0.306>< 4 ksi X (1 0.59 X 0.306) 2 1.0 ksi
Select section dimensions, 17 and h:
From Eq. (5-23):
d2 = = _3000 km. = 3330 1113
R 0.9 x 1.0 ks1
designer can
assume any reasonable 01 value. Here we assume a 2 0.65
A - %
d2{ Mu] Aj =17.2in17.5in
agoR 0.65x0.9x1.0 ksi

h2d+2.5 in2201n
b205d20.65><17.5 in211.4 in12 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for
constructability.
Assume jd 2 0.903 :
From Eq. (5-16):
A: = M E 3000 k-1n = 3.53 in2
a 0.9><60 ksi>< 0.9><17.5 in
fy (d _ E] ( )
5-41
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (5-17):
- 25.2
0.85fcb
From Eq.
A = M _
s
in
0.85x4 ksix12 in
(5-16):
3000 k-1n = 373 in2
pf, (d %] 0.9x60 ksi>< (17.5 111 5221]

part of the
over the web.
A, 23Ab1+4Ab2 23><1.0 in2+4x0.2 in2 23.80 in223.73 in2 OK
Also, select compression reinforcement such that the area of compression
reinforcement (A 1) is
greater than one half of the tension steel. Here we select 3 #8 bars so that A
1 2 2.37 in2.
Required Checks:
in is sufciently
the minimum
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
Forfc 2 4,000 psi, 34f C 2190 S 200 so use 200
3 l
1 min 2 f C bwd 2 $.le inx17.5 in 2 0.70 in2 < 3.80 in2 OK
fy 60,000 ps1
First, an iterative procedure must be used to determine the depth of the neutral
axis. Following the
procedure shown in Chapter 4, c 2 4.2 in.
From Eq. (4-18):
d - c 17.5 in - 4.2 in
8! = X 8614 = .
c 4.2 1n
x 0.003 2 0.010 2 0.005 OK
applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
As a result of the iterations used to determine c, the following forces were
determined:
T 2 Asfy 23.8 in2 x60 ksi2228k
CC 2 1c0.85f'c bW 20.85><4.2 in><0.85><4 ksi><12 in 2145 k
cw: = (C 1 jx 0.003ESA. = ($] x 0.003 X 29,000 ksi x 2.37 in2 = 83 11

C . In
5-42
River, NJ 07458.
So, the nominal moment capacity of the section is:
@Mn P(d%]+C(ddj]
_ 0.85 X 4.2 in]
M _ 0.9><[145 kipx{17.5 111 +83 k><(17.5 1112.5 111)]
Mn = 3170 kin = 264 kft 2 250 kft = Mu
t 90in. 4
( 3 #9 bars and 4 #4 bars (
% . . . . . %
l l
L12in.2 201n.
2.51119 3 #8 bars
212in.2

Note that other selections of b, h, and AS may also be correct. If all checks
are satisfied, without
being unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also
note that all ange
of this section is
5-43

River, NJ 07458.
5-17 For the one-was slab shown in Fig. P5-7, assume the maximum negative moment
at
support c is -3.3 kip-ft/ft, and the maximum factored positive moment at midspan
point b is 2.4 kip-ft/ft.
(a) Using the given slab thickness of 6 in, determine the required reinforcement
size and spacing at both of these locations to satisfy ACI Code flexural
strength requirements. Be sure to check the ACI Code requirements for
minimum exural reinforcement in slabs.
Negative Moment MM 2 3.3 kft 2 39.6 kin :
Assume 0.75 in of cover will be provided. This results in a d 2 5 in.
From Eq. (5-16):
M. 3 .6 k-'
i: A z 9 1% 20.16 111%
) t
ft 0 _0.9x60ks'x 0.9x5'n
fy(d_3] 1 ( 1
From Eq. (5-17):
Asfy 0.16 in2x60 ksi
a 2 2+20.24in
0.85fcb 0.85><4 ks1><12 1n
From Eq. (5-16):
M 39.6 k-in
A2: A = / 0.15 111%
ft f (ozE] 0.9x60 ksix(5 111024 111]

Minimum reinfOrCCanti
A _ _ - 2
s min _ _ 1n
ft_0.001821h 0.0018><12 1n>< 6 111 _0.13 A
Strength requirements govern here.
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3h or 18 in, which is the same value
for this 6 in deep
slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since fy and
cc are the same
here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in. This
governs.
If we select #3 barls at 8 in, the result is:
A in in2
A: 0.11111 :20165 A2015 A OK
Check that strength is satisfied:
0.24 in
M
2
n
Asf (d\J2 0.9><0.1651n2><60ksi><{51n
kft kft
3.62 A 2 3.3
]2 43.5 k-in
OK
M ft =
71
5-44
River, NJ 07458.
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify
that assuming
= 0.9 is valid.
_d-c _5in-0.24/0.85in
8 X8
c C 0.24/ 0.85 111
Therefore the designer is permitted to use = 0.9 for this beam design.
>< 0.003 = 0.050 2 0.005 OK
Positive Moment M u 2 2.4 kft 2 28.8 kin :

Assume 0.75 in of cover will be provided. This results in a d = 5 in.
From Eq. (5-16):
M, 2 . k-'
A._ A N 88 1% 20.12111%
) t
F a :0.9X60ks'x 0.9.511
fy(d_E\J 1 ( 1
From Eq. (5-17):
0.85fcb _ 0.85x4 ksix12 in
20.17 in
From Eq. (5-16):
M. 28.8 k-in
A: A = =0.11 1117
0.17111] ft
2
ft f, (01 %] 0.9x60 ksi><(5 111
Minimum reinforcement:
A . . . - 2
s,m1n _ _ _ 1n
ft 0.0018bh0.0018><12 1n><6 1n0.13 At
Minimum requirements govern here.
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3 ~ h or 18 in, which is the same
value for this 6 in
deep slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since fy
and cc are the
same here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in.
This governs.
If we select #3 bars at 10 in, the result is:
A: _ . 2 12 in_ inZ inZ
ft_0.11111x10m_0.132 A2013 A OK
Check that strength is satisfied:
M, = 5A.fy {d g] = 0.9 x 0.1321112 X 60 ksi x {5 111 017 111] = 35.0 k-in

_ 11-11 11-11 _
Mn _ 2.9 A 2 2.4 ft _ Mu OK
5-45
River, NJ 07458.
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify
that assuming
= 0.9 is valid.
_d-c _5in-0.17/0.85in
8 X8
c C 0.17 / 0.85 111
Therefore the designer is permitted to use = 0.9 for this beam design.
>< 0.003 = 0.072 2 0.005 OK
(b) At both locations, determine the required bar size and spacing to be
provided
in the transverse direction to satisfy ACI Code section 7.12.2 requirements for
minimum shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.
Since the positive exural region was controlled by temperature and shrinkage
reinforcement, the
reinforcement specified there would sufce in the transverse direction at all
locations.
So, use #3 bars at 10 in. Placement near the top or bottom of the slab makes no
difference here, so
specify that bars are to be placed wherever is easiest.
(c) For both locations provide a sketch of the final design of the slab section.
#3@8in. #3@ 10in.
l - - l
6in. 6in.
#121112 #121112
Fig. S5-17 Cross-section of nal design for negative and positive bending
regions, respectively
Note that other selections of AS may also be correct. If all checks are
satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-46
@2012 Pearson Education, Inc, Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 6
6-1 For the rectangular beam shown in Fig P6-1:
(a) Draw a shear force diagram.
0.
"7. \o
b N H o
V, kips 0' 2
.
"P
17.7
(b) Assuming the beam is uncracked, show the direction of the principal tensile
stresses at middepth at points A, B, and C.
{ii
(c) On a drawing of the beam sketch the inclined cracks that would develop at
A, B, and C.
6-1
River, NJ 07458.
6-2, 6-3, 6-4 and 6-5 Compute Vn for the cross sections shown in Figs. P6-2,
P6-3, P6-4
and P6-5. In each case use fc = 4000 psi and fyt = 40, 000 psi
6-2 (M. = >(Vc + Vs)
VC 2 2 fcbwd = 2V4000 >1 15 >1 22.5/1000 = 42.7 kip
VS 2 Avfytd/s = [(0.22 >1 40000 >1 22.5)/8]/1000 = 24.8 kip

qan = 0.75(42.7 + 24.8) = 50.6 kip
6-3 Vn = (PU/c + Vs)
VC 2 2 fcbwd 2 21/4000 >1 12 >1 22.5/1000 2 34.2 kip
Vs 2 Avfytd/s 2 [(0.4 >1 40000 >1 22.5)/10]/1000 2 36 kip
pvn 2 0.75(342 + 36) 2 52.7 kip
6-4 Vn = (PU/c
VC 2 2 fcbwd 2
Vs 2 Avfytd/s 2
pvn 2 0.75(18.2
+ Vs)
21/4000 >1 6 >1 24/1000 2 18.2 kip
[(0.22 >1 40000 >1 24)/8]/1000 2 26.4 kip
+ 26.4) 2 33.5 kip
6-5 Vn = (PU/c
VC 2 2 fcbwd 2
Vs 2 Avfytd/s 2
pvn 2 0.75(25.3
+ Vs)
21/4000 >1 (5 + 5) >1 20/1000 2 25.3 kip
[(0.4 >1 40000 >1 20)/10]/1000 2 32 kip
+ 32) 2 43.0 kip
6-6 ACI Sec. 11.4.5.1 sets the maximum spacing of vertical stirrups at d/2.
Explain
why.
Every inclined crack must be crossed by at least one stirrup. The assumed
horizontal
projection of the crack is (1 so every crack will be crossed by at least one
stirrup.
6-2
River, NJ 07458.
6-7 Figure P6-7 shows a simply supported beam. The beam has No. 3 Grade 40
doubleleg stirrups with Ayfyt = 8. 8 kip and 4 No.8 Grade 60 longitudinal bars with
Asfyt = 190 kip. The plastic truss model for the beam is shown in the figure.
Assuming that the stirrups are all loaded to A], f yt.
(a) Use the method of joints to compute the forces in each panel of the
compression and tension chords and plot them. The force in member
L11 L13 is MUlZ/jdAssume all stirrups yield. A1 f )4 = 8.8 kips
Joint L:
Joint U12:
Joint U8:
Vertical force in stirrup = 8.8 kips
2V 2 Oat Joint [11 gives vertical component in strut U12 Lll as 8.8
kips downward (compression in U12 Lll ).
12 in.
Horizontal component in U12 L11 2 .
20 1n.
X 8.8 kips = 5.28 kips acting

to the left on Joint L11 .
Each inclined strut has a vertical component of 8.8 kips, therefore 6
struts are needed to equilibrate 52.8 kips force at Joint U12 as shown.
Total downward load is 26.4 kips applied load plus 8.8 kips in stirrup
U s [8, therefore 4 struts are needed to equilibrate 35.2 kips force at
U 8 as shown.
Forces in Inclined Struts in Web
Vertical Horizontal Horizontal

Member Component Projection Component
(kips) (in.) (kips)
U12TL11 8.8 12 5.28
U12 L10 8.8 24 10.56
UlzL9 8.8 36 15.84
UllL8 8.8 36 15.84
UIOL7 8.8 30 13.20
U9 L6 8.8 24 10.56
US L5 8.8 18 7.92
US L4 8.8 24 10.56
US L5 8.8 30 13.20
U L, 8.8 36 15.84
00
6-3
River, NJ 07458.
U 7 Z1 8.8 36 15 .84
Vertical Horizontal Horizontal
Member (contd) Component Projection Component
(kips) (in.) (kips)
U 6 L0 8.8 36 15 .84
U 5 L0 8.8 30 13 .20
U 4 L0 8.8 24 10.56
U 3 I0 8.8 18 7.92
U 2 L0 8.8 12 5 .28
1 L0 8.8 6 2.64
Compute Forces in Lower Chord

Maximum moment 2 52.8 X 8 26.4 X 4 = 316.8 ft-kips
. M 316.8><12
Force in 22
L11 L13 jd 20
2H at Joint L11 gives force in L10 L11 21900528 =184.7kips
= 190.0 kips (in tension)
Force in Lower Chords
Horizontal Lower Chord

Member Joint Force in Strut Force
(kipS) (kipS)
L L13 - - 190.0 tension
I'mLn L11 5.28 184.7
L, L10 L10 10.56 174.2
L8 L9 L9 15.84 158.3
L7 L8 L8 15.84 142.5
L6 L7 L7 13.20 129.3
L5 L6 L6 10.56 118.7
L4 L5 LS 7.92 110.8
L3 L4 L4 10.56 100.2
L2 L3 L3 13.20 87.0
Ll L2 L2 15.84 71.2
L0 L1 L1 15.84 55.4
L0 15.84
+13.20
6-4
River, NJ 07458.
+10.56
+7.92
Horizontal Lower Chord
Member (contd) Joint Force in Strut Force
(kipS) (kipS)
+5.28
+2.64
Total: 55 .4
The force in L0 L1 is 55 .4 kips. This must be anchored in Joint L0 . The sum

of the
horizontal forces in the struts at Joint L0 is 55 .4 kips and EH 2 0 at Joint L0
.
Forces in Upper Chords:
Joint U 1 : There is no force in the compression chord to the right of U 1 .
Horizontal Force Lower Chord

Member Joint in Struts Force
(kips) (kips)
U1 _U2 U1 2'64 comrzirggsion
U2U3 U2 5.28 7.92
U3U4 U3 7.92 15.84
U4 U5 U4 10.56 26.4
U5U6 US 13.20 39.8
U6U7 U6 15.84 55.4
U7U8 U7 15.84 71.3
U8 U9 U8 15.84
+13.20
+10.56
+7.92 118.8
U9 U10 U9 10.56 129.4
UloU11 U10 13.20 142.6
UllU12 Ull 15.84 158.4
Compression at Midspan U12 15 .84
+10.56
6-5
River, NJ 07458.
+5.28 190.0
Plot of Forces in Upper Chords:

190.0
158.4
142.6
129.4
M
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 UIO Ull UIZ

Plot of Forces in Lower Chords:
190,0
71.2 / I. M/jd
55.4 / / E
//
/
/
/
/
/
/ V 7
LI Ll L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 1) LID Lil LIZ
6-6
River, NJ 07458.
(b) Plot AS f S = M / jd on the diagram from part (a) and compare the bar forces
from the truss model to those computed from M / jd.
The bar forces in the lower chords provided by Asfs = M / jd appear to be less
than the values provided by the truss model throughout the span except at the
midspan where the two values match.
(c) Compute the compression stress in the diagonal member L1 L7 (see Eq. (611)). The beam width, bw, is 12 in.
Slope of L1 L7: tanl9 = 20/36 = 0.556: 19 = 29.050
1,, =L,[tan6+;j2[0.556+;j 2518 psi
bwjd 111119 12x20 0.556
6-7
River, NJ 07458.
6-8 The beam shown in Fig. P6-8 supports the unfactored loads shown. The dead
load
includes the weight of the beam.
(a) Draw shearing force diagram for
WDM 21.2><1.421.68 k/ft
WLM 21.6><1.522.4 k/ft
(1) factored dead and live load on the entire beam.
1.68 + 2.4 25
At the left support: V 2 #
2 51.0 ki s
M 2 p
V , kips
0.
175
Case ( 1)
O.
175
(2) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
left haft-span.
2 2
1.68x+2.4xg
At the right support: VM 2 # 2 28.5 kips
At the right support: V 21.68 X 25 + 2.4 X 12.5 28.5 2 43.5 kips
At the midspan: V, = 43.5 (1.68 + 2.4)><12.5 = 7.5 kips
V, kips
Case (2)
in. 3
IT 7'
(3) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
right haft-span.
Due to the asymmetry of loadings Case (3) to loadings Case (2), the shear
diagram of Case (3) is asymmetric to that of Case (2).

6-8
V , kips
10. In.
Case (3) g b
7
"1
'
(b) Superimpose the diagram to get a shear force envelope. Compare the shear
at midspan to that from Eq. 6-26.
war _ 2.4>< 25
8
- O.
Vu,klps E,\m
[\
Eq. 6-26: Vu(mjdspan) = = 7.5 kips
7.5
51.0
(c) Design stirrups. Use f c = 4500 psi and No.3 double-leg stirrups with
fyt 2 40,000 psi.
V
M
, kips
0.
8
= 0.75 0
Are stirrups reguired?
V5 2 2\/4500 ><12><17.5/1000 = 28.2 < % = 68.0 kips
&
10.0
68.0
Stirrups are required.
Check stirru s anchora e
Use No. 3 Grade 40 stirrups. ACI code Sec. 12.13.21. allows these to be anchored
by a
hook around a top bar.
Maximum s acin
d/2 = 8.75 in.
V , . . . . .
j < 6iftbwd = 82.1 kips Maximum spacmg of d / 41s not required.
4f, _ 0.22 X 40000

214.6 in. (note0.75 C 250.3 si >50 si, use 50.3 si)
0.75Jfgbw 50.3><12 lf p p p
6-9
River, NJ 07458.
Maximum spacing Smax 28.5 in.
Compute spacing to resist shear forces
0 At (1 from supports:
6810 17.5
: 68 2 61.2 kips
p (12.5x12)
d
SZL=W=45 111mm 28.5 111.
V, /VE (61.427.4)
Use s: 4.0 in.
V _ 0.22>< 40><17.5
0 Change this to 6 in. where 6 + 27.4 = 53.1 kips.
This occurs at x 2 % X (12.5 X 12) = 38.5 in. from end.
V _ 0.22>< 40><17.5
0 Change this to 8 in. where +274 2 46.7 kips.
This occurs at x 2 % X (12.5 X 12) = 55.1 in. from end.
0 Terminate stirrups where % 2 % 2 % 214.1kips.
This occurs at x 2 % X (12.5 X 12) = 139 in.
Compute the number of stirrups
From the center of the support, use 1 @ 2 in.
Required number of stirrups at the spacing of 4 in.: % = 9.1, use 10 @ 4 in.
55.1(2+10><4)
Required no. of stirrups at the spacing of 6 in.: 2 2.2, use 3 @ 6 in.

139(2+10><4+3><6)
8
Required number of stirrups at the spacing of 8 in.: = 9.9 , use
10@ 8in.
Provide No.3 U stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from the center of the support,
use 1 @ 2 in., 10 @ 4 in., 3 @ 6 in., and 10 @ 8 in. from each end.
6-10
River, NJ 07458.
(Note that 146112111) = W = 38.5 kips < 8]?de = 113 kips , OK)
6-9 The beam shown in Fig. P6-9 supports the unfactored loads shown in the
figure. The
dead load includes the weight of the beam.
(a) Draw shearing
(1) factored dead
(2) factored dead
between B and C.
(3) factored dead
force diagrams for

and live load on the entire length of beam.
load on the entire beam plus factored live load
load on the entire beam plus factored live load
between A and B and between C and D.

Loadings (2) and (3) will give the maximum positive and negative shears at B.
WD 2 2.4 k/ft
WM 2 2.4 k/ft
w = 4.8 k/ft
6-11
River, NJ 07458.
V, kips
Q 00
m .
(31) m 3
5".
P
00
rd
1
m
(:2) 5 2 3\
"7
\O
P
(\l' 00
(a3) 3 :0,
N. E;
S S.
(b) Draw the factored shear force envelope. The shear at B should be the
factored dead load shear plus or minus the shear from Eq. 6-26.
2 4.8 kips
Eq. 6-26: V1, (midspan) = %X16
6-12
River, NJ 07458.
0- oo
Envelope from Part (a) Q 2 00'
N- N
N.
o .
_ m
' 1'
0- oo
Envelope from Eq. 626 Q 00'
4.82.7 = 2.1 N
00
m'
1'
Eq. 6-26 is correct for s simple beam without overhangs. It is an approximation

for all
other cases. However, we shall assume it is close enough and use it for the rest
of this
example.
(c) Design stirrups. Use f c = 4000 psi and fyt = 40, 000 psi.
V
VC 2 2V4000 >1 12 >1 21.5/1000 = 32.6 kip < 3:1 = 33.0 kip
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a hook around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 10.8 in.
Vu .
E < 6 fcbwd = 97.9 kip
Maximum spacing of d / 4 is not required.
4f, _ 0.22 X 40000
SObW 50 X 12
Maximum spacing S =10.8in.
max
214.7111. (note 0.7575 2 47.4 psi < 50 psi, so use 50 psi)

Compute spacing to resist shear forces Part AB
6-13
River, NJ 07458.
0 At (1 from support A:
V (442.8)x21.5 .
_u = 44_ 2 34.8 kips
p (8x12)
1 : W :86 in_ > smax 2108111,
(34.832.6)
Use s = 10 in.
o Terminate stirrups where:
VuVC326 163k
(p 2 . 1p
This occurs at:

_4416.3 8 12 645'
x44_2-8>1 >1 .in.
Part A-B: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from A use 1 @ 5 in., 7
@ 10 in.
Compute spacing to resist shear forces Part BC
0 At (1 from support C
V (58.410)><21.5
_u = 584 2 47.6 kips
(2 8x12
= W 212.6 111. > smax 210.8 111.
(47.632.6)
Use s = 10 in.
o Terminate stirrups where:
VuVC326163k
(p 2 . 1p
This occurs at:
_ 58.4 16.3 8 12 _ 835'
x 58.410 * * T 'm'
Part BC: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 9
@ 10 in.
Compute spacing to resist shear forces Part CD
0 At (1 from support C
Vu384 38MAS269k V326k'
>_ . 6>112 . 1p<c . 1p
6-14
River, NJ 07458.
. . V V: . . .
Can terminate stirrups where < g. However, place minimum shear reinforcement
throughout part CD.
Part CD: Use No. 3 U stirrups, Grade 40. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 7 @ 10
in.
6-15
River, NJ 07458.
6-10
Fig. P6-10 shows an interior span of a continuous beam. The shears at the ends
are
i wuln/Z. The shear at midspan is from Eq. (6-26).
(a) Draw a shear force envelope.
WDM 21.2><1.5 21.8 k/ft
WLM 21.6><1.822.88 k/ft
w 24.68 k/ft
End shears = 4.68>< 22/ 2 = 51.5 kips
Midspan shears = 2.88>< 22/8 2 7.92 kips
V , kips
0.75 i\
\i
(b) Design stirrups using f c = 4000 psi and fyt = 40, 000 psi.
68 7
10.6
10.6
68.7
VE 2 244000 >< 12>< 17.5 / 1000 2 26.6 kips
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a bend around a top bar.
Maximum s acin
d/2 2 8.8 in.
g < 6J7;de = 79.8 kip Maximum spacing of d / 4 is not required.
4f, _ 0.22><40000
SObW 50><12
Maximum spacmg Smax 28.8 in.
214.7111. (note 0.75]? = 47.4 psi < 50 ps1, use 50 psi)
Computing spacing to resist shear forces
0 At (1 from face of column:
2 68.7 _ (68.7 10.6)x17.5 2 61.0 kips
p (11><12)
0.22><40><17.5 .
S = = 1n.
(61.026.6)
6-16
River, NJ 07458.
Use s 2 4 in.
V _ 0.22>< 40><17.5
0 Changing stirrup spacing to 6 in. where + 26.6 2 52.3 kips
This occurs at x 2 x (1 1>< 12) 2 37.3 in.
68.710.6
V _ 0.22>< 40><17.5
0 Changing stirrup spacing to 8 in. where + 26.6 2 45.9 kips
8
This occurs at x 2 wx (1 1>< 12) 2 51.8 in.
68.7 10.6
o Terminate stirrups when 2 2 E 213.3 kips
This occurs at x 2 ><(11><12) 2126 in.
68.7 10.6
Use No.3 Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting from face of column at each end, use 1 @
2 in., 9@ 4 in., 3 @ 6in., and 9 @ 8in.
6-17
River, NJ 07458.
6-11
Design shear reinforcement for the C1-C2 span of the girder designed in Example
56 (final section given in Fig. 5-32). From the structural analysis discussed in
Example 5-6, the factored design end shears for this girder are 28.9 kips at the
face
of column C1 and 39.2 kips at the face of column C2. Use f 'c 2 4000 psi and
fyt 2 40,000 psi.
VC 2 2V4000 >1 12 >1 17.5/1000 2 26.6 kip
Check anchorage
Select No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a bend around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/Z 2 8.8 in.

Vu .
E < 6 fcbwd 2 79.7 kip
AnyO'ZZMOOOOMT t075\/_474 '<50 ' 50 '
50bw_ 50*12 .1n.(noe. fc .pSl p51,souse p51)
Maximum spacing smax 2 8.8 in.

Compute the spacing of stirrups required to resist shear forces
It is desirable to have the most efficient design of stirrups possible, so
stirrup size and
spacing should be adjusted over the span length whenever possible to account for
the
changing shear demand. Likewise, it is advantageous to use the factored shear
demand at
d from the face of the column rather than directly at the face of the column to
design
stirrups. However, for a girder loaded like this one, the majority of shear
comes from the
point load at midspan. Therefore, it is reasonable to select only two different
stirrup
spacing, one for each half of the girder, based on the factored shear demand at
the face of
the columns.
0 At the exterior column face (C1):
Vu _ 28.9 _ 38 5 k'
p T 0.75 T ' 1p
_ Avfytd _ 0.22 >1 40 >1 17.5
S T Vu/ VC T 38.5 26.6
The maximum spacing controls, so select s 2 8 in.
2 12.9 in.
0 At the interior column face (C2):
Vu _ 39.2 _ 52 3 k'
p T 0.75 T ' 1p
_ Avfytd _ 0.22 >1 40 >1 17.5
S T Vu/ VC T 52.3 26.6
The strength requirement controls, so select s 2 6 in.
2 6.0 in.
Use No.3 Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting from face of C2 column, use s = 6 in.
until
past the point load, then use s = 8 in.
6-18

River, NJ 07458.
6-12 Fig. P6-12 shows a rigid frame and the factored loads acting on the frame.
The 7-kip
horizontal load can act from the left or the right. f c 2 4500 psi and f yt 2
40, 000 psi.

(a) Design stirrups in the beam
349 Wind from right
27.2
V, kips
(L 3.85
3.85
. (1
Wind from left
27.2
34.9
3
lo: \
V by. Q
500
, kips
5.1
d from face
of column 5.1
face of column
Are stirrups required?
Assume d 2 20 2.5 2 17.5 in.
Va 2 2V4500 >1 12 >1 17.5/1000 2 28.2 kip
Maximum spacing
Use No. 3
d/2 2 8.8 in.
Vu .
E < 6 fcbwd 2 84.5 kip
Avfy _ 0.22 * 40000
0_75 fc'bw 50.3 >1 12
Maximum spacing Smax 2 8.8 in.

2 14.6 in. (note 0.7573 2 50.3 psi > 50 psi)
6-19
River, NJ 07458.
Compute spacing required to resist shear
0 At (1 from face of column, 3 2 38 kip
_ Avfytd _0.22140>117.5_157. > _88.
SVu/Vc 3828.2 .in. smax . in.
o Terminate stirrups when:
V VC 14 1 k'
(p 2 . 1p
This occurs at:
_ 44.1 14.1 113 _ 869'
xT 44.15.1 * T 'm'
Provide No. 3, Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting at face of column from each end,
use
1 @ 4 in., 11@ 8 in.
(b) Are stirrups required in the columns? If so, design the stirrups for the
columns.
Maximum shear is V = 8 kips in leeward column.
Nu ,
VC 2 2(1 +2000149> fcbwd
(34.9 + 50) >1 1000
VCT2<1+ 2000112114
VC 2 23.2 kip
>v4500 >1 12 >1 11.5 (assuming a cover of2.5 in.)
Are stirrups required?
V 8 107k' <VC116k'
p T 0.75 T ' 1p 2 T ' 1p
Stirrups are not required. Use minimum amount of shear reinforcement.
6-20
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 7
7-1 A cantilever beam 8 ft long and 18 in wide supports its
concentrated load located 6 in from the end of the beam and
vertical axis of the beam. The concentrated load is 15 kips
kips live
load. Design reinforcement for flexure, shear, and torsion.
for all
steel and fC 2 3750 psi.
own dead load plus a

4.5 in away from the
dead load and 20
Use fy = 60,000 psi
Design for moment:

Since wide
in / 0.8 2
Therefore,
(22.5 in +
sections are desirable for torsion, estimate that 01 = 0.8, so d 218

22.5 in.
the dead load due to the weight of the beam is:
2.5 in) X 18 in
DL 2 . 2 2 x 0.15 k/ft3 2 0.469 k/ft

144 in /ft
So, the moment demand due to factored loads is:
0.469 k/ft x (8 ft)2 _
Mu =1.2x++(1.2x15 k+1.6X 20 k)X7.5 ft 2 393 kft 24720 kin
Select p and corresponding R-factor, assuming the desirable strain diagram shown
in Fig. 5-27b,
which leads to 2 0.9 .
_ 0.85 X
4 fy T 4 x
(0 = pfy =
f 'C 3,750
3,750 psi
60,000 psi
0.0133x 60,000 psi
psi
R 2 mfc(10.59a)) 2 0.213 X 3.75 ksi X (1 0.59 X 0.213) 2 0.698 ksi

2 0.0133 Note: A 2 0.85 forfc2 3,750 psi
2 0.213
Now select h with b 2 18 in:

bdz = M" = 4720 1 . 2 7500 in3
R 0.9 X 0.698 ks1
Since the width of the beam is given as 18 in, we can directly solve for a
reasonable d value.
d2 M = ammgmmn
bR 0.9 X18 in X 0.698 ks1
h2d+2.5 in224 in
b 2 18 in
constructability.
Finally, determine AS required for resisting this applied moment by first going
back and
recalculating the weight of the beam with the final selected dimensions:
DLE bf: 2X - 32181H_XE412I1
144 in /ft ft 144 in /ft

So MM 2 393 kft 2 4720 kin
Calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd 2 0.9d :
AS = M1 2 4720 1 . = 4.52 in2
a 0.9X60 kSiX(0.9X21.5 in)
fy d 3
X01553 = 0.455
ft ft
7-1
River, NJ 07458.
4f, 4.52 in2 x

= = _ _ 2 4.73
0.85f'C b 0.85
A M 4720 k-in
60 ksi .
in
X 3.75 ks1 X18 in
= 457 in2
pf, (d _3) 0.9X60 ksiX (21.5 in 47:1)

N 0 further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very
reasonable. Use
17 2 18 in, h 2 24 in, and AS 2 4.57 inz. Bars will be selected later.
Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the
minimum
required.
Forf. = 3,750 psi, 3,] f '. 21843 200 so use 200 psi
@de 2LPS1918 inX21.5 in 21.29 in2 $4.57 in2 OK
fy 60,000 ps1
s,min _
Also, calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that
assuming 2 0.9 is
valid.
A ' 2 '
_ sfy = 4.57 in X60 ks1 24.78 in
0.85fc b 0.85 X 3.75 ksi X18 in
We know that/5l 2 0.85 .
2124.781n25-62 'n
,6] 0.85
1 2 E x gm 2 M x 0.003 2 0.0085 2 0.005 OK
C 5.62 in
N ow design for torsion and shear:
At d 2 21.5 in away from the face, the factored torsion is:
Tu2(1.2X15k+1.6X20k)X 451 218.8kft
1 in/ft
At d 2 21.5 in away from the face, the factored shear is:
V" 21.2X15 k+1.2X(8 ft% ft)X0.45 k/ft+1.6X20k253.4k
Should torsion be considered in this design?

Am 218 in x 24 in 2 432 in2
P12 2(18 in+24in)X2284 in
From Eq. (7-18b):
A
2
'4. =221/f'. ( 1;?
UP
111
2
432 in2
\J 2 0.75 X 1.0X ((3,750 psi X (84') 102,0001b-i11 2 8.5 k-ft
7-2
SinceTM 2 Tu. , torsion must be considered. Also, since we are dealing with a
statically determinate
system, we have a case of equilibrium torsion, in which the full factored
torsion must be sustained
by our beam. Therefore, the design torsion cannot be reduced.
Check whether the section dimensions are sufficient to withstand the combined
stresses due to
shear and torsion.
From Eq. (7-33):
V 2 TP 2 V
(17:11 12] 2428151
Assuming #4 stirrups,
P,22X(24in2X1.51n2X0.25in+181n2X1.5in2X0.251n)2701n
A0,2(24in2X1.5in2X0.251n)X(181n2X1.5in2X0.251n)2297in2
2
2 . . .
_ _ _ . - 2 3,75 1 21.5 .
( .5341 . ) + lggk 701112 307540? 81115 1n+8,/3,750ps1)
18inX21.5in 1_7X(297 1112) 18inX21.5in
0.174 ksi $0.459 ksi
The section is sufficiently large.

N ow determine the area of stirrups required to resist V:
VC 2 21);de 2 243,750 psi X18 in X 21.5 in 247.4 k
V 53.4 k
VS2VC247.4k223.8k
0.75
- 2
i2 14 22381 . 20.0181;
s fwd 60kSiX21.5 in in
Determine the additional area of stirrups required to resist T:
T .
_ w = 25_1 k-ft
u
" T 0.75 T 0.75
From Eq. (7-24), using A0 2 0.85A0h:
T . ' ' 2
2 n = 251kftX12in/ft 20.00991:
s ZAOfy, cot6 2 X 0.85 x 297 in2 x 60 ksi x cot (45 ) 1n
So, evaluate the total required area of stirrups:
- 2 - 2 - 2
For strength: 0.0181; + 2 x 0.009912 2 0.03781
in in in
. . 2
Minimum required: SObW 2 m 2 0.0151_i
fy, 60, 000 ps1 in
The strength requirement governs here.
7-3

River, NJ 07458.
N ow determine stirrup size and spacing:
12 in
smax S P,1 /8270/828.75 in
d / 2 210.75 in (for shear)
- 2
If we select #3 stirrups, s s M 2 5.82 in
003781.:
111
- 2
If we select #4 stirrups, s s w 210.6 in
0.03781.i
111
Although it is a tight spacing, select to use closed #3 stirrups at 5 in
spacing.
Determine the need for longitudinal reinforcement resisting torsion:
- 2
For strength: A, 2 [i] P, [J cot2 6 2[O.OO9901_1]X 70 in X 1.0 X 1.0 2 0.693
in2
s y, in
5 ' A
Minimum required: A,min 2 A i P,1 &
fyl S fyl
. 2 . 2 1 2
Since 2 2 0.0221.1 2 2 0.007512, we must use 0.0221,2
s in f yt in in
5 3,750 2 432' 2 ' 2
m1. 2 w 0.0221_i x 70 in x10 2 0.66 in2
60 kSi in
Use A, 2 0.693 in2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal
bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed
in the middle of
each face. So 8 bars are required.
Area /bar 2 0.693 in2 /8 bars 2 0.0866 in2/bar
Select #3 bars along bottom and sides of the cantilevered section.
The reinforcement required along the top of the beam for resisting moment and
torsion is:
A: 2 4.56 in2 + 3 X 0.0866 in2 2 4.82 in2
Select 5#8 bars along the top of the beam such that A1 2 5A,, 2 5 X 1.0 in2 2 5
in2 2 4.82 in2 .
74

River, NJ 07458.
7-2 Explain why the torsion in the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21a is called
equilibrium
torsion, while the torsion in the edge beam Al-Bl in Fig. P7-3 is called
compatibility torsion.
If the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21c did not resist torsion, the beam would
rotate,
uninhibited, about its longitudinal axis and fail to resist the action of load
P. Essentially, the
torsional resistance of the beam is required for equilibrium to be satisfied.
On the contrary, if beam A1-B1 in Fig. P7-3 did not resist torsion, the beam
would rotate
only slightly before the oors weight and superimposed loads would be
redistributed to other
elements, thereby satisfying equilibrium through the redundancy of the system.
The torsion in A1B1 only arises from the need to maintain compatibility of deformations between
the ends of the
joists and the twisting of the edge beam.
7-3 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3.
Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength, f, = 4,500 psi. Also, assume that the longitudinal steel
has a
yield strength of fy = 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength
of
fy, 2 40 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns B1 and C1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
Step 1: Determine M, V, and TM:
12 in.X218 in ><15011: = 225g
144in/ ft ft
ft2
If we assume that the slab dimensions given in the figure are measured center to
center of the
beams, we need to account for half the width of the beam in addition the span
length given when
calculating loads. Therefore the dead weight from slab, per foot of beam, is:
6 inX6.5 ft X1502488
'n 3
12 1A ft
6.5 ft X 20%b2 2130
it it
To simplify the design, we will not reduce the live load. Therefore, the live
load per foot of beam:
6.5 ft X 501122 2 325E

ft ft
So, using w 21.2DL +1.6LL, the factored load is, per foot of beam:
w, 21.2 x (0.225 k/ft + 0.488 k/ft + 0.130 k/ft) +1.6 x (0.325 k/ft) 21.53 k/ft
7-5
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
At columns:
_ wu({n)2 _ 1.53 >1 (26.17)2 _
At midspan:
_ wu({n)2 _ 1.53 >1 (23.67)2 _
Mu 16 16 53.6k-ft
Note that[ 11 is taken as the average of the adjoining clear spans for
calculating the negative
moment at the columns.
The design shear is:
At midspan:
16wa,, 1.6 >1 0.325 k/ft >1 23.67 .
Vu 2 8 2 8 2 1.54 kip
At d away from the column face:
_ wutn d (wutn
Vu T f /2 2 Vu,midspan)
n
_ 1.53 >1 23.67 21.5/12 (1.53 >1 23.67
V 2 T 23.67/2 2
1.54) 2 15.6 kip

Note thatin is taken as the clear span length of the interior span when
calculating the shear
acting on the face of the support. Do not reduce this value to the 6 used for
calculating
the negative moment at column B-l.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear
that the slab is
applying to the edge of the beam.
w, 21.2x (0.075 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft) +1.6X (0.050 k/ft) 2 0.194 k/ft
r, 212ft12 in211 ft
your; 0.194 k/ftX(11ft)2
M.=-= _20.978 kft
24 24
2
V 2 11,2, :_0.194k/21tx111t:1_07k
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
t 2 0.978 kft +1.07 kX 1 6 1 21.51kft/ft
in/ft
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
_ t({n 2d) _ 1.51(23.67 2 >1 21.5/12) _ 15 2 k ft
u 2 2
7-6
Step 2: Determining the area of longitudinal steel required for flexure.
At the column:
Mu 95.3 >1 12
R T ribbdz T 0.9 1 12 1 21.52 T 229 p
Refer to Table A-3. For), 2 4,500 psi, and R 2 229 psi, p 2 0.0039. So, at the
column, As 2 pbd 2 0.0039 >1 12 >1 21.5 2 1.01 in.2
At midspan:
Mu 53.6 >1 12
R T ribbdz T 0.9 1 12 1 21.52 T 129 p
Refer to Table A-3. There are no R values below 190 psi, which corresponds to
the
3* f, * 7
minimum reinforcement ratio. Therefore, As 2 Plwad 2 12 >1 215 = 0.87 in.2
3"
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam.
Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate
the threshold
torsion.
E < height of beam below slab 218 in h I ~ 1 h f 6 2 2 2
, w e e 5 th t t t
f - 4hf = 24 in 1 r f IS 6 eng 0 ang ac we in orSion
Therefore,
ACp 224 inX12 in+6 inX18 in 2396 in2
P12 224 in+12 in+18in+18in+6in+30 in2108 in
(396 in2)2
A 2
T1 = 241/f , (ID1) 2 0.75 x10 x , (4,500 psi 1 108m
UP
SinceTM 2 Tu. , torsion must be considered in this design.
2 73,000 lb-in 2 6.09 k-ft
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain
equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely
reduce our T, to the

following:
2
A 2 (396 in2)
T 2 42" 22 2 0.75 X 4 X 1.0 X ,i4,500 si 2 292,000 lb-in 2 24.4 k-ft
meant]; f c [ RP \] p 108 in
Unfortunately, since 7; S Tummp, we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since our
design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the
adjoining slab.
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined
actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this
beam.
A0, 2(24in2X1.5in0.5in)X(12in2X1.51n0.5in)2174in2
P, 22x(24 in2X1.5 in0.5 in+12 in2X1.5 in0.5 in)258 in
7-7
River, NJ 07458.
From Eq. (7-33):
V1. 2 TuPh 2 V.
S 0.75< 8 ')
(bwd) + (1.7210,,2 b 11+ f.
W
< 15.6 )2 < 15.2 >1 58 )2 < 0 75 21/4500 >1 12 >1 21.5
12 >1 21.5 1.7 >1 1742 ' 12 >1 21.5
63 psi S 503 psi
+ 8v4500>
Step 6: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist V:
V, 22,/fcbwd22,/4,500 psi x12 inX21.5 in234.6k
V
Vs2iVC220.834.6<0kip
Step 7: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist TM:
T > T 15'2203k1=t
0.75 T 0.75 T ' '
From Eq. (7-24), using A0 2 0.85A0h:
A, Tn 20.3 >1 12 in.2
2 2 2 0.0206 ,
5 ZAofytcote 2 >1 0.85 >1 174 >1 40 >1 cot(45) in.
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
For strength:
2
in.
2 >1 0.0206 2 0.0412 F
Minimum required:
0751/4500 wa _ 50.31 psiX 12 in _ 0 015g
fy, 40,000 psi ' in
12 in
smax S Ph/8258 in/827.25 in
If we select #3 stirrups,
< 2 >1 0.11 _ 5 3 .

S 0.0412 T ' m
2 >1 0.2 _ 9 7.
0.0412 ' In
7-8
River, NJ 07458.
Select closed #3 stirrups at 5 in. spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also
possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine whereTu
S T11 / . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 66.5 in. away from the face of the column.
However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d + b.) 2 (21.5 in +12 in) 2 33.5 in past
this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 100 in. away from the
face of the column.
Since V S Vc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required beyond this
point either.
Final design of transverse reinforcement:
Using closed #3 stirrups,
One stirrup at 2.5 in from either column face, followed by stirrups spaced at 5
in. until beyond 100
in. from the face of the column.
Step 9: Finalize the design of the longitudinal reinforcement:
For strength:
_ At fyt 2 _ 2 _ - 2
A, _ PhCot 9 _ 0.0206 >1 58 >1 >1 1.0 _ 0.7971n.
S fyl 3
Minimum required:
A, =_f1A>> _ep 8
,min 11
fyl S fyl
. 2 . 2 . 2
Since (2) 2 012: 25% 20.007512, we must use 0.00751.i
S min 111 yr 111 111
5 4,500 ' 396' 2 '2 2
4mm 2#000751_ix58 MIX21.92 in2
60 kSi in 3
Use A, 21.92 in2
bars must be spaced
in the middle of
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
Area lbar 21.92 in2 /6 bars 2 0.32 in2 /bar
-At the columns, use #6 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As/bar 2 (1.01 + 2 >1 0.32)/3 2 0.55 in.2, so specify 3 #7
bars along the
top of the section.
-At midspan, use #6 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of
the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, As/bar 2 (0.87 + 2 >1 0.32)/3 2 0.503 in.2, so specify 3
#7 bars along the
bottom of the section.
7-9
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.
Dead weight from spandrel beam, per foot of beam:
wx15oly3 s 3005
144mg2 ft ft
t
Superimposed dead load, per foot of spandrel beam:
1b :
1ftX 20 A2 201b/ft
1b =
1 ft x50 A2 501b/ft
Dead weight from joist, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 in X 18 in 1b _
x150 A, x145 ft 3.26 k
+2
In
144 A 2
Dead weight from slab, applied as a point load at midspan:
6 in X 12 ft
1b :
x150A, x145 ft 13.1 k
1211/ft
Superimposed dead load, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 ft x 14.5 ftX 201bA2 2 3.48 k
Since the live load is not reduced, the live load per foot of beam is:
1b =
12 ftX14.5 ftX50/2 8.7 k
So, using w 21.2DL +1.6LL, the factored load is:
Wu 21.2X (0.300 k/ft + 0.02 k/ft) +1.6 X (0.05 k/ft) 2 0.464 k/ft , per foot of
beam
wuypm 21.2 x (3.26 k +131 k + 3.48 k) +1.6 x (8.7 k) 2 37.7 k, applied as a
point load
6 224 ft 16 in 222.67 ft
With that, we can determine the design moments, but structural analysis software
must be used
since the ACI Moment Coefficients cannot be applied when not all loads are
distributed. Input the
structural model and applied loads using the appropriate pattern loading for the
live loads.
At column A-1: MM 2 102 kft
At midspan: M u 2128 kft
At column A-2: MM 2 139 kft
The design shear at d away from the supports is:
At column A-1:
w ((5,1 2d) + w
mpoim
_ 0.464 k/ft x (22.67 ft 2 x 21.5 in) + 37.7 k
= 2 23.3 k
2 2 2 2 2
At midspan: VM 2 0 k
At column A-2: V 21.15 X VHF1 2 26.8 k
7-10
that the joist is
applying to the edge of the spandrel beam.
w, 21.2x (0.225 k/ft + 0.900 k/ft + 0.240 k/ft) +1.6 x (0.600 k/ft) 2 2.60 k/ft
2, 230 ft12 in 229 ft
2 2.6 k/ftX 29 ft 2
M. :_M=_#291.1k
24 24
2 37.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
T, 2M, +V, x 6.1 2 91.1 kft+37.7 kX 6.1
12 in/ft 12 in/ft
V..=w
u, point
2110 kft
At column A-1: R 2 M12 2 _102 H 12 mm 2 2 245 psi
bd 0.9 x 12 in x (21.5 in)
Refer to Table A-3. For), 2 4,500 psi, and R 2 245 psi, p 2 0.0042. So, at
column A-1, A1 2 pbd 2 0.0042X 12 inX 21.5 in 21.08 in2.
M _ .
At midspan: R 2 2 2 _128 k ftX12 mm 2 2 308 psi
bd 0.9X12 in x (21.5 in)
midspan, A1 2 pbd 2 0.0054 X 12 in X 21.5 in 21.39 in2 .
At column A-2: R : M2 : 139 k-ftX12 in/ft 2
75M 0.9X12 in x (21.5 in)
column A-2, A1 2 pbd 2 0.0058 X 12 in X 21.5 in 21.50 in2 .
2 334 psi
Begin by
the threshold
torsion.
, height of beam below slab 218 in . . . .
E f S , where If f is the length of ange active in torSion.
4hf 2 24 in
Therefore,

P12 224 in+12 in+18in+18in+6in+30 in2108 in
2
A 2 396 in2
Tm 2 We, 'C [lgP] 2 0.75 X 1.0 X ((4,500 psi X % 2 73,0001b-in 2 6.09 k-ft
UP
SinceTM 2 Tu. , torsion must be considered in this design.
equilibrium of the
following:
T 421" P2 0 75 4 1 0 (i4 500 (396 in2)2 292 000 lb 24 4 k f
2 ' 2 2 . X X . X , si 2 , -in 2 . - t
mmmp f C RP p 108 in
Since TM 2 T we can reduce our design torsion to 24.4 k-ft. Since our design
torsion for the
u,c0mp 7
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design
moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this
is required.
beam.
A0, 2(24in2X1.5in0.5in)X(12in2X1.51n0.5in)2174in2
P, 22X(24in2X1.5 in0.5 in+12in2X1.5in0.51n)258in
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
V TB1 V
_ + g _C+8 '
{lad} {17140112} {bwa f 2]
2
2 . . .
. . - ' 2 4,500 12 21.5 .
( 256k . j + 244kftX58i:i S0754 ps1X 1nx 1n+8 41500181)
12 inX21.5 in 1_7X(174 in2) 12 inX21.5 in
0.344 ksi S0503 ksi

VG 22");de 2 214,500 psi X12 in X 21.5 in 234.6 k
At column A-1: VS 20k
AtcolumnA-2: Vs2Vc2346k<0k
0.75
Step 7: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist T:
> T _ 24.4 kft
n _ " 2 32.5 kft

0.75 0.75
From Eq. (7-24), using A0 2 0.85A0h:
T . ' ' 2
2 n = 325kftX121n/ft . 20.03301:
s 2A,f,, cot6 2 x 0.85 x174 in x 40 ksi x eot(45 ) 1n
- 2 - 2
For strength: 2 x 0.03301.i 2 0.0661;
in in
0.75 V X b _ ' ' ' 2
Minimum required: L 2 W 2 0.0151_i
fy, 40,000 p81 in
7-12
River, NJ 07458.
12 in
smax S I-,/8258 in/827.25 in
2x 0.21n2
- 2
0.0661,i
1n
2x031 1n2
- 2
0.0661.2
In
Select closed #4 stirrups at 6.0 in spacing at the ends of the beam. While in
some cases it is
possible that stirrups are not required along the full length of the beam, the
torsion in this case is
constant along the length of the beam, as is the shear. Therefore, closed #4
stirrups are required
along the full length of the beam.
If we select #4 stirrups, s S 2 6.1 in
If we select #5 stirrups, s S 2 9.4 in

- 2
z . 2 _
For strength: A, 2 [ijl [JPyjcot2 6 2 (00330111 ] X 58 in X 3 X 1.0 21.28
in2
s in
yl
5" ' A
Minimum required: A,min - A i P, &
fyl S fyl
. 2 . 2 . 2
Since (2) 2 0.03301.i 2 252W 2 0.007521, we must use 0.03301,i
S ,min 111 yr III III
5 4,500 ' 396' 2 ' 2
m1. 2 w 0.03301_i x 58 in x 3 2 0.94 in2
60 kSi in 3
Use A, 21.28 in2
bars must be spaced
in the middle of
Area /bar 21.28 in2 /6 bars 20.21 in2/ bar
-At column A-1, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, A1 /bar 2 (1.08 in2 + 2 X 0.21 in2)/3 21.50 in2 / 3 2
0.501n2, so specify 3 #7
bars along the top of the section.
the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, A1 /bar 2 (1.39 in2 + 2 X 0.21 1n2) / 3 21.81 in2 /3 2
0.60 in2 , so specify 3 #8
bars along the bottom of the section.
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, A: /bar 2 (1.50 in2 + 2 X 0.21 1n2) / 3 21.92 in2 / 3 2
0.64 in2, so specify 3 #8
7-13
7-4 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3.
Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with sand light-weight concrete that has
a
compressive strength, f, 2 4,000 psi. Also assume that the longitudinal steel
has a
yield strength of fy 2 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength
of
fy, 2 60 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns B1 and C1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.
Note that this problem is very similar to the previous problem. One noticeable
change is the use of
lightweight concrete, which will affect the dead weight used in the calculation
of the design loads.
Although no guidance is given on the density of the sand-lightweight concrete
used in this
problem, any reasonable assumption would be acceptable. Here a density of 120
lb/ft3 is assumed.
12 in X 18 in 1b 1b
in
144 A,
6 rnX6.5 ft X12011332390E
ft ft
1211/ft
6.5 ft X 20L: 2130
it it
6.5 ft X 501192 2 325E
ft ft
So, using w 21.2DL +1.6LL, the factored load is, per foot of beam:
w, 21.2 x (0.180 k/ft + 0.390 k/ft + 0.130 k/ft) +1.6 x (0.325 k/ft) 21.36 k/ft
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
At columns:
_ wu({n)2 _
Mu _ 11 _ 11
At midspan:
_ wu({n)2 _
Mu _ 16 _ 16
1.36 * (26.17)2 _
84.7 k-ft
1.36 * (23.67)2 _
47.6 k-ft
Note thatin is taken as the average of the adjoining clear spans for calculating
the negative
moment at the columns.
7-14
The design shear is:
At midspan:
16wa,, 1.6 * 0.325 k/ft * 23.67 .
Vu 2 8 2 8 2 1.54k1p
At d away from the column face:
_ wufn d (wufn
Vu T f /2 2 Vu,midspan)
n
_ 1.36 * 23.67 21.5/12 (1.36 * 23.67
V 2 _ 23.67/2 2
1.54) 2 13.9 kip

Note thatfn is taken as the clear span length of the interior span when
calculating the shear
acting on the face of the support. Do not reduce this value to the n used for
calculating
the negative moment at column B-l.
that the slab is
w, 21.2x (0.060 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft) +1.6 x (0.050 k/ft) 2 0.176 k/ft
2, 212012 in211 ft
,6 2 0.176 k/ftX 11ft 2
M, 2 W" 2 # 2 0.887 kft
24 24
V :wu_Cn:_0.176k/ftX11ft 20.968k
2 2
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
6 in
in t
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
t({n 2d) 1.37(23.67 2 * 21.5/12)
u 2 2
t 2 0.887 kft + 0.968 k X 21.37 kft/ft
= 13.8 k-ft
At the column:
Mu 84.7 * 12
R : ribbdz 2 0.9 * 12 * 21.52 2 2041351
Refer to Table A-3. Forfc 2 4,000 psi and R 2 204 psi, p 2 0.0035. So, at the
column,
As 2 pbd 2 0.0035 * 12 * 21.5 2 0.90 in.2
At midspan:
Mu 47.6 * 12 .
114 p51
R ::_
(ibbd2 0.9* 12 *21.52

Refer to Table A-3. There are no R values below 190 psi, which corresponds to
the
. . . . 200 200 .
mrnrmum reinforcement ratio. Therefore, As 2 bwd 2 60000 12 * 21.5 2 0.86m.2
y
7-15
Begin by
the threshold
torsion.
g < {height of beam below slab 2 18 in
f _
, here If is the len th of an e acti e in torsion.
4h, 2 24 in W f g g V
Therefore,
PW 224in+12in+18in+18in+6in+30in2108in
A (396 m2)2
2
Zh=e"fvc[ I? \]=0H75><085><"4,000psl>< mm
L?
SinceTM 2 Th, torsion must be considered in this design.
2 58,500 lb-in 2 4.88 k-ft

equilibrium of the
following:
2
A 2 396 in2
Tum], 2 42Jf 'C [lgP] 2 0.75 X 4 X 0.85 X 44,000 psi % 2 234,000 lb-in 219.5
k-ft
C], 1n
Unfortunately, since 7; S 714.com , we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since
our design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the
adjoining slab.
beam.
A0, 2(24 in2X1.5 1110.5 in)X(12 in2X1.5 in0.5 in)2174 in2

P, 22x(24 in2X1.5 1110.5 in+12 in2X1.5 1110.5 in)258 in
From Eq. (7-33):
2
Vu )2 TuPh Va
+ S 0.75< + 8 )
(bwd (1.7/10,12 bwd f5
< 13.9 )2 (13.8 * 58 )2 < 0 75 (2 * 0.85 * V4000 * 12 * 21.5
12 * 21.5 + 1.7 * 1742 12 * 21.5
56 psi S 460 psi
+ 8V4000>
VC 2 2/1 fcbwd 2 2 * 0.85V4000 * 12 * 21.5 2 27.7 kip
Vu
VS2EVC218.527.7<0
7-16
River, NJ 07458.
Step 7: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist TM:
T > T 13'8 184kft

0.75 _ 0.75 _ ' '
From Eq. (7-24), using A0 2 0.85A0h:
A, Tn 18.4 * 12 in.2
2 = 2 0.0124 ,
5 2Aofytcot6 2 * 0.85 * 174 * 60 * cot(45) In.
For strength:
2
in.
2 * 0.0124 2 0.0248 F
Minimum required:
0.754/400012 50b in.2
W < W 2 0.010 ,
fyt yt In.
12 in
smax S Ph/8258 in/827.25 in
< 2 * 0.11 _ 8 9 .
S 0.0248 _ ' m'
< 2 * 0'2 16 1'
S 0.0248 _ ' 1'
Select closed #3 stirrups at 7 in. spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also
possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine whereTu
S Tm / . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 75 in. away from the face of the column.
However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d + [2,) 2 (21.5 in +12 in) 2 33.5 in past
this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 108.5 in. away from the
face of the
column. Since V S Vc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required
beyond this point either.
in. until beyond 109
in. from the face of the column.
River, NJ 07458.
For strength:
A 2
A12 iPhECOtZH 2 0.0187 * 58 * * 1.0 2 0.723 in.2
S fyl 3
Minimum required:
' A
M _f__M a
fyl S fyl
. 2 . 2 . 2
Since (i) 2 01.i S % 2 0.00751.i , we must use 0.00751,i
s min in fyt in in
5 4 ' 3 6' 2 2
mm 2 Mmoosoligg in X1.021.80 m2
60ks1 1n
Use A, 21.80 in2
bars must be spaced
in the middle of
Area /bar 21.80 in2 /6 bars 2 0.30 in2 /bar
-At the columns, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, As/bar 2 (0.9 + 2 * 0.30)/3 2 0.50 in.2, so specify 3 #7
bars along the
top of the section.
the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, As/bar 2 (0.86 + 2 * 0.30)/3 2 0.487 in.2, so specify 3 #7
bars along the
bottom of the section.
7-18
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.
Again, assume the density of the concrete is 120 lb/ft3 .
12 in X 24 in 1b 1b
1n
144 A,
Superimposed dead load, per foot of spandrel beam:
1b =
1 ft x 20 /ft2 201b/ft
lb 2
1 ft x50 /ftz 501b/ft
Dead weight from joist, applied as a point load at midspan:
wx 1201b3x 14.5 ft 2 2.61 k
144111 g 2 ft
t
Dead weight from slab, applied as a point load at midspan:
M x 12011: x145 ft 210.4 k
121V
ft
Superimposed dead load, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 ft X 14.5 ft X 20%b; 2 3.48 k
t
12 ft X 14.5 ft X 50% 2 8.7 k
So, using w 21.2DL +1.6LL, the factored load is:
w, 21.2x (0.240 k/ft + 0.02 k/ft) +1.6X (50 k/ft) 2 0.392 k/ft , per foot of
beam
WWW 21.2 x (2.61 k + 10.4 k + 3.48 k) +1.6 x (8.7 k) 2 33.7 k, applied as a
point load
6 224 ft 16 in 222.67 ft
With that, we can determine the design moments, but structural analysis software
must be used
since the ACI Moment Coefficients cannot be applied when not all loads are
distributed.
At column A-l: M u 2 90.4 kft

At midspan: M u 2114 kft
At column B-l: MM 2 123 kft
The design shear at d away from the supports is:
At column A-l:
u = w ((5,1 2d) + WW,im = 0.392 k/ftX (22.67 ft 2X 21.5 in) + 33_7 k = 20.6 k
2 2 2
At midspan: VM 2 0 k
At column B-l: V =1.15><VMYA_1=23.71(
7-19
that the beam is
w, 21.2x (0.180 k/ft + 0.720 k/ft + 0.240 k/ft) +1.6X (0.600 k/ft) 2 2.33 k/ft
r, 230 ft121n 229 ft
2 2.33 k/ft 29 ft 2
M, : _M2 _#2 81.6 kft
24 24
233.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
6.1 2 81.6 kft + 33.7 kX 6.1 2 98.5 kft
12 1n/ft 12 1n/ft
V.,=w
u, point
TM2MM+VMX
At column A-1: R 2 M, 2 904 H 12 mm 2 2 217 psi
bd 0.9 x12 m x (21.5 m)
Refer to Table A-3. Forfc 2 4,000 psi, and R 2 217 psi, p 2 0.0037. So, at
column A-1,Ax 2 pbd 2 0.0037 X12 in X 21.5 in 20.95 inz.
M _ .
At midspan: R 2 2 2 _114 k ftX12 mm 2 2 274 psi
bd 0.9 x12 m x (21.5 m)
Refer to Table A-3. Forfc 2 4,000 psi, and R 2 274 psi, p 2 0.0048 . So, at
midspan, AK 2 pbd 2 0.0048 X12 in X 21.5 in 21.24 in2.
mm A3, R: M12 _M
bd 0.9 x12 m x (21.5 m)
Refer to Table A-3. Forfc 2 4,000 psi, and R 2 296 psi, p 2 0.0052. So, at
column A-2, AK 2 pbd 2 0.0052X l2 inX 21.5 in 21.34 in2 .
2 296 psi
Begin by
the threshold
torsion.
{height of beam below slab 2 18 in
2' f s
, where If is the len th of an e active in torsion.
4h, 2 24 m f g g
Therefore,
Am 224 inX12 in+6 inX18 in 2396 in2
PW 224in+12in+18in+18in+6in+30in2108in
2
A 2 396 in2
Tm 2 We, 'C [Pl] 2 0.75 X 0.85 X 44,000 psi X % 2 58,5001b-in 2 4.88 k-ft
UP
SinceTM 2 Tm, torsion must be considered in this design.
7-20
equilibrium of the
following:
2
A 2 (3961112)
T 2 42,] ' i 20.75X4X0.85X,/4,000 s'X 2234,0001b-n219.5k-ft
mmmp fc[PCP\] p1 108111 1
Since T, 2 T we can reduce our design torsion to 19.5 k-ft. Since our design
torsion for the
u,c0mp 7
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design
moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this
is required.
beam.
A0, 2(24 in2X1.5 in0.5 in)X(12 in2X1.5 in0.5 in)2174 m2
P, 22x(24 in2X1.5 m0.5 m+12 in2X1.5 in0.5 in)258 in
From Eq. (7-33):
Vu )2 TuPh 2 Va
+ S 0.75< + 8 )
(bwd (1.7/10,2 bwd f5
< 23.7 )2 (19.5 * 58 )2 < 0 75 (2 * 0.85 * 4/4000 * 12 * 21.5
12 * 21.5 + 1.7 * 1742 12 * 21.5 + 8V4000>

279 psi S 460 psi
VC 2 2/1 fcbwd 2 2 * 0.85V4000 * 12 * 21.5 2 27.7 kip
At column A-l:
Vs 2 0 kip
At column A-2:
V
Vs 2324/, 2 31.627.7 2 3.9kip
A Vs 000301'2
5 dfyt '
Step 7: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist T:
T .
n 2 " 2&2260 kft
0.75 0.75
From Eq. (7-24), using A0 2 0.85A0h:
. ' 2
2 T, = 26.0 k-ftX12ln/ft 2001761,:
s 2471,, cot 2 X 0.85 x174 m2 x 60 ksi x Got (45 ) m
7-21
River, NJ 07458.
For strength:
2
in.
2 * 0.0187 + 0.0030 2 0.0382 F
5 I . . 2
017W 2 50X12 in. 200101:
fy, 60,000 ps1 in
Minimum required:
12 in
SW S P,,/8258 in/827.25 in
< 2 * 0.11 _ 5 8 .
S 0.0382 _ ' m'
< 2 * 0'2 10 5'
S 0.0382 _ ' 1'
Select closed #3 stirrups at 5 in. spacing for the full length of the beam.
While in some cases it is
possible that stirrups are not required along the full length of the beam, the
torsion in this case is
constant along the length of the beam, as is the shear. Therefore, closed #3
stirrups are required
along the full length of the beam.
in.
A: fyt 2 1n2 - ' 2
For strength: A, 2 P, cot 6 2 0.0176_ X58 lnX1.0X1.021.02 ln
s y, 1n
5" ' X A
Minimum required: A,min 2 Q if; &
fyl S fyl
~ 2 ~ 2 ' 2
Since {5] 2 0.01761,i 2 2 000501;, we must use 0.01761,i
s m, 1n y, ln ln
4 ' 3 ' 2 ' 2
A, m 2 Moondiws in x1.021.07 m2
60 ksr 1n
Use A, 21.07 in2
7-22

River, NJ 07458.
bars must be spaced
in the middle of
Area/bar21.07 in2 /6 bars 20.18 in2 /bar
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, A, /bar 2 (0.95 in2 + 2 X 0.18 in2)/ 3 21.31 in2 / 3 2
0.437 in2, so specify 3
#6 bars along the top of the section.
the beam. As
bottom reinforcement, A, /bar 2 (1.24 in2 + 2 X 0.18 in2)/ 3 21.60 in2 / 3 2
0.53 inz, so specify 3
#7 bars along the bottom of the section.
face of the beam.
As top reinforcement, A, /bar 2 (1.34 in2 + 2X 0.18 in2)/3 21.7 in2 /3 20.57
inz, so specify 3 #7
7-23
Chapter 8
8-1 Figure P8-1 shows a cantilever beam with b 2 12 in. containing three No. 7
bars
that are anchored in the column by standard 90 hooks. fc 2 5000 psi (normalweight) and f y 2 60000 psi. If the steel is stressed to fy at the face of the
column,
can these bars:
(a) be anchored by hooks into the column? The clear cover to the side of the
hook is 2 3%: in. The clear cover to the bar extension beyond the bend is 2 in.
The joint is enclosed by ties at 6 in. o.c.
Except for the side cover of 2 % in., a clear cover of 2 in. is assumed
throughout the beam
andjoint. See Fig. S8-1 below.
18 in. 48 in.
A
I V I
I I
I I
l : 3 #7
2 in- (clear COVCTF ? : 7.5 in / 2 in. (clear cover) 2 in.%2
I I l
| I i
f I l j
s 2 I
6 in. I 18 in.
I
i - l
---* -- -- -- ---- - -- -- -- _I I
I I j
I I #3, double legs
I I
I I Side cover 2 2% in. for columns and 2 in. for beams;
: : Beam width 2 12 in.
I A I
v
Fig. 825-1
1. Check if a 90 standard hook can be used
0 Length of the hook tail including the bend:
12d, + 361,) + 0.503,, 215.561,, 215.5 X 0.875 in. 213.6 in.
0 Available vertical room for the hook tail:
18 in. 2X 2 in. 214 in. >13.6 in., OK.
2. Required development length of 90 standard hooks:
0 Basic development length of 90 standard hooks:
0.02
p : Wefy db=WX08752148 in.
h 2,]? 1>< J5000
Note: Coating factor we 21 for uncoated reinforcement (assumed)
Lightweight-aggregate-concrete factor 2 21 for normal-weight
concrete
8-1
o Applicable factors:
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(a) applies (factor of 0.7) because:
bar size smaller than bar No. 11
side cover: 2 3/4 in. 2 2 1/2 in.
tail cover: 2 in. 2 2 in.
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(b) does not apply because:
tie spacing: 6 in. > 3d,, 2 2.6 in.
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(d) does not apply because fy 2 60000 psi
6d,, 2 (,1, X 0.7 214.8 in.X 0.7 210.4 in.
0 Minimum development length
6d,,min 2 max(8db,6 in.) 2 max(8 X 0.875 in., 6 in.) 2 7 in. < 10.4 in. , OK.
3. Available horizontal room for 90 standard hook:
18 in. 2 in. 216 in. >10.4 in., OK.
Conclusion: The bars can be anchored in the column by using 90 standard hook.
(b) be developed in the beam? The bar ends 2 in. from the end of the beam. The
beam has No. 3 double-leg stirrups at 7.5 in.
1. Available room in the beam for straight anchorage:
48 in. 2 in. 2 46 in.
2. Required development length of straight anchorage conforming to AC1 Code
Section
12.2.2.:
0 Determine which formulas to use in the Table 8-1
12 in. 2X 2 in. 3X 0.875 in.
Clear spacing: W 2 2.7 in. 2 201,, 21.75 in.
Clear cover: 2 in. 2 db 2 0.875 in.
Bar #7
~ , _ wet/4f, _1.3x1x60000
X 0.875 2 48.3 in. > 46 in., NG.
db
.2 _ _
h 202/7; 20x1xs/5000
Note: Bar-location factor (p, 21.3 is used because the bars are top
reinforcement with a depth of fresh concrete below:
18 in. 2 in. 0.875 in. 215.1 in. >12 in.
Per ACI Code Section 12.2.2, the bars cannot be developed in the beam by
using straight anchorage. This problem can be solved by reducing the bar size.
However, ACI Code Section 12.2.3 allows another method to calculate the
development length which is likely to yield a shorter development length. Let
try
this.
3. Required development length of straight bars conforming to AC1 Code Section
12.2.3.
0 Bar-size factor w, 21 for #7 bars
8-2
8-2
8-3
0 Bar-spacing factor c,
One-half center-to-center spacing of the bars:
05X 12 1n.2X 2;n.0.875 1n. 21.78 in.
Smallest distance from beam surface to centers of bars:
2 in. +08725 111 2 2.44 in.
c, 2 min(1.78 in.,2.44 in.) 21.78 in.
0 Transverse reinforcement index
404 40><(2X0.11111.2)
sn 7.5 in.X 3
K
tr
2 0.39 in.
0 Required development length per ACI Code Section 12.2.3
3
(2d : fy (mu/6w. db 2 3X60000 1.3x1x1 X0875 2 29.2 in.<46 in.
40/R/fJ % 40x1x4/5000 M
db 0.875
K
(Note that 622" 2 2.48 < 2.5,0K.)
b
Per ACI Code 12.2.3, the bars can be developed in the beam by using straight
anchorage.
Give two reasons why the tension development length is longer than the
compression development length.
1.
2.
A bar stressed in compression transfers some of its force to the concrete by
bearing
on the end of the bars.
A bar stressed in tension transfers its tensile stress into concrete. As a
result the
concrete is cracked and in-and-out bond stresses exist. In such a case there
are
localized bond stresses which are several times greater the average bond stress.
A bar
stressed in compression transfers its stress into concrete which is compressed
and
hence un-cracked. There are no in-and-out bond stresses in such a case.
Why do bar spacing and cover to the surface of the bar affect bond strength?
The lugs on deformed bars transfer forces to the concrete. The radial component
of these
lug forces causes a tensile stress in an annulus of concrete around the bar. The
thicker the
wall of this annulus the lower the tensile stresses are in it. The thickness of
the wall is
governed by the minimum distance to the surface of the concrete or to the next
bar. Thus,
the larger the cover and bar spacing are, the larger the bond stresses can be
developed.
8-3
8-4
8-5
A simply supported rectangular beam with b 2 14in. and d 2 17. 5 in. and No. 3
Grade 40 stirrups at s 2 8 in., spans 14 ft and supports a total factored
uniform
load of 6.5 kips/ft, including its own dead load. It is built of 4000 psi lightweight
concrete and contains 2 No. 10 Grade 60 bars that extend 5 in. past the centers
of
the supports at each end. Does this beam satisfy ACI Section 12.11.3? If not,
what is
the largest size bars which can be used?
It
The question asks to check if 5,, S
+ [a at the support.
0
1. Calculation of 0,.
. Bar-location factor 1p, 2 1 for bottom bars
0 Coating factor we 21 for uncoated reinforcement (assumed)
o Bar-size factor 9: 2 1 for #10 bars
0 Lightweight-aggregate-concrete factor 2 2 0.75 for light-weight concrete
0 Bar-spacing factor 6, 2 min[2.5 in.,0.5 X (14 in. 2 X 2.5 in.)] 2 2.5 in.
0 Transverse reinforcement index K .
K _ 404,, _ 40(2 * 0.11) _ 0 55,
tr_ 5 8*2 . 1n.
0 Calculate the development length
_ 3fy val/671%,, _ 3X60000 1x1x1
404 fCb+_Kr b 40x0.75J4000 w
db 1.27
X 1.27 2 50.2 in.
d
K
(Note that 622" 2 2.4 < 2.5,0K.)
b
2. Calculation of M +t
Asfy _ 2 * 1.27 * 60000
a T 0.85fc'b T 0.85 * 4000 * 14 T
Mn 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 2 * 1.27 * 60000(17.5 3.2/2) 2 2420 k-in.
a .
in.
v, :65 k/f;X14ft:45-5 kips
Mn, _2420+5582'
V, T455 T 'm'
M
[d S V + (1,, So, the use of 2 #10 bars satisfies ACI Code Section 1211.3.
0
Why do ACI Section 12.10.3 and 12.12.3 require that bars extend (1 past their
cutoff points?
Inclined cracking due to shear increases the tension in the exural
reinforcement at all
points except the points of maximum moments. As a result, the tensile force in
the
exural reinforcement computed from the moment at a given section actually
exists at a
point about 0.756! to d from that point in the direction of decreasing moment.
8-4
8-6
8-7
Why does ACI Section 12.102 dene points within the span where adjacent
reinforcement terminates as critical sections for development of reinforcement
in
exural members?
If exural reinforcement is cut off according to the moment diagram, the exural
cut-off
point is the point in the beam where the remaining steel not cut off is just
adequate for the
moment if stressed to f, . Due to the effect of shear, this point actually
occurs about 01
farther away and hence this point is critical.
A rectangular beam with cross section b 2 14 in., h 2 24 in., and d 2 21. 5 in.
supports a total factored load of 3.9 kips/ft, including its own dead load. The
beam is
simply supported with a 22-ft span. It is reinforced with 6 No. 6 Grade 60 bars,
two
of which are cut off between midspan and the support and four of which extend 10
in. past the centers of the supports. f c 2 4000 psi. The beam has No. 3
stirrups
satisfying ACI Code Sections 11.4.5 and 11.4.6.
(E
!
!
h224in. , i s d221.5iu.
/ cutofprlnt !
I
A A i
. \4 bars #6 \6 bars #6
10 1n, '4 11 ft. 2'
'IT '|
{d = 28.5 in. {d = 28.5 in.
6M, 2 236 k-ft.
f r I Kfactored moment i
a diagram M )2
/ L! N
, exural 3 ll
,// cutoff point 1 2
/
/ cutoff point 2
/ V
10 in, 356 in, 215 in,

Fig. S8-2
. wx .
(a) Plot to scale the factored moment dlagram. M (x) 2 7 (x l), where xls
the distance from the support and l is the span.
3.9X11ft
Maximum moment at the midspan: M (x 2 6/ 2) 2 (22 ft 11 ft) 2 236 k-ft
The factored moment diagram is shown in Fig. S8-2.
8-5
(b) Plot a resisting moment diagram and locate the cut-off point for the two
cutoff bars.
1. Moment capacity of beam sections with 6 #6 bars
45f, (6 X 0.44 in.2) X 60000 psi
T 0.85be T 0.85 X 4000 psi X 14 in. T
Mn(6#6) 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 6 * 0.44 * 60000(21.5 3.3/2) 2 3140 k-in.
3.3 in.
a 3.3 in. .
C22 23.9 1n.( 20.85for 24000 si
,6, 0.85 A f2 p )
d c 21.5 3.9
e, 2 752m 2 T0.003 2 0.014 > 0.005
Mn(6#6) = 0.9 * 3140 = 2830 k-in. = 236 k-ft
2. Moment capacity of beam sections with 4 #6 bars
_ 45f, _ (4 X 0.44 in.2) X 60000 psi _ 2
T 0.85be T 0.85 X 4000 psi X 14 in. T
Mn(4#6) 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 4 * 0.44 * 60000(21.5 2.2/2) 2 2150 k-in.
a 2.2 in.
c22 22.6 in. 20.85 for '24000 si
A 085 (A f, p )
d c 21.5 2.6
s, 2 752m 2 T0.003 2 0.022 > 0.005
Mn(4#6) = 0.9 * 2150 = 1930 k-in. = 160 k-ft
3. Development length for straight bars. ACI Code Section 12.2.2 will be used to
determine the development length.
0 Minimum clear spacing between bars:
14 in. 2X 2.3 in. 5 X 0.75 in.
5
0 Since the shear reinforcement is provided such that ACI Code Sections 11.5.4
and 11.5.5.3 will be satisfied, shear reinforcement is not less than the minimum
code requirement.
0 Bars used are #6
21.1 in.> db 2 0.75 in.
3 Ed 2 Md, 2 M X 0.75 2 28.5 in.
252]ng 25 X1X a/4000
4. Locate the cut-off point of the 2 #6 bars (see Fig. S8-2.)
0 Determine the exural cut-off point of the 2 #6 bars. This point is the
intersection
of the factored moment diagram and the line of moment capacity M, (4#6) ,
i.e.:
mo 2 M.<4#6)
3.9x
x = 4.76 ft = 57.1 in.
8-6
o Extend the exural cut-off point a distance d toward the left support to take
into
account the shear effect. The distance from the left support to the cut-off
point is
57.1 21.5 2 35.6 in.
The resisting moment diagram is shown in Fig. S8-2.
8-8 Why does ACI Code Section 12.10.5 require extra stirrups at bar cut-off
points in
some cases?
A severe discontinuity in longitudinal bar stresses exists in the region of a
cut-off point in
a zone of exural tension. This causes a reduction in the inclined cracking load
in that
region. To compensate, more stirrups are required.
The beam shown in Fig. P8-9 is built of 4000 psi normal-weight concrete and
Grade 60 steel.
The effective depth d 2 18. 5 in. The beam supports a total factored uniform
load of 5.25
kips/ft, including its own dead load. The frame is not part of the lateral loadresisting
system for the building. Use Figs. A-1 to A-4 to select cut-off points in
Problems 8-9 to 8-11.
8-9 Select cut-off points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Cut off two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each end.
Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
1. Development length for bottom #6 and #7 bars
From the effective depth of 18.5 in, assume a concrete cover of 2.5 in. to
centers of the
bars.
0 Clear spacing:
12 2 * 2.5 0.875 2 * 0.75
3 2 1.54 in. > db

0 Shear reinforcement:
A . ' .2 A 5 b
V 2 & 2 0.028 1n2/in. > V 2 0 W 2 50X12 2 0.015 1n2/in.
s 8 In. s m f, 40000
(Note that 0.754fC 2 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi)
The development length is computed following Case 1
/,,,(#6 bottom)2 WM _M X 0.75 2 28.5 in.

2524768 25 X 1 X 44000
Wei/4f _ 1X 1 X 60000
(#7, bottom: X 0.875 2 41.5 in.

2024T'd 2T0 X 1 X 44000
2. Locate the cutoff point for the #6 bars
After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide an As of
1.2 in.2, which is 0.577 times As at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be
cutoff
when the moment demand is less than 0.577Mu at midspan. From Fig. A-2, this
occurs at 0.225,, 2 4.4 ft 2 52.8 in. from the face of the exterior support. The
actual
cutoff has to be the larger of d and 12 db beyond the theoretical cutoff point.
8-7
d 2 18.5 in. and 12db 2 9 in., so the actual cutoff is 52.8 18.5 2 34.3 in.
from
the face of the exterior support.
Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger than
the
development length.
10 ft 34.3 in. 2 85.7 in. > 28.5 in.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars is 34 in. from the face of the exterior
support.
Do the same calculations for the interior support (B) for this exterior span:
After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide As 2 1.2
in.2,
which is 0.577 times As at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be cutoff when
the
moment demand is less than 0.577Mu at midspan. From Fig. A-2, this occurs at
0.235,, 2 4.6 ft 2 55.2 in. from the face of the interior support. The actual
cutoff has
to be the larger of d and 12d b beyond the theoretical cutoff point. d 2 18.5
in. and
12db 2 9 in., so the actual cutoff is 55.2 18.5 2 36.7 in. from the face of
the
interior support.
the
development length.
10 ft 36.7 in. 2 83.3 in. > 28.5 in.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars can be 36 in. from the face of the
interior
support. To limit the potential for errors on the jobsite, given the very small
difference between exterior and interior support cutoff locations, we will
select the
more conservative value for both supports of the exterior span. Cutoff 2 #6 bars
at 34
in. from the face of the columns in the exterior span.
Verify that enough bars are extended into the column:
. 2 As(mid) I 2
As(col) 2 1.21n. > T 2 0.52m.
This requirement is satisfied. Also, specify that the #7 bars extend 6 in. into
the
columns.
With the #7 bars extended 6 in. into the columns, verify that the #7 bars are
sufficiently developed. To check this, ensure that the continuous #7 bars extend
more
than {01 past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.
fd(#7) 2 41.5 in. < 52.8 in. +6 in. 2 58.2 in.
This requirement is satisfied.
M
Check if Q, S V + f, at the positive moment point of inection near end A.
45f, 1.2 * 60000 .
a2,22 1.76ln.
085wa 0.85 * 4000 * 12
Mn 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 1.2 * 60(18.5 1.76/2) 2 1270 k-in.
8-8
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inection closest to end A is
0.1E, 2 2 ft 2 24 in.
V7 2 m 5.25k/ft X 2 ft 2 42 kips
_ { max(d, 12db)
1 T < actual bar embedment past the PI 2 36 + 6 2 42
Mn 1270
7u+fa2 42 +18.5248.7in. >41.5in.
} = 18.5 in.
8. Check i
Ld
2
Everything remains the same as for end A, except the point of inection.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inection closest to end B is
0.1046, 2 2.08 ft. The change is not significant, so (a, S

u
9. Check whether ACI Code Section 12. 10. 5. 1 1s satisfied.
V2 5.25k/ft*20ft 52 5kft 34in. 23.76k'
2 2 T ' / *12i.n/ft 1p
VC 2 22 fcbwd 2 2 * V4000 * 12 * 18.52 28.1 kip
Avfytd 0.22 * 40 * 18.5 I
Vs = S 2 8 2 20.4 klp
qan 2 (Ml/C + Vs) 2 0.75(28.1 + 20.4) 2 36.4 kip
2
Vu 2 37.6 S 24.3 2 Vn
Therefore, we must add stirrups near the point of termination for the #6 bars.
Additional stirrup area required is:
3Vu 3 * 37.6
Av,reqld> 2>_ C : 2 *O_75_28'1 200641.11:
5 T fytd 40 * 18.51n.
If we keep the same #3 U-shaped stirrups, Av 0.22 in.2. Therefore, 5 S
3.45 in. Specify a stirrups spacing of 3 in. within d of the #6 bar termination
point.
(b) Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
1. Development length for # 6 and #7 top bars
Note that the clear spacing of top #7 bars is:
122 *2.54*0.875
4 2 0.875 in. 2 db
The development length is computed following Case 1, with w, 21.3 for top bars.
6,, (#6, top): Wei/4f 2W X 0.75 2 37.0 in.
5224f;d 25 X 1X 4000
i .3 .
2, (#7, top) 2 W fy 1X1 X 60000 X 0.875 2 54.0 111.
20247; b T 20X1X 44000

8-9
2. Determine the cut-off point conforming to reinforcement continuity for
negative
reinforcement near column A
0 Since all reinforcement is required to extend past the point of inection, the
A (face)
requirement of greater than to extend past the point of inection is

automatically satisfied.
0 All reinforcement has to extend past the inection point a length:
2 d 2 18.5 in.
{2 12db 2 10.5 in} = 185 in.
2 fn/16 2 16 in.
0 Negative moment point of inection from face of column A is
0.1645, 2 3.28 ft 2 39.4 in.
0 Total length from face of column A to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
39.4 + 18.5 2 57.9 in. > fd(#6, top) 2 37.0 in. Choose 58 in.
negative
reinforcement near column B
requirement of greater than M to extend past the point of inection is
2 d 2 18.5 in.
{2 12db 2 10.5 in} 2 18.5 in.
2 fn/16 2 16 in.
0 Negative moment point of inection from face of column B is
0.246, 2 4.8 ft 2 57.6 in.
0 Total length from face of column B to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
57.6 + 18.5 2 76.1 in. > fd(#7, top) 2 54.0 in., so choose 78 in.
(c) Check the anchorage of the negative moment bars at A and modify the bar
size if necessary.
Reinforcement continuity and structural integrity require that all negative
moment
reinforcement be fully anchored into column A. Note that the development length
of
straight #6 bars is 37.1 in., which far exceeds the available column width of 18
in. A
hook must be used for anchorage.
0 Development length for a standard 90 hook for #6 bars:
0.02
2,, 2 W2,fy d, 2 _002 X 1 X 60000 X 0.75 214.2 in.
24K
1 X 44000
0 Applicable factors. The problem does not give sufcient information to decide
if reduction factors per ACI Code Section 12.5.3 shall apply. To be
conservative, assume that no reduction of 6,, will be made.
(d, 2 5,, 214.2 in.
0 Minimum development length
8-10
Cdmmin 2 max(8db,6 in.) 2 max(8 X 0.75 in., 6 in.) 2 6 in. < 14.2 in. , OK.
0 Available horizontal room for the 90 standard hook:
18 in. 2.4 in. 215.6 in. >14.2 in., OK

Extend the hook past the column face and to the other side of the column.
15in. % 58 in. a 78 in. 44
21 in. 2
6 in. 422 34 in. 34 in. 24LE6 in.
Fig. S8-3
8-10 Repeat Problem 8-9(a) and (b) for span B-C
(a) Cut off two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each end.
Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
centers of the
bars.
0 Clear spacing:
12 2 * 2.5 0.875 2 * 0.75
3
o Shear reinforcement:
- 2
i = 02A 2 0.028 1n2/in. > (i) 2 2 50X12 2 0.015 1n2/in.
5 1n. 5 m
f, 40000
(Note that 0.7547; 2 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi)
2 1.54 in. > db

Wei/4f _ 1 X 1 X 60000
C #6, bottom: X 0.75 2 28.5 in.

( 25247;d 2T5 X 1 X 44000
Wei/4f _ 1 X 1 X 60000
C (#7, bottom: X 0.875 2 41.5 in.
20247;d 2T0X1X 44000

2. Locate the cutoff point for the #6 bars. Both supports are interior supports.
in.2,
the
0.28%, 2 5.9 ft 2 70.6 in. from the face of the interior support. The actual
cutoff has
in. and
the
interior support.
3. Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger
than the
development length.
8-11
6.
7.
(b)
10.5 ft 52.1 in. 2 73.9 in. > 28.5 in.
support.
A mid
As(col) 2 1.2 in.2 > 2 0.52 in.2
the
columns.
more
than Cd past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.

Cd(#7) 2 41.5 in. < 70.6 in. +6 in. 2 76.6 in.
M
Check if C d S V + C a at the positive moment point of inection.
Asfy 1.2 * 60000 I
a222 1.76ln.
0.85fc'bw 0.85 * 4000 * 12
Mn 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 1.2 * 60(18.5 1.76/2) 2 1270 k-in.
0.146Cn 2 3.07 ft 2 36.8 in.
5.25 * 21 I
u 2 TT 5.25 * 3.07 2 39 klp
_ max(d, 12db) _ ,
[a T i< actual bar embedment past the PI 2 36 + 6 2 42} T 18.51n.
Mn 1270 . .
711 + [a = W + 18.5 = 51.0111. > 41.5111.
Check whether ACI Code Section 12.105 .1 is satisfied.
5.25k/ft*21ft 525k ft 52in. 324k'
: . * = u 2 / 12 in./ft 1p
VC 2 22 fcbwd 2 2 * V4000 * 12 * 18.5 2 28.1 kip
Avfytd 0.22 * 40 * 18.5 I
Vs TTTTTZOTHTP
szn 2 >(VC + Vs) 2 0.75(28.1 + 20.4) 2 36.4 kip
2
Vu 2 32.4 S 24.3 2 >Vn
3Vu V 3*32.4_ I 2
Avmeqld 2 2> 2 = 2 * 0.75 ' = 00501:
5 fytd 40 * 18.5 1n.
If we keep the same #3 U-shaped stirrups, Av 2 0.22 in.2. Therefore, 5 S
4.40 in. Specify a stirrup spacing of 4 in. within d of the #6 bar termination
point.
Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
8-12
1. Similar to Problem 8-9(b), extend all negative reinforcement past the
negative
moment point of inection a length of 18.5 in.
2. Negative moment point of inection from face of column B and C is
0.24C, 2 5.04 ft 2 60.5 in.
3. Total length from face of column B to the reinforcement cut-off point is
60.5 + 18.5 2 79 in. > Cd(#7, top) 2 54 in. Select 80 in.
See Fig. S8-4 for reinforcement details.
W12 80 in. 44 <7 80 in. 44W
21 in. 2
2 52 in. 52 in. <>(LE6 in.
Fig. S8-4
6 injh
8-11 Assume the beam is constructed with 4000 psi light-weight concrete. Select
cut-off
points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Extend all negative moment bars at A past the negative moment point of
inflection.
1. Development length for #6 top bars
Note that the clear spacing of top #6 bars is:
122*2.53*0.75 I
2 1.581n.> db
3
The development length is computed following Case 1, with w, 21.3 for top bars.
welptfy d 1 * 1.3 * 60000
7 #6,to 2 2
d( p) 252 f; b 25*07544000
* 0.75 = 49.3 in.

negative
reinforcement near column A
A (face)
requirement of greater than S to extend past the point of inection is
2 d 2 18.5 in.
{2 12db 2 10.5 in} 2 18.5 in.
2 Cn/16 2 16 in.
0 Negative moment point of inection from face of column A is
0.164C, 2 3.28 ft 2 39.4 in.
0 Total length from face of column A to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
39.4 + 18.5 2 57.9 in. > Cd(#6, top) 2 49.3 in. Choose 58 in.
8-13
River, NJ 07458.
(b) Cut off the two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each
end. Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
centers of the
bars.
0 Clear spacing:
12 2 * 2.5 0.875 2 * 0.75
3 2 1.54 in. > db

0 Shear reinforcement:
A . ' .2 A 5 b
V 2 & 2 0.028 1n2/in. > V 2 0 W 2 50X12 2 0.015 1n2/in.
s 8 In. s m f, 40000
(Note that 0.7547; 2 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi)
1 * 1 * 60000
Cd(#6,bottom) 2 wewtfy d
252 f; b T 25 *07544000
* 0.75 = 37.9 in.

1 * 1 * 60000
7,047, bottom) 2 #19wa db 2 * 0.875 2 55.3 in.
202 f; 20 * 0.7544000
2. Locate the cutoff point for the #6 bars

After the 2 #6 bars are cutoff, the remaining #7 bars will provide an As of
1.2 in.2, which is 0.577 times As at midspan. Therefore, the #6 bars can be
cutoff
when the moment demand is less than 0.577Mu at midspan. From Fig. A-2, this
occurs at 0.22%, 2 4.4 ft 2 52.8 in. from the face of the exterior support. The
actual
cutoff has to be the larger of d and 12 db beyond the theoretical cutoff point.
d 2 18.5 in. and 12db 2 9 in., so the actual cutoff is 52.8 18.5 2 34.3 in.
from
the face of the exterior support.
3. Verify that the distance from midspan to the actual cutoff point is larger
than the
development length.
10 ft 34.3 in. 2 85.7 in. > 37.9 in.
Therefore, the cutoff for the 2 #6 bars is 34 in. from the face of the exterior
support.
4. Do the same calculations for the interior support (B) for this exterior span:
in.2,
the
0.23%, 2 4.6 ft 2 55.2 in. from the face of the interior support. The actual
cutoff has
in. and
the
interior support.
the
development length.
8-14
10 ft 36.7 in. 2 83.3 in. > 37.9 in.
interior
support. To limit the potential for errors on the jobsite, given the very small
difference between exterior and interior support cutoff locations, we will
select the
more conservative value for both supports of the exterior span. Cutoff 2 #6 bars
at 34
in. from the face of the columns in the exterior span.

I 2 As(mid) I 2
As(col) 2 1.21n. > T 2 0.52m.
the
columns.
more
than Cd past the theoretical cutoff point of the #6 bars.
Cd(#7) 2 55.3 in. < 52.8 in. +6 in. 2 58.2 in.
M
Check if Cd S V + C, at the positive moment point of inection near end A.
u
Asfy 1.2 * 60000 I
a2,22 1.76ln.
0.857, bw 0.85 * 4000 * 12
Mn 2 Asfy(d a/2) 2 1.2 * 60(18.5 1.76/2) 2 1270 k-in.
0.1C, 2 2 ft 2 24 in.
V, 2 w 5.25k/ft X 2 ft 2 42 kips
_ max(d, 12db) _ ,
[a T i< actual bar embedment past the PI 2 36 + 6 2 42} T 18.51n.
Mn 1270 I I
711 + [a = W + 18.5 = 48.7111. > 41.5111.
. M . . . . .
Check 1f C d S V + C a at the pos1tlve moment pornt of 1nectlon near end B
Everything remains the same as for end A, except the point of inection.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inection closest to end B is
M
0.104C, 2 2.08 ft. The change is not significant, so Cd S V + C, is ensured.
Check whether ACI Code Section 12.105 .1 is satisfied.
V 5.25k/ft*20ft 525k It 34in. 376k
: . * = u 2 / 12 in./ft 0
V, 2 22 fcbwd 2 2 * 0.75 * 44000 * 12 * 18.5 2 21.1 kip
A d 0.22 40 18.5
5
pm, 2 (pa/C + Vs) 2 0.75(21.1 + 20.4) 2 31.1 kip
8-15
(e)
2
Vu $>Vn
% _ 3 * 37.6
Avreqtd > 24) C : 2 >l< O_75 T 21'1 : 0 073E
s fytd 40 * 18.5 ' in.
If we keep the same #3 U-shaped stirrups, Av 2 0.22 in.2. Therefore, 5 S 3 in.
Specify a stirrup spacing of 3 in. within d of the #6 bar termination point.
Cut off two of the negative moment bars at B when no longer needed.
Extend the remaining bars past the point of inflection.
Calculate the development length of a #7 bar:
1 * 1.3 * 60000
7,647, top) 2 Ma
* 0.875 2 71.9 in.
202 f; b 20 * 0.7544000
Cut-off points for the remaining 3 #7 bars:
These bars need to be extended past the negative point of exure. Problem 8-9(b)
shows that the required length is 76.2 in. Use 78 in. as before.
Cut-off points for 2 #7 bars:
0 Ratio of remaining reinforcement area after cutting off the 2 #7 bars is 3/5 2
0.6
o 2 #7 bars can be cutoff at the location x where Moment at X 2 0.6. This
Maximum moment
occurs at x 2 0.08C, 21.6 ft.219.2 in. from B
0 To consider the shear effect, extend 2 #7 bars a distance 01 past the exural
cutoff point away from B. The distance from the face of column B to the cut-off
point is
19.2 + 18.5 2 37.7 in. < Cd(#7, top) 2 71.9 in., which is not OK. An option is
to
specify a length of 72 in. However, to simplify construction, another option is
to
extend all the bars a distance of 78 in. as in Item 1. Select a cutoff point of
78 in.
from the column face for all 5 #7 bars.
N 0 bars are terminated within a exural tension zone, so there is no need to
check
shear at the cut off point.
.58 in. 78 in.
. #3 stirrups @ 3 in.
\l 2 :21 in.
. l l
5#7
#3 stirrups @ 3 in.\
\
//
2#7
\ B
2#6 Cutoff points for
bars #6
240 in.
6 in.:
8-16
18 in.
River, NJ 07458.
Fig. 585
8-17
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 9
9-1 Explain the differences in appearance of flexural cracks, shear cracks, and
torsional
cracks.
Flexural cracks are approximately vertical cracks extending from the tensile
face of the member
towards the level of the zero-strain axis (neutral axis).
Shear cracks are inclined to the axis of the element. Most often these cracks
start at a exural
crack on the tensile face of the member and extend diagonally through the member
toward the
point of maximum moment.
Torsional cracks spiral around the member and, for pure torsion, are roughly 45
deg. on all faces.
For combined torsion and shear, the cracks tend to be pronounced on the face
where the direct
shear stress and the shear stresses due to torsion add, and less pronounced (or
even absent) on the
opposite face, where the stresses counteract.
9-2 Why is it necessary to limit the width of cracks?
Cracks are of concern for three main reasons:
0 appearance: wide cracks are unsightly and sometimes lead to a concern by
owners and
occupants;
o leakage of air or uids through the crack: crack control is important in the
design of liquidretaining structures;
0 corrosion of reinforcement: traditionally corrosion of reinforcement has been
related to crack
width, but more recent studies suggest that the factors governing the eventual
development of
corrosion are independent of the crack width, although the period of time
required for corrosion
to start is a function of crack width.
9-3 Does the beam shown in Fig. P9-3 satisfy the ACI Code crack control
provisions
(Section 10.6.4)? fy 2 60 ksi.
AC1 Code Eq. (lo-4) : s 215(40If00] 2.5a, $12(_40000]
S
S
using cc 21.5 in.+ (3/8) in. 21.875 in.
f, 2 % f, 2 % X 60, 000 psi240, 000 psi,
(The value for f, can be also calculated as the stress in the reinforcement
closest
to the tension face at service load based on the unfactored moment.)
So,
s215X 40000 2.5Xl.875210.3 in.< 12 M 212 in. OK.
40,000 40,000
_ 3 1
12 |:2><(1.5+()+2(1.128)\J:|
From Fig. P9-3, bar spacing 2 2 2.37 in. < 10.3 in.
3
Thus, the beam satisfies ACI Code Section 10.6.4.
9-1
River, NJ 07458.
9-4 Compute the maximum spacing of No. 5 bars in a one-way slab with 1 in. of
clear
cover that will satisfy the ACI Code crack-control provisions (Section 10.6.4).
f y 2
60 ksi.
AC1 Code Eq. (lo-4) : s 215(40If00] 2.5a, $12(_40000]
S
S
using c, 21.0 in..
f, 2 % f, 2 % X 60, 000 psi240, 000 psi
So,
s 215 X 40000 2.5X1.0 212.5 in.> 12 40000 212 in.
40,000 40,000
Thus, the maximum spacing for the No. 5 bars that satisfies ACI Code Section
10.6.4 is 12 in.
9-5 and 9-6 For the cross sections shown in Figs. P9-5 and P9-6, compute:
(a) the gross moment of inertia, I g;
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and I or; and
(c) [eff for Ma 2 0.5Mn.
The beams have a 1.5 in. of clear cover and No. 3 stirrups. The concrete
strength is
4000 psi; fy 2 60 ksi.
9-5 (a) the gross moment of inertia, I g;
1 2 16 X 243
12
g 218432 in.4 (ignoring the effect of reinforcement for simplicity)
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and I or;
The distance from the extreme tension edge of the section to the centroid of the
lowest
. . 1 . .
layer of steel is [1.5 111.+(%) ln.+3(%) 1n.] 2 2.38 m. Assuming that the
spacing between the
centers of the layers is 2 in., find:
(4X 0.79) X 238+ (2 X 0.79) X 4.38
4.74
Centroid 2 2 3.05 in. above bottom and d 2 20.95 in.
E, _ 29X106 psi
E, T 5700044000 psi T '
Transformed area of steel 2 8.04 X (6 X 0.79) 2 38.11 in.2
Compute location of neutral axis
Let depth of neutral axis be c and sum moments about the neutral axis to zero.
Part Area, in.2 7 , in. A7 ,in.3

Compression
2 2
zone 166 c/ 8 c
Tension steel 38.11 (c 20.95) 38.11c 798.4
A7 2 862 + 38.116 798.4 2 0 and c 2 7.89 in.

Thus, the neutral axis is 7.89 in. below the top of the beam
9-2
River, NJ 07458.
Compute IE
Part Area, in.2 T 9 in. I own A22 411-4
Compress10n 126-2 3.94 654.9 1959.1
zone
Tension steel 38.11 -13 .06 6500
Icr 2 9114 in.4
(c) [eff forMa 2 0.5M,
First calculate Mn for the beam:
Asf y 4.74 X 60000
0,2 02 225.23 in. and C2523 26.15 in.
l 085,6, 0.85X4000X16 0-85
c 6.15
and 8, > 0.005 :> 2 0.90
es 2 [d T cjgcu 2 [M] X 0.003 2 0.00722 > 0.002 O.K.
4.74 X 60000 X (20.95 L23
M 2A f (dE]22]25214kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and M, 2 0.9X 5214 24693 kips-in.
Thus, M, 2 0.5M, 2 2607 kip-in
f1, (7.5X 4000 psi)Xl8432in.4

M 2 ' 2
y, 12in.X10001IiS
klps
2 728.6 kips-in.
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
3
1 2(%) 1 + 1(M)3 1 2(@)318432+ 14%; 911429320in.4
W M, 9 M, 22 2607 2607
9-6 (a) the gross moment of inertia, I g;

Part Area, in.2 ap 9 in. Aymp 1mm 9 ill-4 A72 ,in.4
Web 288 12 3456 13824 2592
Flanges 144 3 432 432 5184
2 2 432 z 2 3888 I, = 22032 in.4
3888
ymp 2 2 9 in. 7,7,," 215 in.
432
1, 2 22032 in.4
9-3
River, NJ 07458.
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and I or;
E 29 X 106 psi
S
E, T 5700044000 psi T '
Transformed area of steel 2 8.04 X (4X 0.79) 2 25.4 in.2
d 224 1n.2.5 in.221.5 in.
Assume that the neutral axis is less than 6 in.
Compute location of neutral axis.
Part Area, in.2 T , in- A? ,in.3

Compression 2
zone 366 c/ 2 18c
nAI 25.4 (c 21.5) 25.4c546
A7 21862 + 2546546 20 and c 24.85 in.

Thus, the neutral axis is 4.85 in. below the top of the beam (i.e. the
compression zone is
rectangular).
Compute IE
Part Area, in.2 T 9 in. I own A22 411-4
Compressron 174.6 242 342 1022.5
zone
nAI 25.4 -16.65 7041
Icr 2 8405 in.4
(c) I, fforMa 2 0.5M,
First calculate CM for the beam:
Af
u=,c s y -M21.55in. and C2155 21.82in.
T 0851:}? T 0.85 X 4000>< 36 0-85
The steel is yielding and it is a tension-controlled section ( 2 0.90) .

3.16X 60000X (21.5Li
M 2A f (dZ]22]23930 kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and Mn 2 0.9 X 3930 2 3537 kips-in.
Thus, M, 2 0.5M, 2 1965 kip-in
f, 1g (7.5 X 4000 psi) X 22032 in.4
7 y, lbs
15 in. X 1000%
klps
M 2 697 kips-in.
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
3
1 (M) 1 + 1 (M22; 1 (697 >322032+ 1 (697 3 84058890' 4
WT M, 9 M, T 2122 2122) T m'
94
9-7
Why are deflections limited in design?
Deections are limited for several reasons.
1. Deections greater than C/ 250 of the span are visible and may be unsightly.
2. Excessive deections may cause cracking of partitions, malfunctioning of

doors and windows
and similar damage to non-structural elements.
3. Excessive deections may interfere with the use of the structure,
particularly if the structure
supports machinery that must be carefully aligned.
4. Pending of water on deected roofs may overload the roofs.
5. Very large deections may damage structural members and change the load path.
9-8
A simply supported beam with the cross section shown in Fig. P9-5 has a span of
25
ft and supports an unfactored dead load of 1.5 kips/ft, including its own selfweight
plus an unfactored live load of 1.5 kips/ft. The concrete strength is 4500 psi.
Compute
(a) the immediate dead load deflection.
(b) the immediate dead-plus-live load deflection.
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed one month after shoring for the beam is removed and
assume that 20 percent of the live load is sustained.
From question 9-5 we found: I g 218432 in.4 , M C, 2 728.6 kips-in.
E, 29 X 106 psi
E, T 5700044500 psi T '
Transformed area of steel 2 7.58 X (6X 0.79) 2 35.93 in.2
Compute location of neutral axis
Let depth of neutral axis be c and sum moments about the neutral axis to zero.
Part Area, in.2 7 , in. A7 ,in.3

Compression 2
zone 166 c/ 2 8 c
Tension steel 35.93 (c 20.95) 35.93c 752.7
A7 2 862 + 35.936 752.7 2 0 and c 2 7.71 in.

Thus, the neutral axis is 7.71 in. below the top of the beam
Compute IE
Part Area, in.2 i 9 in. I own A72 411-4

Compressron 123 .4 3 .85 611 1829
zone
Tension steel 35 .93 -13.24 6298
Ior 2 8738 in.4
9-5
1.5(kip/ft) X 252 (ft2)
8
Thus, M, > M C, > cracked section and need to calculate I eff
3 3 3 3
1,2 I + 1 [,2 w l8432+ 1 w 8738210087 in.4
M, g M, 1406 1406
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deection
Case 1 from Fig. 913, the immediate dead load deection can be calculated as:
5 MP0522 5 1406X1000X(25X12)2
><
4T8 E1 T48 3.824X106X10087
Unfactored dead load moment: M DL 2 2117.2 kipsft21406 kipsin.
2 0.342 in.
in:
Unfactored dead plus live load moment:
3.0(kip/ft) X 252 (ft2)
2 f
3 3
I, 2 L86 18432+ 1 L86 8738:8907 in.4
2812 2812
So using again the deection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-pluslive-load deection
can be calculated as:
5 2812X1000X(25X12)2
A iD+L= X , 2 0.774 in.
48 3.824X10 X8907
D+L
X 14%] 2 2812 kips-in.
The deection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated
from Eq. (9-14):
A 2 AiL + 2(t,,eo)AiD + 2,,AiLS
The immediate dead load deection, Am, was found from part (a) to be 0.342 in.
However, after
the live load has been applied and the beam has cracked, the deection due to
dead load will be
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the 1, values used in part (a) and
(b). Thus the
immediate dead load deection on the structure which has been loaded to D+L will
be calculated
and used in Eq. (9-14).
A iD2 0.342 X @20387 in.
8907
The immediate live load deection, A72: is found as:
AIL 2 Ai,L+D AD 2 0.774 in. 0.387 in. 2 0.387 in.
Twenty percent of this results from sustained live loads, so:
AILS 2 0.20 X 0.387 in. 2 0.077 in.
9-6
River, NJ 07458.
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement, and with the partitions
installed 1 month after
removal of the shoring, f 2 0.7
2.00.7_13
1+0 T '
200100) 2
The deection occurring after the partitions are installed is found as:
A 2 0.387 + 1.3 * 0.387 + 2.0 * 0.077 2 1.04 in.
9-9 Repeat Problem 9-8 for the beam section in Fig. P9-6.
From question 9-6 we found:
1,, 2 22032in.4,
1,, 2 8405in.4,
c 2 4.85 in., and
MC, 2 697 kip-in.
1.5(kip/ft) X 252 (ft2)
8
Thus, M, > M C, > cracked section and need to calculate I eff
3
M, M, 3 697 3 697 3 I ,
[Eff = (Ma) lg + 1 (Ma) [CT = (m) 22032 + 1 () 8405 = 10065111.
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deection
Case 1 from Fig. 913, the immediate dead load deection can be calculated as:
. _ iMmeZ _ 31406 * (25 * 12)2
DT 48 E1 T 48 3824 * 10065
The unfactored dead load moment: M DL 2 2117.2 kipsft21406 kipsin.

= 0.342 in.

Unfactored dead plus live load moment:
3.0(kip/ft) X 252 (ft2)
2 f
D+L
X 12(3) 2 2812 kips-in.
ft
697 3 697 3 I 4
[eff = (m) 22032 + 1 (m) 8405 = 8615111.
So using the deection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-plus-live-load
deection can
be calculated as:
5 2812 * (25 * 12)2
A- 220.80'.
22+ 48 3824*8615 1
from Eq. (9-14):
A 2 AiL + 2(t,,eo)AiD + 2,,AiLS
The immediate dead load deection, Am, was found from part (a) to be 0.342 in.
However, after
dead load will be
9-7
River, NJ 07458.
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the 1, values used in part (a) and
(b). Thus the
be calculated
The immediate live load deection, A72: is found as:

A12 ALL) Am: 0.80 in. 0.40 in. 2 0.40 in.
Twenty percent of this results from sustained live loads, so:

A152 0.2 * 0.40 2 0.08 in.
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement, and with the partitions
installed 1 month after
removal of the shoring, f 2 0.7
2.0 0.7 _
200,0) 2 1 + 0 _ 1.3
A 2 0.40 + 1.3 * 0.40 + 2.0 * 0.08 2 1.08 in.
9-10 The beam shown in Fig. P9-10 is made of 4000-psi concrete and supports
unfactored
dead and live loads of 1 kip/ft and 1.1 kips/ft. Compute:
(a) the immediate dead-load deflection.
Compute Ig for the T-section (ignore the effect of the reinforcement for
simplicity):
Assume ange width 2 effective ange width from ACI Code Section 8.12.2. 2 72
in.
E 29 X 106 psi
S
T E, T 5700044000 psi T '
Part Area, in.2 ytop 9 in. Aytop [own ill-4 A22 411-4
Web 240 10 2400 8000 4234
Flanges 360 3 1080 1080 2822
A2600 Ay=3480 I, = 16136 in.4
7,0, 2 364030) 2 5.8 in. 7,7,," 214.2 in.
Compute ICT at the left end:
The positive-moment reinforcement is not developed for compression at the
support and will
therefore be neglected. The section is a rectangular section, with 3 No. 7
bars ,6! 217.5 in.,and
the following properties:
A, 21.80 in.2, nA, 214.47 in.2
_ 1.80
p T 12X17.5
Using Eq. (93); k 2 2pm + (pn)2 pn 2 0.309 and c 2 kd 2 5.41 in.
2 0.0086, np 2 0.069
9-8

River, NJ 07458.
Part Area, in.2 y in. I own A22 ll-4

compress 64.9 2.71 158 477
ZOHC
nAS 14.47 (5.4117.5)212.1 _ 2119
Ior 2 2754 in.4
Compute ICT at the right end:
A, 2 3.16 in.2, n4, 2 25.41 in.2
3.16
220.0150,n 20.121
p l2><l7.5 p
Using Eq. (93); k 2 2pm + (pn)2 pn 2 0.386 and c 2 kd 2 6.75 in.
Part Area, in.2 y in. I own A22 ll-4

Compress1on 81 337 3075 920
ZOHC
nAS 25.41 (6.75 17.5) 2 10.75 _ 2936
Icr 2 4163 in.4
Compute ICT at the midspan:
A, 22.18 in.2, nAS 217.53 in.2
Assuming that c is less than 6 in.
Part Area, in.2 Y , in- A? ,in.3

Compression 2
zone 726 c/ 2 36c
nAS 17.53 (c17.5) 17.53c307
ZAy 2 36c2 +17.53c 307 2 0 and c 2 2.7 in.
Part Area, in.2 y , in. [own A? ,in.4

compress 194 1.35 118 354
ZOHC
nAS 17.53 (2.7 17.5) 2 14.8 _ 3840
Icr 2 4312 in.4
The moment at the end and the midspan can be calculated using the ACI Moment
Coefficients
9-9
Unfactored dead load moments
,2
Negative moment at left end 2 :6 2 % x1x(22.67)2 2 32.1 kips-ft
. . . w2 1 2 .
Pos1t1ve moment at midspan 2 14 2 a x1x(22.67) 2 36.7 kips-ft
. . wz 1 2 .
Negative moment at r1ght end 2 10 2 E ><1>< (22.67) 2 51.4 kips-ft
Cracking moments
f, 2 7.5,)4000 psi 2 474 psi
Ends: MN 2 M 2110 kips-ft
5.8 X 12,000
Midspan: MN 2 M 2 45 kips-ft
14.2 X 12, 000
Compute the average effective moment of inertia
for both ends and the midspan, Ma <M and thus the sections are uncracked under
dead loads
and 19],. 218 216136 in.4
Compute immediate dead-load deection

This is an exterior beam span with a column as the exterior support. Therefore,
the deection can
be calculated using row 3 of Table 9-2, which requires a combination of Cases 2
and 8 from Fig.
9-13.
W34 (1x100%2)x(24xl2)4
185EI _185x(3.6x106)x16136
For deection Case 2: A 2
20.0533 in. (down)

M72 _ (32.l><l2000)><(24><l2)2
16E] 16x (3.6 x106)>< 16136
Thus, A, 2 0.0533 0.0343 2 0.019 in.
For deection Case 8: A 2 2 0.0343 in. (up)

Unfactored dead plus live-load moments
,2
Negative moment at left end 2 1: 2 % x (1 +1.1) x (22.67)2 2 67.4 kips-ft
,2
Positive moment at midspan 2 ii 2 i X (1 +1.1) x (22.67)2 2 77.1 kips-ft
[,2
Negative moment at right end 2 v:+:)" 2 % x (1 +1.1) x (22.67)2 2 107.9 kipsft
Compute the average effective moment of inertia
left end: Ma <MC, 2>Ie 2 18 216136 in.4
45 3 45 3
midspan: Ma>MN2>Ie2 16136+ 1 431226663in.4
77.1 77.1
9-10
right end: Ma <MC, 2>Ie 218 216136 in.4
Thus, the weighted average value of [W using Eq. (9-11a) is:
1 2 0.70 X 6663 + 0.30 X16136 2 9505 in.4
e(avg)
Immediate plus live-load deection
Using the same procedure as in part (a),
1000 4
174 2.1 X X 24 X 12
for deection Case 2: A 2 W" - ( XZ) ( ) 20.190 in. (down)
185EI _ 185x(3.6><106 x9505
M62 _ (67.4x12000)x(24 X 12)2

16E] l6x(3.6x106)x9505
Thus, AM 2 0.190 0.122 2 0.068 in.
for deection Case 8: A 2
2 0.122 in. (up)

partitions are installed two months after the shoring is removed and
assumed that 15 percent of the live load is sustained.
from Eq. (9-14):
A 2 Al + 2(r0,oo)AiD + 2,2,5
The immediate dead load deection, AiD, was found from part (a) to be 0.019 in.
However, after
dead load will be
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the 18 values used in part (a) and
(b). Thus the
be calculated
A iD2 0.019 X 20.032 in.
9505
The immediate live load deection, All, is found as:
AiL 2 Ai,L+D Am 2 0.068 in. 0.032 in. 2 0.036 in.
Fifteen percent of this results from sustained live loads, so:
A1152 0.15 * 0.036 2 0.005 in.
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement at midspan, and with the
panitions installed 2
months after removal of the shoring, f 2 0.9
2.0 0.9
200,00) 2 1 + 0 2 1.1
A 2 0.036 + 1.1 * 0.032 + 2.0 * 0.005 2 0.081 in.
9-11
Chapter 10
10-1 A ve-span one-way slab is supported on 12-in.-wide beam with center-tocenter
spacing of 16 ft. The slab carries a superimposed dead load of 10 psf and a live
load
of 60 psf. Using f c 2 4000 psi and f y 2 60 ksi, design the slab. Draw a cross
section showing the reinforcement. Use Fig. A-S to locate the bar cut-off
points.
slab design strip
1620 J 1620 3 1620 J 1620 1 1620

P'
[2162JQin- n1=151222
6
Estimate slab thickness
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deections. Will require recheck if

sensitivity is
established later.
Table A-9:
. - _fn _15xl2 _ End bay. Min h 4 A4 7.50 in.
~ . ~ _n _15x12 _ ~
Interior bay. Min h 8 AS 6.43 in.
Note that slab thickness was chosen on the basis of deection control, since
exure and shear
probably wont govern the design (this will be checked later).
Try h 2 7.0 in. (this may need to be checked for deections in the end span).
Assuming a cover of 0.75 in. and N o. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
d270(075+0)260ip
Compute factored loads
Considering a 1-ft wide strip of slab:
7.
Slab self weight: W05 2 120 X 150 2 87.5 psf
Superimposed dead load: Wm 210 psf
Total dead load: wD 2 87.5 +10 2 97.5 psf
10-1
Live load: wL 2 60 psf
Factored load: WL 2 1.2 * 97.5 + 1.6 * 60 2 213 psf
Load per foot along design strip 2 213 psf
wL < 3WD , so we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the
positive and the
negative moments.
Thickness for exure

The maximum value for M u is at the first interior support since [n 2 15 ft.
throughout. Using the
appropriate moment coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
wutfl 0.213 * (15)2 .
Mu 2 10 2 T 2 4.8 klp-ft/ft
For a reinforcing ratio of p 2 0.01, which is a reasonable upper limit for a
slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-21),
_ 0.01X 60000
4000
From Eq. (5-22) calculate the exural resistance factor, R.
R 2 0.15 X 4000 X (1 0.59 X 0.15) 2 547 psi
20.15
Using this value of R, the required value of bd2 can be determined using Eq. (523a), assuming
that 2 0.9 (will check it later).
but2 > 4'8 12000 117 in 3
0.9 * 547 _ '
117
Forb 2 12 in., d 2 (E 2 3.12 in.
Therefore, the minimum d to keep p<0.01 is d 2 3.12 in. Actual d 26 in. ..p
will be less
than 0.01 (OK. for exure).
Thickness for shear
The max shear Vu is at the exterior face of the first interior support. Using
the appropriate shear
coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
{ 15
Vu 2 1.15%? 2 1.15 * 213 *7 2 1837 lbs/ft
(pl/C 2 0.75(2\/bwd) 2 0.75(274000 * 12 * 6) 2 6830 lbs/ft OK
So, use a 7 in. slab.
F lexural reinforcement
Max M M2 4.8 kips-ft/ft
Assuming that [d % 2 0.95d] and 85 2 8y , find the required reinforcement for a
1-ft wide strip
of slab.
Mu * 12000 4.8 * 12000
2 2 2 0.19 in.2/ft
s a
$13 (d _ 7) 0.9 * 60000(0.95 * 6)
10-2
River, NJ 07458.
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the
value of the required
reinforcement:
A 0.19 60000
a 2sfy,2*2 0.28in.
085be 0.85 * 4000 * 12
_ 0.28 0 33
C 0.85 . 1n
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3/8 of d, the section is
tension controlled
($.83 28y, 20.9).
The minimum reinforcement required by ACI Code Section 10.5.4, is
As,n1in 2 0.0018bh 2 0.0018 X 12 X 7 2 0.15 in.2/ft
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
311 2 21 in.
S :
max 18 in
Select No. 4 bars at 12 in.
As/ _ 0.2 in.2
ft T 12 in.
12 in/ft 2 0.2 in.2

Temperature and shrinkage steel as required by ACI Code Section 7.12.2,
5h 2 35 in}
A, m 2 0.0018bh 2 0.15 in.2/ft and SW 2 .
18 in
. . AS _0.2in.2 m _ . 2
Soprov1deNo.4barsat161n. > 16in. X(l2 /)0.151n.
The exural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is
calculated in the
following table.
10-3
Calculation of reinforcement required in the slab.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
l6
8.
6,,(ft.) 15.0 15.0

wut 2 47.9 47.9 47.9 47.9 47.9 47.9
Moment Coef. 1/24 1/14 1/10 1/11 1/16 1/11 1/16
M, (ldpsft/ft) 2.0 3.4 4.8 4.4 3.0 4.4 3.0
A, reqd. (in.2/ft) 0.08 0.13 0.19 0.12 0.17 0.12
Ami (in.2/ft) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
Reinforcement #4 .@ #4 .@ #4 .@ #4 .@ #4 .@ #4 .@
1n. l6 1n. l2 1n. l6 1n. l2 1n. l6 1n.
AS pmVided(m'2/) 0.15 0.15 0.2 0.15 0.2 0.15
Fig. S10-1.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The
bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
#4 @ 12
gigb 47,67, F47767g 4,76,, $4776
#4 a 16
>4
#4 0 , U #4 a , U Temp Steel
6(2112 5 12 #4 a 16
Fig. S10-1.1 Slab reinforcement detailing.
10-4
10-2 A four-span one-way slab is supported on 12-in.-wide beams with center-tocenter
spacing of 14, 16, 16, and 14 ft. The slab carries a superimposed dead load of
20 psf
and a live load of 100 psf. Design the slab, using f c 2 3500 psi and fy 2
60, 000 psi. Select bar cut-off points using Fig. A-5 and draw a cross-section
showing the reinforcement.
slab design strip
/
1420 4 1620 * 1620 J 1420

Plan
211ft
Long span clear length: [n 2 l6 ft.IZi/ ~ 215 ft.

1
(13 ft.+15 y _
2 _14.
Short span clear length: En 2 14 ft. 1217 . 2 13 ft.
1
Average clear span length for first interior support: (7
mat/g :
Estimate slab thickness
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deections. Will require recheck if
sensitivity is established
later.
Table A-9:
. - J), _13x12 _ Endbay.M1nh 44 246.501n.
~ . - J}, _15x12 _ Interior bay. Min h 8 AS 6.43 in.
Note that slab thickness is chosen on basis of deection control, since exure
and shear probably
wont govern the design (will be checked later).
Try h 2 6.5 in.
Assuming a cover of 0.75 in. and No. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
_ _ 0.5 _ '
d6.5 (0.75+ A)5.51n.
10-5
Compute factored loads
Considering a 1-ft wide strip of slab:
Slab self weight: WDS 2 g X 150 2 81.25 psf
Superimposed dead load: le. 2 20 psf
Total dead load: wD 2 81.25 + 20 2101.25 psf
Live load: wL 2 100 psf
Factored load: Wu 2 1.2 * 101.25 + 1.6 * 100 2 282 psf
Load per foot along design strip 2 282 psf
wL < 3WD so we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the
positive and the
negative moments (ACI Code Section 8.3.3).
Thickness for exure
The maximum moment will occur at either:
(1) exterior face of the first interior support, or
(2) face of the middle support
For negative moments at the face of an interior support, ACI Code Section 8.0
defines U" as the
average of the clear spans of the two adjacent spans. Using the appropriate
moment coefficient
from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
wuffl 0.282 * (14)2
Mm 2 102 _ 10 2 2 5.5 klp-ft/ft

_ wufn _ 0.282 * (15) _ .
Mu,2 11 11 5.8 klp-ft/ft
For a reinforcing ratio of p 2 0.01, which is a reasonable upper limit for a
slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-21),
_ 0.01 X 60000
3500
R 20.171x3500x (10.59x0.171) 2538 psi
20.171
Using this value of R, the required value of bd2 can be determined using Eq. (523a), assuming
but2 > 5'8 12000 144' 3
0.9 * 538 T m'
144
Forb 2 12 in., d 2 2 3.5in.
x] 12
i.e., min d to keep p<0.01 is d 2 3.5 in. Actual d 25.5 in. ..p will be less
than 0.01 (OK. for
exure).
Thickness for shear
The max shear Vu will occur in one of the two locations discussed for the
maximum moments.
Using the appropriate shear coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
10-6
River, NJ 07458.
7,, 13 .
Vu1 2 1.15wu7 2 1.15 * .2827 2 2.1 klp/ft
7,, 15 .
Vu2 2 1.0%? 2 1.0 * .2827 2 2.1 klp/ft

pv, 2 0.75( 1177,01): 0.75(2x ,l3500 x12x 5.5) 2 58601bs/ft ok for shear
F lexural reinforcement
Max M, 2 5.8 kip-ft/ft
Assuming that [d g 2 0.95d] and 85 2 8y , find the required reinforcement for
a 1-ft wide strip
of slab.
Mu * 12000 5.8 * 12000
S x a Z
(Pfy (d _ 7) 0.9 * 60000(0.95 * 5.5)
2 0.25 in.2/ft
reinforcement:
A 0.25 60000
a 2sfy2*2 0.42in.
0.85fcb 0.85 * 3500 * 12
_ 0.42 _ 0 49 .
C 0.85 . 1n.
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3/8 of d, the section is
tension controlled
($.83 28y, 20.9).
The minimum reinforcement required by ACI Code Section 10.5.4, is
As,n1in 2 0.0018bh 2 0.0018 X 12 X 6.5 2 0.14 in.2/ft
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
314 219.5 in.
s :
max 18 in
Select No. 4 bars at 9 in.
A _ 0.2 in.2 in. _ . 2

s/ft 9 in. 12 /ft 0.271n.
Temperature and shrinkage steel as required by ACI Code Section 7.12.2,
- 2 5h 2 32.5 in.
ALmin 20.0018bh 20.14 in. /ft and smax 2 18 .
1n
. . AS _0.2in.2 m _ . 2
Soprov1deNo.4barsat161n. > 16in. X(l2 /)0.151n.
The exural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is
calculated in the
following table.
10-7
Calculation of reinforcement required in the slab.
Ll l_l l_l
l
1. A, 13.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 15.0 15.0

2. w,,(r,,2(kipsft) 47.7 47.7 55.3 63.5 63.5 63.5
3. Moment Coef. 1/24 1/14 1/10 1/11 1/16 1/11 1/16
4. M, (kipsft/ft) 2.0 3.4 5.5 5.0 4.0 5.8 4.0
5. A, reqd. (in.2/ft) 0.09 0.14 0.23 0.17 0.25 0.17
6. Am (in.2/ft) 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14
7 Reinforcement #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @
T 16 in. 16 in. 9 in. 11 in. 9 in. 11 in.
8. A, provided(in.2/ft) 0.15 0.15 0.27 0.18 0.27 0.18
Fig. S10-2.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The
bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
#4 @ 9
213/24% 2520/2 2520/21 254202 125/2021
#4 @ 16
A . . .
#4 Q 151 U #4 @ 111 U Temp. 545994
677%? #4 @ 16
Fig. S10-2.1 Slab reinforcement detailing.
10-8
River, NJ 07458.
10-3 A three span continuous beam supports 6-in.-thick one-way slabs that span
20 ft
center-to-center of beams. The beams have clear spans, face-to-face of 16-in.square
columns, of 27, 30, and 27 ft. The floor supports ceiling, ductwork, and
lighting
xtures weighing a total of 8 psf, ceramic floor tile weighting 16 psf,
partitions
equivalent to a uniform deal load of 20 psf, and a live load of 100 psf. Design
the
beam, using f 'c 2 4500 psi. Use fy 2 60000 psi for exural reinforcement and
fyt 2 40000 psi for shear reinforcement. Calculate cut-off points, extending all
reinforcement past points of inflection. Draw an elevation View of the beam and
enough cross-sections to summarize the design.
T B C 7
(2I:::::::::::I:::::::::::I::::::::::j
i? 651le
L0
LI::::::::::I:::::::::::I::::::::::]
7 \16X16typicol 7
1 8720 1 313/20 (1 L7/TUH
1. Compute the trial factored load on the beam
(a) Dead load
6 in.
1211ny
ceiling, tile, panitions: 8 psf +16 psf + 20 psf 2 44 psf
slab self-weight: 150 pcf ><
2 75 psf
The beam size is not known at this stage, so it must be estimated for
preliminary design purposes.
Once the size of the beam has been established, the factored load will be
corrected and then used
in subsequent calculations. The beam size will be estimated in step 2.
(b) Live Load
The ASCE/SEI 7-10 recommendations allow live-load reductions based on tributary
area
multiplied by a live-load element factor, K LL 2 2, to convert the tributary
area to an inuence
area.
0 Positive moment at span AB and negative moment at exterior support, A.
A, 215 ft.X 27 ft. 2405 ft.2
15
\/2 X 405
L 2 La [0.25 +15\]2100X(0.25 + )2100X 0.777 2 77.7 psf> 0.5 X 100 psf
LL T
10-9
Note that L shall not be less than 0.50L0 for members supporting one oor (OK)
0 Negative moment at interior support, B.
A, 215 ft. x (27 + 30) ft. 2 855 ft.2
0 L2 L0[0.25+15] 2100X(0.25 + )2100X0.613 261.3 psf> 0.5 X100 psf (O.K.)
LL T
15
)2 X 855
Positive moment at span BC.
A, 215 ft.X 30 ft. 2450 ft.2
L 2 La [0.25 + 15] 2100X(0.25 + 2100 X 0.75 2 75.0 psf > 0.5 X 100 psf (O.K.)
LL T
15
J2 x 450]
The size of the beam will be chosen on the basis of negative moment at the first
interior support.
For this location, the factored load on the beam, not including the beam stem
below the slab, is:
w 21.2X (75+44)+1.6X61.3 2241 psf
The tributary width for the beam is 15 ft and the factored load from the slab
per foot of beam is
241psf x 15 ft. 2 3,6151byft 2 3.618108 ft
Two approximate methods can be used to estimate the weight of the beam stem:
(a) the factored dead load of the stem is taken as 12 to 20 percent of the other
factored loads
on the beam. This gives 0.43 to 0.72 kip/ft.
(b) the overall depth of beam h is taken to be 1/ 18 to 1/ 12 of the larger
span, f , and bW is
taken to be 0.5h. This gives the overall 11 as 20 to 30 in., with the stem
extending 14 to 24 in.
below the slab, and gives bW as 10 to 15 in. The factored load of such sizes
ranges from 0.17 to
0.45 kip/ft.
As a first trial, assume the factored weight of the stem to be 0.50 kip/ft.
Then, total trial load per
foot 2 3.6 + 0.5 2 4.1kip/ft
2. Estimate the size of the beam stem
(a) Calculate the minimum depth based on deections.
ACI Table 9.5(a) (Table A-9) gives the minimum depths, unless deections are
checked. For
partitions exible enough to undergo some deection, minimum depth for beam BC
is
16 in.
121%
2 28.3 ft
(
2 E, where 6 2 the span center-to-center of supports 2 27 ft +
min
Thus, h :28.3X12
mm 2184 in.
18.5
10-10
(b) Determine the minimum depth based on the negative moment at the exterior
face of the
first interior support.
The beam fits the requirements in ACI Code Section 8.3.3 and can use the moment
and shear
coefficients. For the support at B,
M, 2 Wm 2 4.1X(28.5)2
10 10
where (n 2 w 2 28.5 ft (the average of the two adjacent spans).
2 333 kips-ft
Using the procedure developed in Chapter 5 for the design of singly reinforced
beam sections, the
reinforcement ratio that will result in a tension-controlled section can be
estimated from
Eq. (5-18) as,
,6_1f _0.825 x 4.5
initial 2 0.0155
p( )Z 4 fy 4 X 60
For this reinforcement ratio, use Eq. (5-21), to find the reinforcing index,
2 0.0155X 60 2 0.207
4.5
R 2 0.207 X 4500 X (1 0.59 X 0.207) 2 818 psi
Using this value of R, the required value of be!2 can be determined using Eq.
(5-23a), assuming
19612 > 333
T 0.9 x 818
Since columns are 16 in., try a 14 or 16 in. wide stem. Lets try I; 214 in.
Then,d2 11511428: 197i .>d221.5in.
With one layer of steel at supports, 17 E 21.5 + 2.5 2 24 in. (OK. for
deections).
So, try a 14-in. wide-by-24-in. beam.
x 12, 000 2 5430 in.3
(c) Check the shear capacity of the beam

Maximum shear is at the exterior face at support B,
. E . .
115qu n :115X41X27 263.6kips
u,max :
2
From ACI Code Section 11.2.1.1,
V, 2 22$de 2 2x1x ,/4500 x14x 21.5 x (%000) 2 40.4 kips
ACI Code Section 11 .4. 7. 9 sets the maximum nominal V, is
V 28\/Zbd2 8X 4500X14X21.5X(%000)2162kips
Thus, Vn 2 0.75 X (40.4 +161) 2151 kips (OK. for shear)
10-11
(d) Summary
[7 214 in.
Use : h 2 24 in. (18 in. below slab)
d 2 21.5 in.,assuming one layer of steel
3. Compute the dead load of the stem, and recompute the total load per foot.
Weight per foot of the stem below slab 2 0.15 X % 2 0.26 kip/ft
Corrected total factored load for 1St internal support moment: 2 3.6 +1.2 X
(0.26) 2 3.9 kip/ft
Since this is less that the 4.1 kip/ft used earlier to estimate the beam size,
the section chosen will
be adequate.
Factored Total dead load:
w, 21.2 x (119 x 15 x X000 + 0.26) 2 2.5 kips/ft
Factored total loads:
(a) Positive moment at span AB and negative moment at exterior support, A.
w, 2 2.5 +1.6X (77.7 x 15 x %000) 2 4.4 kips/ft
(b) Negative moment at interior support, B.
w, 2 2.5 +1.6X (61.3 X 15 X X000) 2 4.0 kips/ft
(c) Positive moment at span BC.
w, 2 2.5 +1.6X (75.0x 15 x %000) 2 4.3 kips/ft
4. Calculate the beam ange width for positive-moment regions
From ACI Code Section 8.12.2,
0.25.6 (based on the shorter span for simplicity) 2 0.25 X (27 X 12) in. 2 81
in.
be: bw+2(8X6)214+2(8X6)2110in.
(15x12) 2180 in.
Therefore, the effective ange width is 81 in. and shown in Fig. S10-3.1
181-1
26% {Tl} 2315
Fig. S10-3.1 Beam cross-section
10-12
5. Can we use the ACI Code Moment Coefficients?
Ratio of successive spans 2 30 ft./27 ft. 2 1.11<1.20 O.K.;
Live load/ft _ 0.1X 15
Dead load/ft T 2.5
There are more than two spans:
The loads are uniformly distributed.
2 0.6 < 3.0 O.K.;

Thus, we can use the ACI Code Moment Coefficients
6. Compute the beam moments
h n
5, ft. 27.0 27.0 28.5 30.0

W, kip/ft. 4.4 4.4 4.0 4.3
w.i,kips-ft 3210 3210 3250 3870
_ _ _ 1
Cm X6 X4 X0 and X1 46
M, 2 meui,kips-ft _200 230 _325 242
7. Design the exural reinforcement
(a) Max negative moment (first interior support)
Max M T 2 325 kipsft
mmax
Because the beam acts as a rectangular beam with compression in the web, we can
assume that
[d % 2 0.9001] .For 8, 2 8y and 20.9, the required reinforcement for that
section is,
M X12,000 _ 325X12,000
a 0.90><60,000>< 0.90X21.5
2f, (d 5) ( )
A, 2 2 3.73 in.2
A.f, _ 3.73x 60000
. 2 5.07 in.
0.85ftb 0.85 X 4500X l4
reinforcement: 61 2 2 4.18 in., c 2 4-18
0.825
10-13
River, NJ 07458.
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3/8 ofd, clearly the
section is tension
controlled (.. SS 2 gy, 2 0.9) , and
325 X 12,000
A m, 2 2 3.72 in.2
3
0.90 X 60,000 X (21.5 %)
The other negative moment sections have a lower design moment, so it will be
conservative to
use the ratio of % obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel
required at
those other locations. That ratio is
A . .2
S 2 & 2 0.0114 (in.2/kips-ft) (eq. A)
M M 325 kips-ft
(b) Max positive moment

Max M T 2 242 kipsft
mmax
Because the beam acts as a T-shape beam with compression in the top ange,
assume that the
. . . . a
compress1on zone is rectangular, Le. a < hf 2 6 1n., use [d 3 2 0.9501] .For SS
2 8y and 20.9,
the required reinforcement that section is,
M x12,000 242x12,000 . 2
S 2 2 2 2.63 in.
a 0.90x 60,000 x (0.95x 21.5)
2f, d - 5
reinforcement:
_ A.f, _ 2.63X60000
a , 2O.51in.,c20-51
0.85102, 0.85 x 4500X 81
0.825 2 0.62 in.
The section is tension controlled (..SS 28y,=0.9), and doing one iteration for
the negative
moment section results in AS 2 2.53 in.2
The other positive moment section has a lower design moment, so it will be
conservative to use
the ratio of % obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel
required at those
other locations. That ratio is
A . .2
_. 2 A 2 0.0104 (in.2/kips-ft) (eq. B)
M M 242 kips-ft
10-14
River, NJ 07458.
(c) Calculate the minimum reinforcement
S mm
3
From ACI Code Section 10.5.1, A 214?de and 2 200% d
y fy
For 4500 psi concrete, 3J2 2 201 psi, thus
_ 3s/4500
m T 60,000
14x21.521.0 in.2
(d) Calculate the area of steel and select the bars.
The remaining calculations are done in the following table.
U
MM,kips-ft _200 230 _325 242
A3 coef. Eq. A and B 0.0114 0.0104 0.0114 0.0104
A502,) ,in.2 2.28 2.39 3.70 2.52
AS > As,min Yes Yes Yes Yes
Bars selected 4 No. 7 4 N o. 7 2 1:1,: 2nd 3 l:r;gnd
A, provided, in.2 2.40 2.40 3.98 2.68
bw(214 in.) > 17min Yes Yes
Note that in the negative moment regions some of the bars can be placed in the
slab besides the
beam and it is not necessary to check whether they will fit into the web width.
8. Check the distribution of the reinforcement
(a) Positive moment region
From ACI Code Section 10.6.4, the maximum bar spacing is
s 215(40000] 2.5cc 212(40000], where
S
S
f: 2 %fy 240,000 psi and c, 21.5 in. cover +0.375 in. stirrups 21.875 in.
Thus, 5 215 2.5 X 1.875 210.3 in. S 12 in.
10-15
14 [2x (1.5 +0375) +%]
3
Bar spacing 2 2 3.1 in. <10.3 in. OK.
It was also clear that the bar spacing is smaller than 10.3 in., since there are
four bars and
bw 214 in.
(b) Negative moment region
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 says part of the negative moment steel shall be
distributed over a
width equal to the smaller of the effective ange width (81 in.) and E n / 10 2
34.2 in. At the
interior supports, there are 6 top bars. Place the two No. 8 bars at the corners
of the stirrups, two
No. 7 bars over the beam web, and the other two N o. 7 bars in the slab. Within
a width of 34.2
in. we must place six bars. These cannot be further apart than 10.3 in. (as
calculated in part a).
We shall arbitrarily place two bars at 5 in. outside the web of the beam.
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 requires some longitudinal reinforcement in the slab
outside this
band. We shall assume that the shrinkage and temperature steel in the slab will
satisfy this
requirement.
9. Design the shear reinforcement

The shear force diagrams are calculated in the following table and shown at the
bottom of the
table. The shear coefficients for the supports are from ACI Code Section 8.3.3
and the coefficient
fro the midspan of the beam is based on Eq. (6-26).
D U U
B C
A
Two 27 30
kaips/ft 4.4 4.3
wLu,kips/ft 1.9 1.8
CV at uppm and 1.0 0.125 1.15 1.0 0.125 1.0
mldpsan
wur,/2 59.4 59.4 64.5 64.5
when 51.3 54
V, kips 59.4 6.4 68.3 64.5 6.7 64.5
V, 2V,/ 79.2 8.5 91.1 86.0 8.9 86.0
79.8 86.0
% 85 % 89
8 5 8 9
91.1 86.0
10-16
(a) Exterior end of beam AB
Because the beam is supported by a column, the critical section is located at d
away from the face
of the support.
Equation for Vu/: VM/ (kips) 2 5.24x(ft) + 79.2
21.5 in.
2 1%
V, 2 2x1x ,/4500 x14x 21.5 x 01000) 240.4 kips, % 2 20.2 kips
V,/(@d from A) 2 5.24x
+ 79.2 2 69.8 kips

V
Because 32 69.8 kips exceeds j 2 20.2 kips, stirrups are required.
Try No. 3 Grade 40 stirrups double-leg stirrups with a 900 hook (4 2 2X 0.112
0.22 in.2)
V .
0 Max spacing: j VC S 4bwd and from ACI Code Section 11.4.5 .1,
1 210.75 in. ,
s S 2 >10.75 1n.
24 in.
0 To satisfy the minimum stirrup requirement in ACI Code Section 11.4.6.3, the
stirrup spacing
must be,
S < 48f, _ 0.22 x 40,000 _
m SObW 50x 14
Note that 0.7544500 2 50.3 psi > 50 psi, so use 50 psi in ACI Code Eq. (11-13) .
12.6 in
Thus, use 10.5 in. as maximum stirrup spacing.
o The spacing required to support the shear force at the support is,
(0.22x40)x21.5 . .
s 2 2 6.45 1n.-say 6 in. on centers
69.8 40.4
We can change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when 2 W +404 2 58.4 kips
g0 .
This occurs at about 4 ft from face of support A.

We can stop the stirrups when 2 % :> x 2 11.3 ft from face of support A.
g0
Place the first stirrup at 3 in. from support A, then 9 stirrups at 6 in. and 9
stirrups at 10.5 in.
10-17
(b) Interior end of beam AB
Equation for V, / : V,/(1dps) 2 6.12x(ft) + 91.1
21.5 in.
in.
2 /n
The spacing required to at this point is,
(0.22 x 40) x 21.5
s 2
80.1 40.4
V,/(@d from B) 2 6.12X
V
+91.12 80.1 kips > 35,stirrups required
2 4.8 in.-say 4.5 in. on centers
Change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when 2 58.4 kips .
(0
This occurs at 5 .3 ft from face of support B.
We can stop the stirrups at 11.6 ft from face of support B.
Place the first stirrup at 2 in. from support B, then 15 stirrups at 4.5 in. and
9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
(c) Ends of beam BC
Equation for V, / : V, /(1dps) 2 5.14x(ft) + 86.0
21.5 in.
in.
2 4
The spacing required to at this point is,
_ (0.22 x 40) x 21.5
T 76.8 40.4
V,/(@ d from C) 2 5.14 X + 86 2 76.8 kips > %,stirrups required

s 2 5.2 in.-say 5.0 in. on centers
Change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when 2 58.4 kips .
(0
This occurs at 5 .4 ft from face of support.
We can stop the stirrups at 12.8 ft from face of support.

Place the first stirrup at 2.5 in. from support B, then 14 stirrups at 4.5 in.
and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
10. Bar cutoffs
d 2 21.5 in.
(a) Detailing requirements: 120], 212 in. for No. 8 bar
(
16 2 20.25 in. for 27 ft span, 22.5 in. for 30 ft span
6 6
Thus, d exceeds 12d, and i for AB span, while i governs for span BC.
The bottom and top bars have clear spacing and cover of at least d, and are
enclosed by at least
minimum stirrups. Therefore, this is Case 1 in Table 8-1 (ACI Code Section
12.2.2).
10-18
f 6 1 1 d 33.5 in. for No. 6
We d, 2 wow OX OX 1 244.7d, > 39.1 in. for No. 7
d _ t
2044/; 20 4500 44.7 in. for N0. 8
(b) Cutoffs for bottom steel
2
SM
4 N o. 7-Extend 2 full length into each support, cutoff the other two at the
positive moment point
of inection so that extra stirrups are not required.
Exterior end: From Fig. A-2, inection point at (0.10 X 27 X 12) 2 32.4 in. from
face of column.
Rule
in 2
face
Rule
3-a - Extend d 2 21.5 in. past the exural cutoff point, i.e. 32.4 in.-21.5
10.9 in. from
of column at A. Say 10 in.
4-a - Distance from midspan to cutoff point greater than 2 .
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Since this is a
discontinuous end use 90
deg. standard hooks on 2 No. 7 bars.
Rule 4-d At the inection point, the remaining steel is two N o. 7, AS 21.2
in.2 Thus,
a 2 2 1.57 in.
0.85 X 4.5 X 12
M, 2 1.2 X 60 X [21.5 %] 21490 kipin2124 kipft
The shear at 32.4 in. from the exterior end is,
V, 2 5.24 X [%j + 79.2 2 65 kips

("a 2 21.5 in.
Thus, M +6 2@+21.5 244.4 in.
V 65
a
M
This exceeds E, - therefore, OK.
Interior end: From Fig. A-2, inection point at (0.104X 27 X 12) 2 33.7 in. from
face of column
Rule 3-a - Extend bars to 33.7 in.- 21.5 in. 2 12.2 in. from face of column. Use
10 in. to match
other end.
Rule 4-a - Satisfied
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Rule 1-b applies. Lap
splice 2#7 bars from
the exterior span with 2 No. 7 bars from the interior span with a Class A
tension lap splice
21.0X39.1in.23 ft - 2 in.
Rule 4-d
M, 2 1490 kip-in2124 kip-ft
V, 26.12X[332'7]+91.1273.9 kips
6, 221.5 in.
M 1490
a
Thus, "+2 2+21.5241.7in.
V, 7 9
This exceeds 6, - therefore, OK.
10-19
Span BC
2 No. 8 and 3 No. 7 at midspan Extend 2 No. 7 into supports. Cutoff 2 No. 8
and 1 No. 7 bars at
the positive moment point of inection so that extra stirrups are not required.
Inection point at
(0.146 X 30X 12) 2 52.6 in. from face of column
Rule 3-a - Extend i 2 22.5 in. past the exural cutoff point, i.e. 52.6 in.-22.5
in. 2 30.1 in.
from face of column. Say 30 in.

Rule 4-a - Satisfied.
Rule 1-b Lap splice 2#7 bars 3 ft - 2 in at support
Rule 4-d
M, 2 2650 kip-in2221 kip-ft
V, 2 5.14X [%) +86 2 63.5 kips
6, 2 21.5 in.
Thus, M" +2 2+2152633in
V, 635
a
This exceeds 6, - therefore, OK.
Cutoffs for top steel
Span AB, exterior end, 4 N o. 7
Use standard hook, 6d, 2 W X (0.75) 213.4 in.
1.0X \14500
Set tail cover 2 2 in., then 6,, 2 0.7 X 13.4 29.4 in. . This is OK in a 16 in.
column.
Negative moment point of inection at (0.164 X 27 X 12) 2 53.1 in.
Rule 3-b - Extend d to 53.1+21.5 2 74.6 in. Cutoff at 75 in. 2 6 ft-3 in. from
face of column.
Rule 4-b - Since 75 in. > 39.1 in. Rule 2 is satisfied.
Span AB, interior end, 2 No. 8 and 4 No. 7 bars
Point of inection at (0.24 x 27 x 12) 2 77.8 in.
Rule 3-b - Extend d to 77.8+21.5 2 99.3 in. Say 8 ft.-4 in. from face of column
Rule 4-b Since 100 in. > 44.7 in. Rule 2 is satisfied.
Span BC, 2 No.8 and 4 No.7 bars
Negative moment point of inection at (0.24 X 30 X 12) 2 86.4 in.
Rule 3-b Extend to 108.9 in. Say 9 ft- 1 in, from face of column
Rule 4-b OK
Since all cutoffs are past points of inection, they are not in zones of exural
tension, therefore
extra stirrups are not needed.
Provide 2 N o. 4 top bars as stirrup support, lab splice with negative moment
steel.
10-20

River, NJ 07458.
1 8/c4 l
97,177 _
226/23"
E#4
4#7 E#8+4#7
E#7 / 3#7
-30 /2
2 +10 10) 2
8#7 2#6
1 E 3
4 #7 loops 2 #4 loops 2 #8
0 Q Q Q Q Q
22 4 #7
#3 stirrup
2 # 7 4 # 7 E #
Section 1 Section 2 Section 1
Fig. S10-3.2 Beam reinforcing detailing.
10-21
10-4 Repeat Problem 10-3, but cut off up to 50 percent of the negative- and
positivemoment bars in each span where they are no longer required.
Bat cutoff for positive moment steel in AB span
Flexural reinforcement: 4#7 bars

Extend two bars full length and into each support, cutoff the other two where
they no longer
required (50% of MM).
From Fig. A-2, exural cutoff point is at 0.216, 2 0.21 X (27 X 12) 2 68 in.
from exterior end
(support A), and 0.226, 2 0.22 X (27 X 12) 2 71 in. from interior end (support
B).
Rule 3-a: Extend d 2 21.5 in.past the exural cutoff point
68 in. 21.5 in. 2 46.5 in. from exterior end
71 in. 21.5 in. 2 49.5 in. from interior end
Rule 4-a: Distance between midspan to cutoff point 2
, 46.5 , 115.5 ,
213.5X12 1n. in.2 in.
49.5 112.5
, 115.5 ,
[d for #7 bar 2 39.1 111.< in.
112.5
Bar cutoff for negative moment steel
Flexural reinforcement: 2#8 and 4#7 bars

AB span, interior end
From Fig. A-2, exural cutoff point is at 0.1046, 2 0.104X (27 X 12) 2 34 in.
Rule 3-b: Extend d 2 21.5 in.past the exural cutoff point
34 in.+ 21.5 in. 255.5 in.
Rule 4-b: (d for #7 top bar 2 39.1 in.< 55.5 in.
Therefore, use 55 .5 in. for cutoff point.
BC span
From Fig. A-1, exural cutoff point is at 0.16, 2 0.1X (30 X 12) 2 36 in.
Rule 3-b: Extend d 2 22.5 in.past the exural cutoff point

36 in.+ 22.5 in. 258.5 in.
Rule 4-b: 6,, for #7 top bar 2 39.1 in.< 58.5 in.
Therefore, use 58.5 in. for cutoff point.
10-22
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 1 1
11-1 The column shown in Fig. P11-1 is made of 4000 psi concrete and Grade-60
steel.
a) Compute the theoretical capacity of the column for pure axial load.
First compute the gross area of the section, and the area of steel in the
column.
Ag 218 in X 18 in 2 324 in2
A, 26A, 26X1.0 in2 26 in2
N ow we can compute the theoretical capacity of the column.
P, 2 0.85f, (Ag -A,,) + fyA ,2 0.85 X4 ksi X (324 in2 6 inz) +60 ksi X 6 in2
21440 k
b) Compute the maximum permissible (2P, for the column.
13,m,x 2 0.80P, 2 0.80 X 0.65 X1440 k 2 749 k
Note that the factors 0.80 and 0.65 would change to 0.85 and 0.75 for spiral
columns.
11-2 Why does a spiral improve the behavior of a column?
As any column is loaded, and thus shortened, the concrete will expand laterally.
When this
expansion occurs, transverse reinforcement is engaged and will tend to react
against any further
expansion of the concrete within the core. This results in a state of tri-axial
compression within the
core of the column, which significantly improves both strength and ductility.
The circular spiral is much more effective than tied reinforcement at confining
this
expansion for two reasons. First, spirals are often spaced more closely together
than tied stirrups,
so the confinement is more uniformly applied to the core. Second, the
confinement stresses are
transformed directly into hoop stresses in the spiral, which is a much more
efficient mechanism for
reacting to the cores expansion than the straight legs of tied stirrups can
provide (see section 11-2).
11-3 Why are tension splices required in some columns?
Even when columns are subjected to axial loads, reinforcing bars can still often
be stressed
in tension when moments are concurrently applied to the section. When this is
the case, tension
splices (either Class A or Class B) are required for those bars expected to be
resisting tension.
However, since it is most practical from a construction standpoint to use the
same length of lap
splices on all bars within a section, all splices should be specified as tension
splices when some of
the bars are expected to be in tension.
River, NJ 07458.
11-4 Compute the balanced axial load and moment capacity of the column shown in
Fig. P11-1. Use f'c 2 4000 psi and fy 2 60,000 psi.
Assume bending around an axis parallel to the two layers of steel. To calculate
the
balanced point of the interaction diagram, set the extreme compression fiber
strain to g, 2 0.003 and
the extreme steel tensile strain to 8y 2 fy / E 2 60 ksi / 29,000 ksi 2
0.00207 .
:0003 Begin by calculating the depth of the compression zone:
l 5 a
asam cSCTSde
9.21in C2ix(18in15in0375 in]
0.003 (0.00207)
c 2 9.21 in
a 2 lc 20.85 X9.21 in 27.83 in
Now calculate the strain and stress in each layer of steel:
212000207 851 = 0.00207
f 2 60 ksi
Fig. S1 1-3
cd 9.21in(1.5in+0.375in+1.128in/2)
5:2 2 X s, 2 _ X 0.003 2 0.00221
c 9.21 in
60 ksi
f:2 2 smaller of . .
E852 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.002212 64.1 ks1
Calculate the force in the concrete and in each layer of steel:
CC 2 0.85f'c ab 2 0.85 X 4 ksiX 7.83 in X 18 in 2479 k
1112A:1 :123in2 X60 ksi2180 k
E, 2A,,(fs, 0.85f,)23 in2 X(60 ksi0.85X4ksi)2170k
N ow we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point:
P, 2C, +E, +E12479 k+170k180 k2469 k
M,=C. 43 +F.. 4d +F.2 4d'
2 2 2 2
M, 2 479 kX(1821n 78: 1n)180 kX(1821n 15.56 in)+170 kX(1821n 2.44 in)
M, 2 4730 kin 2 394 kft
And, since 831 2 5y , the section is compression controlled, and 2 0.65 .

P, 2 0.65X 469 k 2 305 k
M, 2 0.65 X 394 kft 2 256 kft
River, NJ 07458.
11-5 For the column shown in Fig. P11-5, use a strain-compatibility solution to
compute
five points on the interaction diagram corresponding to points 1 to 5 in Fig.
11-22.
Plot the interaction diagram. Use f c 2 5000 psi and f y 2 60, 000 psi.
Begin by calculating the depth and area of each layer of steel, and other
constants.
d, 218 in 1.5 in 0.375 in 1.128 in /2 215.56 in
A 23A, 23X1.0in2 23.0in2
d22h/2218in/229.0in A,22A,22X1.0in222.0in2
d, 21.5 in+0.375 in+1.128 in/222.44 in A, 23A, 23x10 in2 23.0 in2
A, 2hb218inX18in2324in2 A, 28A, 28X1.0in2 28.0 in2
5120.80
Point 1: Pure Axial Load:
[:7 2 0.85f,(Ag A,,) + fyAS, 20.85 X5 ksi X (324 in2 8 inz) +60 ksi X8 in2
21830 k
Note that this 0.85 is k3, not A.
Since the column is compression controlled, 2 0.65.
P, 2 0.65 X 1830 k 2 1190 k

P 20.80X0.65X1830k2949 k
anax
M, 2 0.65 X 0 kft 2 0 kft
Point 2: Zero tension on one face:
Begin by calculating the depth of the compression zone:
c 2 h 218 in
a 2 lc 20.80X18 in 214.4 in
N ow calculate the strain and stress in each layer of steel:
SS] 2 C 11 X g, 2 M x 0.003 2 0.00041

0 18 1n
60 ksi
f:l 2 smaller of , .
E851 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00041211.9 ks1
_ d . _ .
SS, 2 C 2 . 2mx00032000150
c 18 1n
60 ksi
f:2 2 smaller of . .
E852 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00150 2 43.5 ks1
cd3 18in2.44in
X 8 2
3 .
S c C 18 1n
J23 2 smaller of {
X 0.003 2 0.00259
60 ksi
E533 2 29, 000 ksi X 0.00259 2 75.1 ksi
CC 20.85f'c ab20.85X5 ksiX14.4 in X18 in 21100 k
E, =An(]:10-85f'e)=3in2 x(11.9 ksi0.85X5 ksi)223.0k
11-3
River, NJ 07458.
F;2 2A,, (f, 0.85f,) 2 2 in2 x (43.5 ksi0.85X5 ksi) 278.5 k
and, since d3 2 a,
F, 2A, , 23 in2 X60 ksi2180k

N ow we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment:
P, 2C, +F, +F,2 +F, 21100 k+23.0 k+78.5 k+180 k21380 k
MHZCC 2T2 +Erl le +Er2 sz +111 Td3
2 2 2 2 2
14.4 in
M, 21100kx(9in )+23.0kx(9 in15.56 in)+78.5 kX(9 in9 in)+180 kX(9 in2.44 in)
M, 2 3010 kin 2 251 kft
And, since 8, is in compression, the section is compression controlled, and 2
0.65 .
P, 2 0.65 X 1380 k 2 897 k
M, 2 0.65 X 251 kft 2163 kft
Point 3: Balanced Point:
e2 80 Xd1= 0003 X15.56in29.21in
gcg, 0.003 (0.00207)
61 2 lc 20.80X9.21 in 27.37 in

, 2 C T 11 x a, 2 921 m T 1.556 m x 0.003 2 0.00207
0 9.21 1n
60 ksi
f, 2 smaller of . .
E8, 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00207 2 60 ks1
cd, 9.2lin9in
52 X 8C = .
c 9.21 1n
8
X 0.003 2 0.00007
60 ksi
f,2 2 smaller of , ,
E852 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00007 21.98 ks1
833 2 CT_d3X gt 2 WXOOW: 000221
c 9.21 1n
60 ksi
f,3 2 smaller of . .
E83 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.002212 64.1 ks1
CC 20.85f'c ab20.85X5 ksiX7.37 inX18 in 2564 k

F, 2A, , 23 in2 X60 ksi2180 k
and, since d, 2 a,
17,, 2A2 ,2 22 in2 X198 ksi23.96k
F, 2A,(f, 0.85f,)23 in2 X(60 ksi0.85X5 ksi)2167 k
River, NJ 07458.
N ow we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
P, 2C, +F, +F,2 +F, 2564 k180k+3.96 k+167 k2555 k
Mn =Ce(T\J+F:1(Tdlj+Fi2(Td2\J+Fil(d3]
2 2 2 2 2
M, 2564kX(9 in 737 1
)180kx(9 in15.56 in)+3.96 kX(9 in9 in)+167 kX(9 in2.44 in)

M , 2 5280 kin 2 440 kft
And, since 6, 2 g, , the section is compression controlled, and 2 0.65 .
P, 20.65 X546 k 2 355 k
M, 2 0.65 X 440 kft 2 286 kft
Point 4: Tension control limit
5 c X 2 0.003
g ,2, 0.003 (0.005)
a 2 lc 2 0.80X 5.84 in 2 4.67 in
C:
X 15.56 in 2 5.84 in
8 _ cd1>< _ 5.84 in15.56 in
S] L
c 5.84 in
f,l 2 smaller of {
X 0.003 2 0.00500
60 ksi
E5, 2 29,000 ksi X 0.00500 2 145 ksi
cd, X8 _ 5.84 in9 in
8,2 2 C . X 0.003 2 0.00162
0 5.84 1n
60 ksi
E29,, 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00162 2 47.1 ks1
853 2 CT_dS X gt 2 w X 0003 2 000175
c 5.84 1n
60 ksi
E852 2 29,000 ks1 X 0.00175 2 50.8 ks1
CC 2 0.85f'c ab 2 0.85 X 5 ksi X4.67 in X18 in 2357 k
F, 2A, , 23 in2 X60 ksi2180k
F,,2A,2 ,22in247.1ksi294.2k
F, 2A,,(f, 0.85f,)23in2X(50.8 ksi0.85X5ksi)2140k
N ow we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
P, 2C, +F, +F,2 +F, 2357 k180 k94.2 k+140k2223 k
MHZCC 2T2 +Erl le +Er2 sz +111 Td3
2 2 2 2 2
11-5
River, NJ 07458.
4.67 in
Mn =357 kX(9in ]180kX(9 11115.56 in)94.2kX(9 in9 in)+l40kX(9 1112.44 in)

Mn 2 4480 kin 2 373 kft
And, since 5'51 = 0.005, the section is tension controlled, and 2 0.9 .
Pn 20.9X223 k2201 k
Mn 2 0.9 X 373 kft 2 336 kft
Point 5 : Pure Tension
I; = Astfy = 8in2 x 60 ksi = 480 k
Mn = 0 kft
And, since the section is in pure tension, it is tension controlled, and 2 0.9
.
Pn 20.9X480k2432k
Mn 20.9X 0 kft 20 kft
2000 ,
1500 ,
E ~~~~~-~51000 , ~~'5
N
o
_l
i
3 500 ,
0 . . .
300 400 500
Moment (k-ft)
Fig. 5114
11-6
River, NJ 07458.
11-6 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to compute the maximum moment,
Mu,
that can be supported by the column shown in Fig. P11-1 if (Use fc 2 5000 psi
and
fy 2 60, 000 psi):
(a) P, = 583 kips.
Calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams:
A . ' 2
pg22200185
Ag 181nX181n
_dd_(18in1.5in0.375in1.128in/2)(1.5in+0.375in+1.128in/2)_0729
7 h _ 18in _
f; 2&25831. =1.80ksi
bh bh 181nX181n
N ow go to the interaction diagrams:

M .
From Fig. A-7a: 772" 2 0.46 kSl for 7/ 2 0.60
M .
From Fig. A-7b: 7th 2 0.50 kSl for 7/ 2 0.75
. . Mn .
By interpolation for 7/ 2 0.729, h2 2 0.49 ks1
Finally, we can compute the maximum moment carried by this section:
Mu = Mn = 0.4927112 = 0.49 x 18 in x (18 in)2 = 2860 kin = 238 kft
(b) P, = 130 kips.
A _ 6 x10 in2
st
Ag _18inX18in
_d_d'_(18in1.5in0.375in1.128in/2)(1.5in+0.375in+1.128in/2)_0729
7- h 18in _Pn2i2&=0_40ksi
bh bh 18inX18in
pg = 20.0185
M .
From Fig. A-7a: 2th 2 0.48 kSI for 7/ 2 0.60
M .
From Fig. A-7b: 2th 2 0.55 kSl for 7/ 2 0.75
. . Mn .
By 1nterpolat1on for 7/ 2 0.729, bhz 2 0.54 ks1
River, NJ 07458.
Mu = Mn = 0.5427142 = 0.54x 18 in x (18 in)2 = 3150 kin = 262 kft

(c) e 2 4 in.
A 6 X 1.0 in2
st_
Ag _18inX18in
dd (181n1.51n0.375 in1.1281n/2)(1.5 in +0.3751n+1.1281n/2)
20.0185
Pg:
2 2 2 0.729
7 h 18 in
3 = 4 I. = 0.222
h 18 1n
M
From Fig. A-7a: h; 2 0.42 ksi for 7/ 2 0.60
M
From Fig. A-7b: :th 2 0.44 ksi for 7/ 2 0.75
. . M .
By 1nterpolat1on for 7/ 2 0.729 , W2" 2 0.44 ks1
Mu = Mn = 0.44th = 0.44 x 18 in X(181n)2 = 2570 kin = 214 kft
11-7 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select tied-column cross
sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use f c 2 4000
psi and
f y 2 60, 000 psi. Design the ties and calculate the required splice lengths,
assuming
that the bars extending up from the column below are the same diameter as in the
column you have designed. Draw a typical cross section of the column showing the
bars and ties.
(a) Pu 2 390 kips, Mu 2 220 k-ft, square column with bars in two faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, assume
pg 2 0.02 .
P 3 k
AM 2 u = _90 . =188 1n2 =13.7 inX13.7 in
0.40( f '0 + fypg) 0.40 X (4 ks1 + 60 ks1 X 0.02)
So try a 14 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and
reference them to select

an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
14
7=
14
W;
bh
in2X(1.5 in +0375 in +0.5 in)

.
1n
_ i _ 390 k
bh 14 inX14 in
2 0.66
2 1.99 ksi
11-8
Mg _ Mg _ 220 k-ftX 12 1n/ft 2 0962 ksi
W _ W _ 14in 4141102
From Figs. A-6a and A-6b, the section would require pg 2 0.04, so a larger
section is
required.
Therefore, we will try a square column with 18 in sides. Re-calculate the
parameters required to
use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select an appropriate
reinforcement ratio:
18 in 2 x (1.5 in +0.375 in +0.5 in)
2 _ 2 0.736
18 1n
M = P 2&2120ksi
bh bh 18 1nX18 1n
Mgl : 2 = 220 k-ftX 12 1n:ft : 0.453 ksi
bh M 18 inX (18 in)
From Fig. A-6a: pg 2 0.021 for 7/ 2 0.60
From Fig. A-6b: pg 2 0.016 for 7/ 2 0.75
By interpolation for7/ 2 0.736, pg 2 0.017
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
A 20.017bh20.017X18inX18in25.51in2
s,requi red
N ow select the bars:
8#8 bars 2 6.32 in2 fits in an 18 in section
10#7 bars 26.00 in2 fits in an 18 in section

Select #7 bars, placing 5 along the top and bottom faces.
As indicated on the interaction diagrams, fg 2 0.5fy in the extreme tensile
layer of steel. Therefore,
Class B tension splices are required. From Table A-l3, the splice length must be
54 in.
As transverse reinforcement we are permitted to use #3 bars since the
longitudinal bars are not
larger than #10s. N ow select the vertical spacing of the ties:
16dgb 216 X 0.875 in 214 in
s S 4801, 2 48 X 0.375 in 218 in
min(b,h) 2 min(18 in,18 in) 218 in
Select #3 stirrups spaced at 14 in o.c.
11-9
Fig. S l l-7a
(b) Pu 2 710 kips, Mu 2 50 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set pg
2 0.02 :
P 710k =341 in2218.5 inX18.5 in
u
A . 2 2
W1 0_40(f+g+ fypg) 0_40X(4 ksi+60 ksiX0.02)
So try a 20 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
20 in 2 x (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in)
2 _ 2 0.76
20 1n
W)" 2&2A2178 ksi
bh bh 20 1n X 20 1n
Mg1 2 Mg 2 50 k-ftX12 1n/th 20.075 ksi
bh bh 20 in x (20 in)
From Figs. A-9a and A-9b, the section would require pg << 0.01, so a smaller
section
would be desirable. Try a square column with 18 in sides.

Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and
18 in 2 x (1.5 in + 0.375111 +0.5 in)
2 2 0.736
18 in
@2527101 _ =2.19ksi
bh bh 181nX181n
Mg _ Mg _ 50 k-ftX12 1n/ft 20103 ksi
W _ W 18 inX (18 my
From Fig. A-9a: pg 2 0.016 for 7/ 2 0.60
From Fig. A-9b: pg 2 0.015 for 7/ 2 0.75
By interpolation for 7/ 2 0.736, pg 2 0.015
11-10
A 20.015171120.015X18inX18in24.86in2
3 ,required
12#6 bars 2 5.28 in2 fits in an 18 in. section
Select #6 bars, placing 4 along each face.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under
compression. Therefore,
from Table A-1 3, a splice of length 0.83 X 23 in 219.1 in 2 20 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal
bars are not larger
than #10 bars. N ow select the vertical spacing of the ties:
1601,17 = 16X 0.75 in = 12 in
s s 4801,, = 48X 0.375111 = 18 in
min(b,h) = min(18 in,18 in) = 18 in
Select #3 stirrups spaced at 12 in o.c.
Fig. Sll-7b
(c) PM 2 200 kips, Mu 2 240 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
2 0.02 :
Pu 200
Ag trial 2 =
' 0.40(fg + fypg) 040(4 + 60 4 0.02)
= 96.1 in.2 = 9.8 in. x9.8 in.

However, since the moment is relatively high, try a 16 in square column,
assuming #3
stirrups and #8 bars.
11-11
16in 2 x(1.5111 +0.375111 +0.5111)
16in
(ppn Pu 200
= = = 0.78 k '
bh bh 16 1 16 51
11M, _ Mg _ 240 11-11x12111/11
bh2 _ bh2 _ 16 inX(16 111)2
From Figs. A-9a and A-9b, the section would require a very high pg, so a larger
section is
required. Try a square column with 18 in sides.
2 0.70
7:
2 0.70 ksi
Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and

18111 2 x(1.5111 +0.375111 +0.5111)
7 :
= 0.736
18111
szn Pu 200 .
= = = 0.62 k
bh bh 18 1 18 g 51
11M, _ M, 2 240 11-1w 12 111/11 2 0. 49 ksi
bh2 _ M2 18 inX(l8 111)2

From A-9a: pg 2 0.03 for 7/ 20.60
From A-9b: pg 2 0.015 for 7/ 20.75
By interpolation fory/ 2 0.736, pg 2 0.016
Aggrequired 2 0.016bh 2 0.016 * 18 * 18 2 5.18 in.2
Select #8 bars, placing 3 along the each face.
From the interaction diagrams, fs 2 0.5fy in the extreme tensile layer of steel.
Therefore, Class B
tension splices are required. From Table A-13, the splice length must be 62 in.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal
bars are not larger
than #10 bars. N ow select the vertical spacing of the ties:
1601,27 216 X 1.00 in 216 in
s s 4801,, = 48X 0.375111 218 111
min(b,h) = min(18 111,18 111) 218 111
So we must use #3 stirrups spaced at 16 in o.c.
11-12
River, NJ 07458.
.7554.
Fig. S11-7c
11-8 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select spiral-column cross
sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use f c 2 5000
psi and
f y 2 60, 000 psi. Design the spirals and calculate the required splice lengths.
Draw a
typical cross section of the column showing the bars and spiral.
(a) Pu 2 600 kips, Mu 2 65 k-ft.
2 0.02 .
600 k
A trial 2 M = . .
g 0.50(fg+ fypg) 0.50x (5 ks1 +60 ks1 x 0.02)
Try a 16 in diameter column, assuming #3 spiral and #8 bars.
=1941112 =15.7 111 dia.
16111 2x(1.5111 +0.375111 +0.5111)
y :
_ =0.703
16 1n
M 2 PM 2 6091: =2.99 ksi
Ag Ag 201111
Mg _ Mg 2 65 k-ftX12 111/11:0243 ksi
hAg _ Mg 16 111x
From Fig. A-l3a:
From Fig. A-l3b:
By interpolation
2011112
pg 20.015 for 7/ 2 0.60
pg 20.012 for 7/ 2 0.75
for 7/ 2 0.703 , pg 2 0.013
11-13

River, NJ 07458.
2 16 '11 2
A 20.013X7erT20.013X7rX( 4:) =2.611112
3, required
6#6 bars 2 2.64 in2
Select #6 bars, spaced evenly around the column.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under
compression. Therefore,
from Table A-13, a splice of length 0.75 X 23 in 217.3 in 218 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal
bars are not larger
than #10 bars. N ow select the pitch of the spiral:
3 in
2 . 2 .
s S 'dgp fgg 7: X (0.375 m) X 60 ks1 1 81 g
2 2 . 1n
0.45Dgf 'g [Ag /Agg 1] 0.45 x13111 x5 ksi x [201 1112 /134 1112 1]
Use a 16 in diameter column reinforced with 6 #6 bars. Use 18 in lap splices,
and #3
spirals with a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
(b) Pu 2 200 kips, Mu 2 150 k-ft.
2 0.02 :
Pu 200
Ag trial 2 Z
' 0.500: + fypg) 050(4 + 60 1 0.02)
Since there is also a moment applied, try an 18 in diameter column, assuming #3
spiral and
#8 bars.
2 76.9 in.2
18111 2 x(1.5111 +0375111 +0.5111)
y :
_ 20.736
18 1n
P P
2 2200 2 20.79ksi
Ag Ag (18]
2
Mg :_ 150 k-ftX12 111/ft 20.394 ksi
hAg hA _ 18inX254in2
g
From Fig. A-l3a: pg 2 0.016 for 7/ 2 0.60
From Fig. A-l3b: pg 20.012 for 7/ 2 0.75
By interpolation for 7/ 2 0.74 , pg 2 0.012
2
d (18111)2 g g
A =0.012><7Z'><T=0.012><7Z'><T=3.051n
3, required
11-14
River, NJ 07458.
8#6 bars 2 3.52 in2
6#7 bars 2 3.6 in2
Select #6 bars, spaced evenly around the column.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is in tension,
but only requires a
Class A splice as long as not all of the bars are spliced at the same location.
Since, in reality, it is
likely that all bars will be spliced in the same plane, specify a Class B splice
regardless. Therefore,
from Table A-13, a splice of length 33 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal
bars are not larger
than #10 bars. N ow select the pitch of the spiral:
3 in
2 . 2 .
s S 7:ng fgg 7: X (0.375 In) X 60 ks1
= =1.81111
0.45Dgf 'g [Ag /Ag, 1] 0.45 x15111 x 5 ksi x [254 1112 /177 1112 1]
Use an 18 in diameter column reinforced with 8 #6 bars. Use 33 in lap splices,

and #3 spirals with
a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
11-9 Design a cross section and reinforcement to supports Pu 2 450 kips, M, 2

100 k-ft,
and Muy 2 130 k-ft. Use f'c 2 4000 psi and fy 2 60, 000 psi.
Although the strain compatibility method (shown in example 11-5) is the most
theoretically correct method for designing columns for biaxial loading, it is
seldom used in design.
Here we will use two more common methods for designing a column, the equivalent
eccentricity
method and the Bresler reciprocal load method. Any method outlined in section
11-7 is
appropriate for the solution to this problem.
Equivalent eccentricity method:
First select the dimensions of the trial section, assuming p 2 0.015:
F; = 450k . 2230in2215.2inby15.2in
0.40(f'g+fgpg) 0.40X(4ks1+60ks1X0.015)
Since biaxial moments are also applied to the section, select an 18 in square
section.
Assuming #3 ties and #9 bars:
_18111 2 x(1.5111 +0375111 +0.56111)
F 18111
Ag,trial Z
N ow compute ex, ey, and em.

_ ng _ 130 k-ftX 12 in/ft _
g _ 3.47111
Pg 450 k
e 2 Mgg :100 k-ftX 12 111/11: 2.67111
y P 450 k
M
11-15
. . . . e 6
S1nce our trlal sect10n IS square, (_1 2 gy
x y
P
i2 = 0.347 < 0.4
fcA, : 4ksiX(18 111)

P f +40,000 psi
052 0.5+ X y
f 'g Ag 100,000 ps1
a:[0_5+ 450k )2]g(60,000ps1+40,000ps1]:0_847
4 ksi X (18 in 100,000 psi

are E ' egg =eg+ y " =3.47111+W=573111
E 18 1n
Y
Therefore, we can design our column for:
I; 2 450 k, and
Mgy 2 Pgegg 2 450 k X 5.73 in 2 2580 k-in 2 215 k-ft
N ow use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to determine pg .
_ Pg 450 k
_ _ 2 +2
Ag Ag 324 1n
Mg _ Mg,y _ 2580 k-in
hAg hAg 18 in X 324 in2
Since 7/ 2 0.73 2 0.75 we can use Fig A-9b without interpolating for this
design.
So use pg 2 0.023
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section,
and select the bars:
Ag 2 pgAg 2 0.023 X 324 in2 2 7.45 in2
Select 8 #9 bars, with 3 bars along each face. Select ties and splice lengths as
appropriate.
21.39 ksi
2 0.442 ksi
We can check this solution using the Bresler reciprocal load method. Remember
that we have an
18 in square column reinforced with 8 #9 bars.
A - 2
pg = = 812 = 0.0247
Ag 324 1n
18111 2 x(1.5111 + 0.375111 +0.56111)
7 = _ 2 0.73
18 1n
Compute ng, the factored load capacity corresponding to egg and pg .
M _ . .
g =J=W=347 111, and 62: 347 111 =0.193.
Pg 450 k g 18 in
PYLX
From Fig. A-9b, 21.9 ksi
bh
Therefore ng 2 616 k
Compute ng, the factored load capacity corresponding to ey and pg .
11-16
Mgg _ 100 k-ftX 12 in/ft

e
y P 450 k
u
2.67 in
22.67 111, ande2
l/ 8 1n
20.148.
P
From Fig. A-9b, & 2 2.2 ksi
bh
Therefore ng 2 713 k
From equ. 11-7 calculate ng :
ng = (k3f 'g)(Ag Agg) + ngg = (0.85 x 4 ks1)(324 1112 8 1112) +60 ksi x 81112
21560 k
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
> = + = + _
Pg Pg ng ng ng 616 k 713 k 0.65X1560 k
I; S 490 k, so our section is sufcient for the loading defined here.
11-17
Chapter 12
12-1 A hinged end column 18-ft tall supports unfactored loads of 100 kips dead
load and
60 kips live load. These loads are applied at an eccentricity of 3 in. at bottom
and 5
in. at the top. Both eccentricities are on the same side of the centerline of
the
column. Design a tied column with at least three bars per face using f 'c 2 4000
psi
and fy 2 60,000 psi.
Factored loads and moments
Pg 21.2 X 100 kips +1.6 X 60 kips 2 216 kips
M1 2 216 kips x 3 in. 2 54 k-ft
M2 2 216 kips x Sin. 2 90 k-ft
M 1 /M2 2 +0.6 (Note that the column is bent in single curvature)
Estimate column size
Assume pg 20.015
Pu _ 216 kips
0.4(f, + fypg) _ 0.4x (4 ksi + 60 ksi x 0.015)
Choose a column cross section of 12 in. x 12 in.
Ag (111.11 ) = = 110 111.2
Check whether the column is slender

kl," . ' .
g :1 0X(18X12) 1n 260
r (0.3 X 12 1n.)
M1
3412{ \]=3412><0.6=26.8
2
k
260 > 3412{%]226.8
M
r 2
The column is quite slender, increase column size to 16 in. x 16 in.
Are moments greater than the minimum?
Mzggg = Pg (0.6 + 0.0311) 2216 kips x (0.6 in. + 0.03 X16 111.): 233 11111. < M2
use M 2
Compute EI
0.4EgI
E1 = g
1+ g
E = 57,0001/4000 = 3605 x103 psi
1 ' . 4
1 = = 5460 111.4
g 12
,5 _ factored dead load _ 1.2 X 100 kips
d all factored load 216 kips
2 0.56
12-1
0.4 X (3605 X 103 ps1) X 5460 111.4 g g
E] = = 5.05 X 10 05111.
1+056
Magnied moment
Mg = aggM2
C
2 m >
5 _ Pi _1.0
PP.
M1
Cg = 0.6+ 0.4 = 0.6+0.4X 0.6 = 0.84
M2
2 7:2 5.05X1091b-111.2
g = E: = (_2) 21070><1031b =1070 kips
(kl) [1.0 X (18 X 12)] 111.2
0.84
5": 1_ 216 kips 71
0.75 X 1070 kips
MC 2 1.15X90 k-ft 2 104 k-ft
Select reinforcement
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for the ties, and a
clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
16 in.2X1.5 in.2X0.375 1n.11
7 = .
16 1n.
Pg _ Pg _ 216 kips
bh bh (16 in.)2
qun _ MC _ 1044< 12
W T W T 163
Assume E-type reinforcement
Fig.A-9a shows pg < 0.01 for y 2 0.60
Fig.A-9b shows pg < 0.01 for y 2 0.75
..pg < 0.01fory 2 0.70, and pygmg-n 2 0.01 . Use pg 2 0.01.
Ag = 0.01Ag = 2.56 111.2
I = 0.70
2 0.84 ksi
2 0.30 ksi
Use 6 bars # 6 (Ag 2 2.64102) for the column of 16 in.X 16 in.
12-2 Repeat Problem 12-1, but with the top eccentricity to the right of the
centerline and
the bottom eccentricity to the left.
P; 2 216 kips
M1 2 54 k-ft
M2 2 90 k-ft
M 1 /M2 2 0.6 (Note that the column is bent in double curvature)
12-2
Assume pg 20.015
Ag 2 110 in.2
Check if the column is slender

kig _ 1.0X(18X12) in. _
r _ (0.3X14111.) _
51.4
34 14%] = 34 12 X (0.6) = 41.2 s 40 (40 governs)

2
k4
251.4 > 3412{]240
M
r 2
The column is slender.
M 2 Pg (0.6 + 0.03h) 2216 kips X (0.6 in. + 0.03 X 14 in.) 2 220 kin. < M2
use M2
2,min
Compute EI
0.4EgI g
_ 1+ g
EC 2 3605 X 103 psi
(14 111.)4 _ 4
1g 223200 1n.
12
[id = 0.56
I 0.4 X (3605 X 103 ps1) X 3200 111.4
1+0.56
= 2.96 X 109 16111.2
Magnied moment
Mg25gggM2
C
6 2m21.
W:
cm = 0.6 +04% = 0.6+ 0.4 X (0.6) = 0.36
2
P 251 7:2 (2.96X 109111111?)
(1102 [10X (18 X 12)]2 111.2
0.36
6n: _12E0.67 <1, use 6n: 1
0.75 X 626 kips
MC 2 1X 90 k-ft 2 90 k-ft
= 626 X 103 1b =626 kips
12-3
River, NJ 07458.
Assume 1 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, 1 3 bars for ties, and a clear
concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
7- 14 in.2X1.5 in.2X0.375 1n.1i
14 in.
11. = 0.66
P P '
" 22Lklpf2110ks1
bh bh (14 111.)
11%, MC 90 1 12 g
2 2 2 0.39 k
11h2 M2 143 SI
Assume R-type reinforcement

Fig.A-9a shows pg 2 0.020 for y 2 0.60
Fig.A-9b shows pg 2 0.013 for y 2 0.75
pg 2 0.017 fory 2 0.66
A51: 2 0.017 *Ag 2 3.33 in.2
Use 8 #6 bars (Ast 2 3.52 in.2) for the column of 14 in.X 14 in.
12-3 Figure P12-3 shows an exterior column in a multistory frame. The dimensions
are
center-to-center of the joints. The beams are 12 in. wide by 18 in. in over-all
depth.
The floor slab is 6 in. thick. The building includes a service core which
resists the
majority of the lateral loads. Use fg 2 5000 psi and fg 2 60,000 psi. The loads
and
moments on column AB are:
Factored dead load:
Axial force 2 260 kips
Moment at top 2 60 kip-ft
Moment at bottom 2 -80 kip-ft
Factored live load:
Axial force 2 200 kips
Moment at top 2 50 kip-ft
Moment at bottom 2 -75 kip-ft

Design column A-B using a square cross section with at least three bars per
face.
Since the building has a service core which resists the majority of the lateral
loads, the
frame is braced, or non-sway.
Pu 2 260 + 200 2 460 kips
Mtap 2 60 + 50 2 110 k-ft
Mbat 2 80 75 2 155 k-ft
iMbati : 155 >Mtap
M2 2 Mbat 2 155 k-ft
The column is in double curvature.
Ml/MZ 2 110/155 2 0.710
12-4
22 ft
T k
C
T k
12 ft
l A 1
k
24 ft
T B \
12 ft
l D
\
Fig. P12-3
Assume pg 20.015
P 460
u 2 195 in.2 2 142
A . : :
9"1 0.4(fc + fypg) 0.4(5 + 60 1 0.015)
Check if the column is slender
From Table 12-2, k 2 0.90
lg 2(24X12 )in.181n.22701n.
kg _ 0.9X270 in. _
r (0.3X16 in.)
M
34 12 (_1) 2 34 12(0.710) 2 42.5

M2
2 50.6 > 42.5
krg
r
Column is slender.

Mzgmin 2 Pu(0.6 + 0.03 * h) 2 460(0.6 + 0.03 * 16) 2 41 k-ft < M2
use M2
12-5
mm
Assume the columns CA and BD also have a cross section of 16 in. x 16 in.
16 ' . 4
1(column) = 0.71g (6611111111) 2 0.7 X % = 38201114
12111.X(18111.)3 _ g
I (beam) 2 0.351g (beam) 2 0.35 X (21W) 2 0.7 X 2 4080 1n.
3
{a} 2 SZOEC 2 26.5Eg
(3g Cg (12X12)
{a} 2 _3820E 213.3Eg
[g A (12X 24)
2 4080E 2 15.5Eg
g (12X 22)
26.5E +13.3E
to 'oint 2 # 2 2.57 2 bottom 'oint
w( p1 ) 155g; w( J )
From nomograph, read k 2 0.87
Compute EI
E I
I 2C g
2.5(1+,Bg,)
Eg 2 57,000xl5000 2 4030 X 103 psi
[g 25460 in.4
260
2 2 0.57
d 460
3 3 - - _4
E1 = W : 5.61X109 lbin.2
2.5 X (1+ 0.57)
Magnied moment
MC : 5MM2
C
2 m >
5,11 P _1.0
1_ M
PP.
M1
Cm 2 0.6 + 0.4 2 0.6 + 0.4 X (0.71) 2 0.32
M2
2 7:2 5.61X 109115111.2
Pg 2 E12 2 (_2) 21000X103 lb 21000 kips
(Mg) [0.87 X 270 in]
0.32
5n: _14Tkm 0.83<1, use 5n: 1
0.75 X1000 kips
M, 2 1.0 1 155 2 155 k-ft
12-6
River, NJ 07458.
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for ties, and a clear
concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
g/Zl6in.2X1.5in.-2X0.3751n.1in.:0-70
161n.
Pu460180k'
mW . 51
szn _ MC _ 155* 12
bhz _ bhz _ 163 2 0.45 kSl
Assume E-type reinforcement

Fig. A-lOa yields pg 2 0.022 for y 2 0.60
Fig. A-lOb yields pg 2 0.018 for y 2 0.75
pg 2 0.021fory 2 0.70
Ast 2 0.021 * Ag 2 5.38 in.2
Use 8 #8 bars (Ast 2 6.32 in.2) for the column of 16 in.X 16 in.
12-4 Use the ACI moment-magnifier method to redesign the columns in the main
floor of
Example 12-3 assuming that the floor-to-floor height of the first story is 16 ft
0 in.
rather than 18 ft 0 in. Also, assume the lateral wind forces are 15 percent
larger
than those used in Example 12-3.
The oor plan and elevation is shown in Fig. S12-1
The following design shall be performed for a typical interior frame, for
instance the fram
along line 2. The design of the columns will follow the following steps:
Calculate loads
Calculate the beam and column properties and modulus of elasticity
Select preliminary column size
Check with gravity load case
Check with gravity plus wind load case
Finalize the design of column reinforcement
WWUOFJ?
A. Calculate loads for a typical interior frame
Dead load from roof
Distributed loads on beams
(18 111.X 24111.)
g g g X0.150 14113
144 1n /ft
DL 2 6 111. X 0.150 14113 +0025 k/ftz X 10+

12 111/11
21.45 k/ft
Distributed load on girders (beams supporting other beams)
DL2 18_ 111. X0.025+ m X 0.150: 0.6 k/ft
12 1n./ft 144 1n /ft
Concentrated on the interior columns
30.5 + 28.5 30.5 + 28.5
DL 2 1.45 *TJ 2 1 0.5 (1.45 )
+ 0.6 * 18.5 2 96.7 kip

12-7
River, NJ 07458.
Ir H +: :: " :
20' #:::::::::::IIZZZZZZZZZZZZIIZZZZZZZZZZZZ5I
| II II |
| II II |
@++22222222222 22222222222H222222222222+
| II II |
L IL IL 1
20' I_22222222222_||_22222222222ll_22222222222_I
I II II I
12222222222222222222222222H222222222222T
| || || | a)Plan
20' I12222222222222:||222222222222:|I2222222222222I
1 I II II I 1
T @ixi+222222222222H:22222222222H222222222222+ T
2. L ___________ 1L ___________ IL ___________ 1
l ___________ _II ___________ ll ___________ 'l
I II II I N
| || || |
@++22222222222 22222222222 22222222222+ <$
| || || |
| || || |
20' 112222222222222|||222222222222::2222222222222I
| II II |
| II II |
+ H- 4.
111 6
5 I floor
11'6
11'6
3 I floor ,
b)Sect10n 1-1
11'6
2 I floor
16' 011
Ground
floor
111 6
Slab thickness: 6; Column size: 18 x 18; Beam size: 18 x 30
Fig. 8121
12-8

River, NJ 07458.
Concentrated on the exterior columns
30.5 30.5
DL 2 1.45 1 + 2 1 0.5 (1.45 1 2 )+ 0.6 1 18.5 2 55.3 kip
Dead load from other oors

Distributed loads on beams
(18 in.X 24 in.)
1441112/112
DL =[ 6 111. X 0.150 14113 +0020 14112] X 10+ X 0150 W

12 in/ft
2 1.40 k/ft
Distributed load on girders (beams supporting other beams)
DL 2 18_ 111. X 0.020 + m X 0.150 = 0.593 k/ft
12 1n./ft 144 1n /ft
Concentrated on the interior columns

30.5 + 28.5 30.5 + 28.5)
DL 2 1.40 * T + 2 * 0.5 (1.4 * + 0.593 * 18.5 2 93.6 kip
Concentrated on the exterior columns
+ 2 * 0.5 (14*
3 30 5 g
DL 2 1.40 1 2 )+ 0.593 1 18.5 2 53.7 klp
For each column of 11.5 ft, a weight of 3.88 kips is added for the column selfweight.
For each column of 16.0 ft, a weight of 5.40 kips is added for the column selfweight.
Live load from roof
Concentrated live load on the interior columns
LL 0 3 32, + 30, 20' 18" * 18" 18 5 k'
= >l< :
' 2 144 ' 1p
Concentrated live load on the exterior columns
LL03 165 20' _18"*18" 100k'
_'<'* _ 144)_'1p
Live load from other oors
Concentrated live load on the interior columns
32' + 30' 18" * 18"
LL 2 0.8 (T * 20 w) = 49.4 klp
Concentrated live load on the exterior columns
LL 08(165 20' 18" * 18") 266k'
2 . . * 2 .
144 1p
B. Calculate the beam and column properties and modulus of elasticitv

m
A 2 18 111.X 18 in. 2 324111.2
(18 111.)I _ 4
1g 2 0.71g = 0.7 X T = 6120 111
12-9
River, NJ 07458.
Beam:
Effective ange width
18 in.+8X6 in.266 in.
A26X66+18X2428281112
18' . 30' .3
$2283501n3
I, = 0.71g (beamweb) = 0.7 X
Note that the selection of rigid end zones follows Example 12-3.
Modulus of elasticity
E = 570001/4000 = 3600 X 103 psi
C. Select preliminarv column size
Columns are sized based on the gravity load (1.2D +1.6L+ 0.5Lg) . In this load
combination, live
load can be reduced. From separate analyses of dead load, live load from the
roof oor, and live
load from the other floors, the axial loads of the columns in the ground oor
are shown in the
Table P12-1.
The axial load in the exterior column from the live load from the other oors
then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
0.25 + + 2 0.46
4X(4X16.75X20)
The axial load in the interior column from the live load from the other oors
then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
0.25 + A 2 0.40
4X(4X31X20)
The calculation of reduced axial live load and factored load is shown in Table
P12-1.
Table P12-1
Exterior Interior
All unit are in kips column column
Dead load 285 487
Live load from the roof oor 10.0 18.5
Live load from the other oors 107 198
Reduced live load from the other oors 48.8 79.2
Total factored load 425 720
Assume pg 20.015
Exterior column
Pu 42 5
. 2 = 2 - 2 z - 2 2
Ag(trial) 0.40:, + fypg) 0.4(4 + 60 * 0015) 217111. (15 1n. )
12-10
Interior column
P 72 0
A . 2 u 2
Wm) 0.4(fc + fypg) 0.4(4 + 60 1 0.015)
2 367 in.2 2 (19 in.2)2

Based on the result of Example 12-3, select a column cross section of 18 in. X
18 in.
( A g 2 324 in.2) for both exterior and interior columns.
D.
1.
Check with gravity load case 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lg
Is the story being designed sway or non-sway? In order to answer this question,
we need
ZIP A
to calculate the stability index Q 2 VM7 .In order to have the terms from the
same
X .zg
analysis, we need to analyze a frame with an arbitrary lateral load of 20 kips
applied at
the 2"d oor level in conjunction with the factored dead load and live load as
shown in
Fig. S12-2. In order to take into account the live load reduction, an average of
live load
reduction factor for exterior and interior columns (0.43) is multiplied with the
live load
factor 1.6, yielding 0.69. Therefore, the load combination used is:
1.2D + 0.69L + 0.5Lg + 20 k lateral load.
A structural analysis gives the following results:
Ag, 2 0.127 111.
ZPg 2 414+722+723 +418 2 2277 kips
2g :16 112192111.
g _ 2277 kips X 0.127 in.
Q _ 20 kips><192 111.
2 0.075 > 0.05
The first story is a sway story.
Note that the 2P; 2 2277 kips does not dier significantly from
zpu 2 2 1 (425 + 720) 2 2290
Are the columns slender?
kg _1.2 X (192 30) in.
T _ (0.3X18 111.)
The columns are slender.
236>22
Compute the factored axial loads and moments from a first-order frame analysis.
As
explained in Example 12-3, the unfactored moments for exterior columns can be
determined based on the live load pattern shown in Fig. S12-3 while those for
interior
columns based on the live load pattern shown Fig. S12-4. After a structural
analysis is
made, live load reduction factors will be applied. All results and calculation
are shown in
Table P12-2.
12-11
River, NJ 07458.
20 kips
777 7777' 777 7777'
Factored dead load and live load plus arbitrary lateral load to evaluate
stability index, Q
Fig. 512-2
77' 7 7777 77' 7' 77' 7
All span loaded with live load

Fig. S 12-3
12-12
River, NJ 07458.
777' 777' 777' 777'

Staggered live load pattern
Fig. S 12-4
Table P12-2
(Forces in kips Moments in k-ft) Exterior Column Interior Column
PD 285 487
PL (reduced) 48.8 79.9
PL, 10 18.5
MB (top) 37.0 49
MD (bottom) -36.2 5.5
ML (top, reduced) 20.9 X 0.67 214 18.2 X 0.46 2 8.4
Mg (bottom, reduced) 20.5 X 0.67 2 13.7 2.8 X 0.46 21.3
The factored load on exterior and interior columns are as follows:

Exterior column
Pu 2 425 kip
M(top) 21.2X 37+1.6X14266.8 kft 2M2
M(bottom) 21.2X (36.2) +1.6X (13.7) 2 65.4 kft 2M1
12-13
Interior column
Pu 2 720 kip
M (top) 2 1.2X (21.9) + 1.6 X (8.4) 2 19.3 kft 2 M,
M(bottom) 21.2X (5.5) +1.6X (1.3) 2 8.68 kft 2M1
4. Find 5m for the exterior and interior column?
C
2 m >
5g P _1.0
1_ u
751.
Exterior column
M .4
Cg 20.6+0.4120.6+0.4><( 65 )2021
M, 66.8
2
PC 2 it E:
(M)
0.2EgI +EgIgg
E1 2 g
1+ ,6ng
1g 28750111.4
E, 2 3600 ksi
1g, 21501114
( t) _ 1.2>1<285_08
dns 3x T
E1 25.88X106 kip1112
2 7:2 5.88X106 ki -in2
Pg 2 E: 2(p,)22210k1ps
(k2) [1.0 X 162 111.]
0.21
5115 2 1 _ 425 2 0.28 < 1, use 5115 2 1
0.75 * 2290
Mg 2 66.8 k-ft
Interior column
M .
Cg 2 0.6 +0.41 2 0.6 +0.4X () 2 0.42
M, 19.3
1.2 * 487
dns(ext) = W = 0.81
Since g, (int) does not change significantly, EI and PC will
remain essentially the same.
0.42
5115 2 1 _ 720 2 0.36 < 1, use 5115 2 1
0.75 * 2290
Mg 267.8 k-ft
12-14
5. Check initial column sections for gravity load case
Exterior column
_M,_66.8*12_19
eP, 425 T'
32220.11
h 18
pg20.015
Fig. A-9b yields
P P 425
b 2 2.15 2 > A
A9
22197' .2<324' .2 k
g g 2.15 ln 1n 0
Interior column
_M,_66.8*12_11g
ePu 720 .1n.
e_1.1_006
5?"
pg 2 0.015
qun Pn 720
2 2.2 2 A 2
A9 A9 7 9 2.2
Because reading from the graph may not be accurate given the two
values are so close, we need to select reinforcement for the column and
check its capacity against the demand. Select 8 bars #8, Example 12-3
shows (pp, 2 759 kip > Pu 2 720 kip, OK.
2 327 in.2 2 324in.2
E. Check with gravitv plus wind load case 1.2D +1.6W + 0.5 (L + Lg)
Wind loads are given in Fig. S12-5
Z
1. Calculation of the stability index Q 2
PA
uh
Vgg ><1g
Similar to the gravity load case, we need to do one single analysis with the
wind load plus
gravity load case. To take into account of the live load reduction, an average
live load
reduction factor of 0.43 will be multiplied with the live load factor 0.5,
yielding 0.22.
Therefore, the load combination becomes 1.2D +1.6W + 0.215Lr +0.5L . A

structural
analysis yields the following results:
Ag, 2 0.357 in.
ZIP; 2 352 + 635 + 633 + 385 2 2005 kips
[g 216 ft 2192 in.
Vgg. 2 4.46 + 3 X 6.61 + 8.49 2 32.9 kips
Q
8,2221.
1Q 10.113
_ 2005 kipSX 0.357 in.
32.9 kips X 192 in.
1
20.113>0.05
1 13
The first story is a sway story.
12-15
River, NJ 07458.
4.46 kips
D:
6.61ki s
pk
6.61 kips
F
6.61 kips
D:
8.49 kips
D:
Wind load
Fig. 512-5
2. Factored axial loads and moments
A structural analysis of the frame subjected to the wind load (without the load
factor) yields
the following results, as shown in Table P12-3.
Table P12-3
Forces in kips . .
Moments in k- ft Exter10r Column Inter1or Column
PW 10.4 0.5
MW (top) 46.2 65
M W (bottom) -46 -64.6
Exterior column
Pu 2 1.2PD + 1.6PW + 0.5(PL + P) 2 388 k
M2 :Mzm +6sts
M2, 21.2MD +0.5ML 21.2X37+0.5X14251.4 k-ft
Mzg 21.6MW 21.6X46.2273.9 k-ft
M2 251.4+1.13X 73.9 2135k-ft
Interior column
12-16
River, NJ 07458.
Pu = 1.2PD + 1.6PW + 0.5(PL + P) = 634 k

M2 :M2m+6sM2:
M2111 21.2MD +0.5ML 21.2X4.9+0.5X8.4210.1k-ft
Mzg 21.6MW 21.6X 652104 k-ft
M2 210.1+1.13><1042128k-ft
Note that the 2P; 2 2005 kips does not dir significantly from
ZPg 2 2 X (387 + 632) 2 2038 kips
3. Check column sections for axial loads and moments
Exterior column
MC135*12418'
ePu 388 . 1n.
8 _ 4.18 _ 0 23
hT 18 T '
pg 20.01
Fig. A-9b yields
qun Pn 388 g g
E: 1.42E9Ag ==2761112 <324111.2
At this point, we can select 8 bars #6 (Agg 2 3.52 in.2, pg 2 0.011) for the
exterior columns.
Interior column
_M,_128*12_242.
ePu 634- . 1n.
3 2.42_013
h 18 T '
pg20.02
(an Pn 632 g g
E=2.1=E>Ag==3001n.2<324111.2
Conclusion: The cross section of exterior and interior columns is 18 in. x 18
in. Use 8 bars #6 for
exterior columns, and 8 bars #8 for interior columns.
12-17
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 13
13-1 Compute (If for the edge beam shown in Fig. P13-1. The concrete for the
slab and
beam was placed in one pour.
Because the slab and the beam have the same elastic modulus, Eq. (13-9) reduces
to or) 2 117%
1. Compute 1,]. The cross section of the beam is shown in Fig. S13-1.1 and [g is
computed for the
shaded area.
13 in.
7 & \\ 7 in.
Fig. S13-1.1 Section through edge of slab.
Part Area, in.2 MW 9 ill- Aymp 1m, 9 ill-4 A52 ,in.4
Web 320 10 3200 10,670 663
Flanges 91 3.5 319 372 2331
22411 223519 I, 2 14,030 in.4
Egg 2 % 2 8.56 in.
1g 214030111.4
2. Compute Ig . The cross section of the slab is shown in Fig. S13-1.2 and IS is
computed for the
shaded portion of the slab.
1 _(108+8)X73
g 23316111.4
12
' 116 In. .
Fig. S13-1.2 Edge beam.

13-1
3. Compute orf .
_1 _14,030 _
af% 4316423
13-2 Compute the column-strip and middle-strip moments in the long-span
direction for
an interior panel of the at-slab shown in Fig. 13-25. Assume the slab is 6 in.
thick,
the design live load is 40 psf and the superimposed dead load is 5 psf for
ceiling,
flooring, and so on, plus 25 psf for the partitions. The columns are 10 in. X 12
in., as
shown in Fig. 13-25.
1. Compute the factored load.
qg 21.2X(%X150+5+25]+1.6X402190psf
Note: if the local building code allows a live-load reduction, the 40-psf live
load could be
multiplied by the appropriate reduction factor.
2. Compute the static moment in the long span of the slab.
(g 214.52 213.5 ft
12
t, 213.2 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of E 2/4 or 61/4 on each side of the column
centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 13.2/4 2 3.3 ft on
each side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 6.6 ft. Each half-middle
strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two
half-middle strips is
13.26.6 26.6 ft
The static moment M a can be calculated from Eq. (13-5),
_tygt,rfg_190X13.2X13.52 1 _ .
M_8 _8 X(%000)57k1p-ft
3. Divide M a into negative and positive moments.
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for an interior span, the total moment is
divided as follows:
Negative moment 2 0.65Mg 2 0.65 X 57 2 37 kipft
Positive moment 2 0.35MB 2 0.35 X 57 2 20 kipft
4. Divide the moments between the column and middle strips.
Negative moments
From Table 13-3 for 09.16, / f: 1 = 0 (since there are no beam between the
columns).
Column-strip negative moment 2 0.75 X (37) 2 27.8 kipft
Middle-strip negative moment 2 0.25 X (37) 2 9.3 kipft
13-2
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -4.7 kip-ft, goes to each of the
adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width, 2, , a similar moment will
be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative
moment is 9.3 kip-ft.
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for 09.22/61: 0,
Column-strip positive moment 2 0.60 X 20 212 kipft
Middle-strip positive moment 2 0.40 X 20 2 8 kip-ft
13-3 Use the direct-design method to compute the moments for the column-strip
and
middle-strip spanning perpendicular to the edge of the exterior bay of the atplate
shown in Fig. P13-3. Assume the slab is 7.5 in. thick and supports a
superimposed
dead load of 25 psf and a live load of 50 psf. There is no edge beam. The
columns are
all 18 in. square.
1. Compute the factored load.
qg =1.2X{%X150+25\J+1.6X50=223 psf
load could be
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the static moment for the span perpendicular to the edge of the
exterior bay
13g22018
218.5 ft
12
2,219 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of 2 2/4 or 61/4 on each side of the column
centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 19/4 2 4.75 ft on each
side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 9.5ft. Each half-middle
strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two
half-middle strips is
199.5 29.5 ft
The static moment Mg can be calculated from Eq. (13-5),
_ qgt,3g _ 223X19.0X18.52 1 _ .
g _T_fX(%OOO)l8lk1p-ft
3. Divide Mg into negative and positive moments.
M
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.3, for a slab without beams between interior
supports and
without edge beam, the total moment is divided as follows:
Interior negative moment 2 0.70Mg 2 0.70 X 1812 127 kipft
Positive moment 2 0.52Mg 2 0.52 X1812 94 kipft
Exterior negative moment 2 0.26M g 2 0.26 X 1812 47 kipft
13-3
4. Divide the moments between the column and middle strips.
Interior negative moments
From Table 13-3 for 09.16, / 1 2 0 (since there are no beam between the
columns),
Interior column-strip negative moment 2 0.75 X (127) 2 95 kipft
Interior middle-strip negative moment 2 0.25 X (127) 2 32 kipft
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -16 kip-ft, goes to each of the
adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width, [2 ,a similar moment will
be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative
moment is 32 kip-ft.
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for 09.62/61 2 0,
Column-strip positive moment 2 0.60 X 94 2 56 kip-ft
Middle-strip positive moment 2 0.40 X 94 2 38 kip-ft
Exterior negative moment
From Table 13-5, for 09.142 //11 2 0 (since there is no beam parallel to 1) and
for ,8, 2 0 (since
there is no edge beam),
Exterior column-strip negative moment 2 1.0 X 47 2 47 kip-ft
Exterior middle-strip negative moment 2 0 X 47 2 0 kipft
13-4 For the slab configuration and loading conditions in P13-3, use the directdesign
method to compute moments for the edge-column strip and the middle strip
spanning parallel to the edge of the slab.
1. Compute the factored loads.
qg =1.2X(%X150+25\J+1.6X50=223 psf
load could be
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the static moment for the span parallel to the edge of the slab.
g 219E2175 ft
12
For the denition of ,6, refer to Fig. 13-22 in the textbook.
Edge frame: 62g 2 % + % 210.8 ft
13-4
Interior frame: 6 2g. 2 20 ft
Generally, the column strip extends the smaller of E 2/4 or E1/4 on each side of
the column
centerline (ACI Code Section 13.2.1).Thus; the width of the edge-column strip is
g +% 2 5 .5 ft
The half-middle strip extends from the edge of the column strip to the
centerline of the panel. The
total width of two half-middle strips is 20 9.5 210.5 ft .
The static moment Mg can be calculated from Eq. (13-5).
' _ 61,4223, _ 223X10.8X17.52 1 _ .
Edge frame. Mg T _ f X ({000) 92.2 kip-ft
g g _ qgzgli _ 223X20X17.52 1 _ .
Inter1or frame. Mg T _ T X ({000) 171 kip-ft
3. Divide Mg into negative and positive moments.
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for the edge frame, the total moment is divided
as follows:
Negative moment 2 0.65Mg7g 2 0.65 X 92.2 2 60 kipft
Positive moment 2 0.35M ggg 2 0.35 X 92.2 2 32 kipft
For the interior frame, the total moment is divided as follows:
Negative moment 2 0.65Mgg. 2 0.65 X1712 111kipft
Positive moment 2 0.35Mgg. 2 0.35 X1712 59.9 kipft
4. Divide the moments between the edge-column and middle strips.
Exterior negative moment
From Table 13-3, for aflz 1 2 0 (since there is no beam between the columns),
Edge column-strip negative moment 2 0.875 X 60 2 52.5 kip-ft
Middle-strip negative moment 2 i X (0.25 X 60 + 0.25 X 1 1 1) 221.4 kip-ft
Note that (g X 0.25 + 0.875] 21.0
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for 0952/6120,
Edge column-strip positive moment 2 0.80 X 32 2 25.6 kipft
Middle-strip positive moment 2 g X (0.40 X 32 + 0.40 X 59.9) 218.4 kip-ft
13-5
River, NJ 07458.
Note that (g X 0.40 + 0.80] 21.0
13-6
River, NJ 07458.
13-5 A 7-in. thick at-plate slab with spans of 20 ft in each direction is
supported on 16
in. X 16 in. columns. The average effective depth is 5.6 in. Assume the slab
supports
its own dead load, plus 25 psf superimposed dead load and 40 psf live load. The
concrete strength is 4000 psf. Check two-way shear at a typical interior
support.
Assume unbalanced moments are negligible.
1. Compute the factored uniform load.
7
61,, 2 1.2 (E150 + 25) + 1.6 1 40 2 200 psf

2. Check one-way shear.
One-way shear is critical at a distance d 2 5.6 in. from the face of the column.
Thus, the critical
sections for one-way shear are A-A and B-B in Fig. S13-5 .1. The loaded areas
causing shear on
these sections are cross hatched. Their outer boundaries are lines of symmetry
on which Vg 2 0.
We will only check the shear for section A-A, since the check for section B-B is
the same.
20 rt ( 20 rt I
H l l ,
I I
16 In. X 16 In.
710 19457710 ft+: COW)
A
20 rt 22 2 2 2 22
9%.
9.9
10 rt 39.9 8.9 rt
9? 1
O. .6 m.
13 1 13
17- 22 , 2
10 rt
20 rt 22 ' 2 2 2 2+
Fig. S13-5.1 Critical section for one-way shear at interior column.

(a) Compute Vg at section A-A.
13-7
River, NJ 07458.
8+5.6
Vu 2 0.2 (10 )1 20 2 35.5 kip

(b) Compute Vg for one-way shear.
Because there is no shear reinforcement, we have Vg 2 Vg and from Eq. (13-27),
(pl/C 2 0.75(22\/Ebd) 2 0.75 (21/4000 1 240 * 5.6)/1000 2 128 kip > Vu
Thus, the slab is OK for one-way shear.
3. Check two-way shear
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d / 2 away from
the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-5 .2. The critical perimeter is 21.6 in. by 21.6 in. The
average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d 2 5.6 in.
I I
10 rt I I
( /828.8 in(
11221? 21 1
2 ( i iiein. 81.6 in (
I I
. . . 2 l .
10 H I Late 1M I
I I
2g 272727272727g2
10 rt I 10 rt
Fig. S13-5 .2 Critical section for two-way shear at interior column.
(a) Compute Vg on the critical perimeter for two-way shear.

2
2
Vu0.2<400 144
) 2 79.4 kip
(b) Compute Vg for the critical section.
13-8
River, NJ 07458.
The length of the critical perimeter is bg 2 2(21.6 + 21.6) 2 86.4 in.
Now, Vg is to be taken as the smallest of the following. From Eq. (13-24),
V, 2 42Jfgbgd 2 4 X 1 X 74000 X 86.4X 5.6X (%000) 2122 kips
For Eq. (13-25), [3 2 1.0 (since column is square). Therefore,
V(22+)}t\/gbgd( 2(+4 )XI..><\/4000><864><56><(/1000)= 184k1ps
For Eq. (13-26), a 2 40 for this interior column. Therefore,
PW )Nbd 2(40256+2]><1><\/4000><864><56><(/000)140k1ps
Therefore, the smallest values is Vg 2122 kips, so Vg 2 0.75 X122 291.5 kips >
Vgg and the slab
is OK in two-way shear.
13-6 Assume the slab described in Problem 13-5 is supported on 10 in. X 24 in.
columns.
Check two-way shear at a typical interior support. Assume unbalanced moments
are negligible.
1. Compute the factored uniform load.
7
61,, 2 1.2 (5150 + 25) + 1.6 1 40 2 200 psf
2. See the solution to problem 13-5 for one-way shear calculations.
3. Check two-way shear
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d / 2 away from
the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-6.2. The critical perimeter is 29.6 in. by 15 .6 in. The
average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d 2 5.6 in.
(a) Compute Vg on the critical perimeter for two-way shear.

15.6 * 29.6
Vu20.2(400 144
) 2 79.4 kip
(b) Compute Vg for the critical section.
The length of the critical perimeter is bg 2 2(29.6 +156) 2 90.4 in.
Now, Vg is to be taken as the smallest of the following. From Eq. (13-24),
V, 2 4AJfgbgd 2 4 X 1 X ([4000 X 90.4 X 5.6 X (){000) 2128 kips
13-9
River, NJ 07458.
I I
10 ff I /2:E18 iriI
I 2 2 1 I
1 I I I 1
I I
,7 I I I 84 In 891 in I
I I
I I I I
I I
I LTWJ : 2 I
10 rt I I
I ,I 15.6Iin I
I I
21 272727272727g2
10 rt I 10 rt
Fig. S13-6.2 Critical section for two-way shear at interior column.
For Eq. (13-25), ,8 2 23 2 2.4 (since column is 10 in. by 24 in.). Therefore,

v2(2+)2Jgbgd 2(2+)X1X/4000X90.4X5.6X(/000)2 117kips
For Eq. (13-26), a 2 40 for this interior column. Therefore,
V=0;:Dd( )Nfbd (40X56+2]><1><\/4000><904><56><(/000)143k1ps
Therefore, the smallest values is Vg 2117 kips , so Vg 2 0.75X117 2 88 kips >
Vg and the slab is
OK in two-way shear.
13-7 The slab shown in Fig. P13-7 supports a superimposed dead load of 25 psf
and a live
load of 60 psf. The slab extends 4 in. past the exterior face of the column to
support
an exterior wall that weighs 400 lbs/ft of length of wall. The story-to-story
height is
9.5 ft. Use 4500-psi concrete and Grade-60 reinforcement.
(a) Select slab thickness.
0 Determine the thickness to limit deections.
From Table 13-1, the minimum thicknesses of the four typical slab panels are as
follows:
Panel 1-2-A-B (comer; treat as exterior), and panels 2-3-A-B and 1-2-B-C
(exterior)
13-10
Maximum 1 2 (20x12) 16 2 224 in.
Minimum h 2 f = E = 7.47 in.
30 30
Panel 2-3-B-C (interior)
Maximum [,1 = 224 in.
6 224
Minimum h = = = 6.78 in.
33 33
Try h = 8.0 in.
Check the thickness for shear. We should check the shear at columns A2 and BZ
The tributary area for column A2 is cross-hatched in Fig. S l3-7.l The factored
uniform load can
be calculated as:
q =1.2><I%><150+25]+1.6><60=246 psf
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft2 , it would be
possible to reduce the live
load before factoring it.
#10 ft4H18 In.

Fig. S l3-7.l Initial critical shear perimeters and tributary areas for column
A2.
The critical shear perimeter is located at d / 2 away from the interior column
face and 4 in. from
the exterior column face, as shown in Fig. S l3-7.l. In the following
calculation for the factored
shear force transmitted to column A2, the shear force multiplier of 1.15
required for the first
interior support will be applied directly to the appropriate tributary lengths.
Then,
davg m 8 0.75 0.5 = 6.75 in. (assuming y4 in. clear cover and No. 4 bars as
slab
reinforcement).
[70 = 22.75 + 2 X 23.38 = 69.5 in.
144
13-11
V 2246XI(9X1.15+9)I10+%IIM
II+[1.2X400x(9x1.15+9)]2607001b3261k1ps
From Eq.(13-25),
16
= _ :1
16
I2 + %I = 6.0 > 4 (does not govern)
From Eq. (13-26),
as = 30, for an exterior slab-column connection
g + 2 = M + 2 = 4.91 > 4.0 (does not govern)
b 69.5
0
Thus, using Eq. (13-24):
VC 2 @2ijde 2 0.75 X 4 ><1>< 44500 X 69.5 X 6.75 X (}{000) 2 94.4 kips > v
Note: Vu/VC = 0.65 < 0.75
For this ratio, ACI Code Section permits modification of yf for moment transfer
about an axis
parallel to the edge of the slab. With that information and because this ratio
is below 0.8, the slab
thickness at this connection should be sufficient for checking shear and moment
transfer about an
axis perpendicular to the edge of the column. Shear check for column BZ follows
the same
procedure as for column A2. Thus, use an 8-in. slab. Final shear checks will be
made in part (c)
after completing the exural design of the slab.
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for the column and middle strips associated with column line
2.
Because there is no edge beams, af = 0
0 Compute moments in the slab strip along column line 2
A2 B2 C2
2, (ft) 20.0 20.0
2,, (ft) 18.67 18.67
(2 (ft) 18.0 18.0
q (ka) 0.25 0.25
,2
M0 2 % (kip-ft) 196 196
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -51 +102 -1 37 - l 27 +69 - l 27
13-12
0 Compute moments in the slab strip along column line 1
A1 B1 C1
(1 (ft) 20.0 20.0
6,, (ft) 18.67 18.67
62 (ft) 10.0 10.0
61.2 (kSD 0.25 0.25
, 2
M0 2 % (kip-ft) 109 109
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -28 +57 -76 -71 +38 -71
Wall load (kip/ft) 0.48 0.48
, 2
Wall M0 2 % 21 21
Moments from wall _55 11 _15 _14 +7 _14
(kip-ft)
o Distribute the negative and positive moments to the column and middle strips
and design the
reinforcement.
In each panel, the column strip extends 0.25 X min (I? 1 , {12) = 0.25 X (18
X12) = 54 in. on each side
of the column lines. The total width of the column strip is 2>< 54 in.: 108
in. :9 ft . The width of

the middle strip is 9 ft. The edge strip has a width of 54 in. +12 in. = 66 in.
= 5.5 ft.
Place the steel in the long direction close to the surface of the slab. Try No.
4 bars. Thus,
d 2 8 0.75 0.25 = 7.0 in.
Compute trial As required at the section of maximum moment (column strip at B2).
The largest
MM is 102.3 kip-ft. Assuming that (jd 2 0.95),
AS(trial) 2 _1023 X11000 2 3.42 in.2
0.9 X 60, 000 x 0.95 x 7.0
Compute a and check whether the section is tension controlled:
3.42 X 60, 000
a :
0.85x 4500X (5.5 x12)
6 = =1.00 in.
0.825
Clearly, the section is tension-controlled; therefore, = 0.9.
Compute the value ofjd : jd = 7.0 % = 6.59 in.
= 0.82 in.
Assuming that a is constant for all sections (conservative assumption), compute
a constant for
computing AS :
MM X 12, 000
AS(in.2) 2
0.9>< 60,000>< 6.59
20.0337MM (kip-ft) (Eq. A)
13-13
River, NJ 07458.
The values of AS required in the following table are computed from Eq. (A).
Asmii = 0.0018bh for Grade-60 reinforcement. Maximum bar spacing is 217 (ACI
Code
Section 13.3.2), but not more than 18 in. (ACI Code Section 7.12.2.2). Therefore
maximum is
16 in.
Edge column strip:
437mm 2 0.0018>< (5.5 X12)>< 8 2 0.95 in.2
5.5><12_
Minimum number of bar spaces 2 4.1

Therefore, the minimum number of bars is 5.
Other strips:
A = 0.0018 ><
s,min
The minimum number of bars is 8.
(9 X12)>< 8 21.56 in.2
Division of moment to column and middle strip: north-south strips
Edge Middle Column Middle Column

Column Strip Strip Strip Strip Strip
Strip Width, ft 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 5.5
Exterior Negative Moments A1 A2 A3
Slab moment (kipft) -28 -51 -51
Moment Coef. 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
Dlsmbuted Womens 0 -28 0.0 0.0 51 0.0 0.0 51
str1ps
Wall moment (kipft) -5.5
Total strip moment (kipft) -33 .5 0.0 -51 0.0 -51
Required A (in.2) 1.13 0.0 1.72 0.0 1.56
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 6 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4
AS (in.2) provided 1.20 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80
End Span Positive
Moments
Slab moment (kipft) 57 102 102
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.6
DISrlbutZfrgfmems 0 34.2 22.8 20.4 61.2 20.4 20.4 61.2
Wall moment (kipft) 11
Tom .113 moment 45.2 43.2 61.2 40.8 61.2
(kipft)
Required A (in.2) 1.52 1.45 2.06 1.37 2.06
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #4 10 #4 10 #4 10 #4 10 #4
AS (in.2) provided 1.60 2.00 2.00* 2.00 2.00*
13-14
River, NJ 07458.
Flrst I?;:::E:gatlve B1 B 2 B3
Moment Coef. 0.75 0.25 0.125 0.75 0.125 0.125 0.75
Disbuffrgfmems 0 57 _19 _17.1 _102.3 _17.1 _17.1 4023
Wall moment (kipft) -15
Tom Strip moment -72 -36.1 _102.3 _34.2 _102.3
(kipft)
Required A (in.2) 2.43 1.22 3.45 1.15 3.45
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #5 9 #4 11 #5 9 #4 11 #5
AS (in.2) provided 2.48 1.80 341* 1.80 3.41 *
Interior Positive Moments
Slab moment (kipft) 38 69 69
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.6
DismbutZfgfmems 0 22.8 15.2 13.8 41.1 13.8 13.8 41.1
Wall moment (kipft) 7
Tom Strip gym (3' 29.8 29 41.1 27.6 41.1
Required A (in.2) 1.00 0.98 1.36 1.04 1.36
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 6 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4
AS (in.2) provided 1.20 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80
Interior Negative Moments C1 C2 C3
Moment Coef. 0.75 0.25 0.125 0.75 0.125 0.125 _0.75
Dimibutifgfmems 0 -53.2 -17.8 -159 -952 -159 _15.9 952
Wall moment (kipft) -14
Tom Strip gym (3' 67.2 _33.7 95.2 -31.8 95.2
Required A (in.2) 2.26 1.14 3.21 1.07 3.21
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #5 9 #4 11 #5 9 #4 11 #5
AS (in.2) provided 2.48 1.80 3.41 1.80 3.41
*As(provided) < AS(required) is o.k. because adjacent positive moment regions

are over-designed
and some moment redistribution can occur in ductile slabs.
(c) Check two-way shear and moment transfer at columns A2 and B2. Neglect
unbalanced moments about column line 2.
Column A2
13-15
River, NJ 07458.
The critical perimeter is at d / 2 from the face of the column, where d is the
average depth. At all
exterior ends, the reinforcement is No. 4 bars and 1an = 6.75 in.The shortest
perimeter results
from the section shown in Fig. S13-7.2 and the perimeter dimensions are,
b 12 20 in. + d/2 = 23.38 in.
b 22 16 in.+ d = 22.75 in.
For moments about the z z axis,

_ 2 x (23.38 x 5.69) x 23.38/2
3 _ 2(23.38 x 5.69) + (22.75 x 5.69)
Therefore, CAB 27.86 in. and 0CD 215.52 in.
For moments about the w w axis,
CCB =CAD =$=11 38 in.
= 7.86 in.
As calculated in part (a), V = 61 kips .
For slabs designed by the direct-design method, the moment transferred from the
slab to the
column axis z-z is 0.3M a, and using the moments calculated from part (b),
0.3 X M a = 0.3 X196 2 58.8 kipft (acting about the centroid of the shear
perimeter).
W
Edge of SIOIO
I /
4.. ID I I C
I I I
I I 1558
1 I I 83. 8
a I I a
Z I I Z
I I I 786
L222 22,3
d/8:338 A B
W
711.384I
88.75
Fig. S 13-7.2 Critical section- ColumnA2
From part (b), we found that the unbalanced moment due to the wall moments is 7
kip-ft and
assuming that the loads acts at 2 in. from the edge of the slab,
= 23.38 2.0 7.86 = 13.52 in. from centroid
The total moment to be transferred is,
3.
MH 2 58.8 7 X g 2 50.9 kip-ft
12
13-16
River, NJ 07458.
Note that the unbalanced moment about column line 2 (waw) is neglected as stated
in the
problem.
From Eq. (13-32), calculate the fraction of moment transferred by flexure,
1 1
7f 2 2 Z 2
17./2w;2 1+,/23.38/22.75
ACI Code Section 13.5.3.3 allows yf to be increased to 1.0 if V /Vc and the
resulting p is less
than 0.375/9b within a width of c2 +3h centered in the column. From part (a), V
/VC = 0.65 .
= 0.60
Therefore, take 7f =1.0 and check the reinforcement required.

Width effective for exure = 02 + 3h 2 16 + 3 X 8 = 40 in.
Effective width 3 c2 + 2g 3 c2 + 2c1 (second expression governs)
Effective width S 16 + 2 x 16 = 48 in.
Assume that (jd 2 0.95d) , with d 2 7.0 in.
_ 50.9 ><12,000
S 0.9>< 60,000x 0.95 X 7.0
The steel provided is 9 No. 4 in a column strip width of 9 ft =108 in., or
roughly 13.5 on centers.
The bars within the 40 in. effective width can be used for the moment transfer.
Place four
21.70 in.2
column-strip bars into this region and add 5 No. 4 bars, giving AS =1.8 in.2 in
the effective width.
Recompute AS ,
a = 1.80 x 60,000 = 0.71 in.
0.85 X 4500 X 40
50.9 X 12,000
A3011?) = _071
0.9 X 60,000 X (7 T]
= 1.70 kip-ft (steel chosen OK)
The reinforcement ratio is,

=i=i=00064
bd 40><7
and from Eq. (4-24),
_ 0.85 x 0.825 x 4500 0.003
60, 000 (0.003 + 0.00207
and thus, 0.375pb = 0.0117 > 0.0064 and we can use yf =1.0 . As a result, it is
not necessary to
Pb
I=0.03ll,
transfer any of the moment about z-z axis by eccentric shear stresses.
Column B2
The critical perimeter is shown in Fig. S 13-7.3 and the centroidal axes pass
through the centers
of the sides.
[70 2 2(22.75 +22.75)291in.
13-17
River, NJ 07458.
The factored shear force transmitted to column B2 is,
Vu =246>< (9X1.15+9)(10X1.15+10)[%J:I=1015001bs~102kips
y
W I "7 2
L a a a I a a a J
788.75
Fig. S 13-7.3 Critical section- Column B2
From Eq.(13-25),
I2 + g] = 6.0 > 4 (does not govern)
From Eq. (13-26),
as = 40, for an interior slab-column connection
{OZd + 2] = (402$ + 2] = 4.97 > 4.0 (does not govern)
0
Thus, using Eq. (13-24):
pvt 2 4/i\/fC'b0d 2 0.75 X 4><1>< v/4500 >< 91>< 6.75 X (}{000) 2124 kips > v
Since, V /VC = 0.82 > 0.4 no adjustment will be permitted in the ratio of
unbalanced moment
resisted by eccentric shear.
The moment about x-x axis to be transferred comes from part (b) and is the
difference between
the negative moments on the two sides of column B2, i.e. M 22 =137 127 =10
kipft.
From Eq. (13-32), calculate the fraction of moment transferred by exure (x-x
axis),
1 1
2: 2
3.61/2;2 1+\/T
The torsional moment of inertia can be calculated from Eq. (13-34),
b d3 01773 b 2
J 22 1+1 +2(b2d) 1
12 12 2
Where d 26.75 in. and b1 2b2 2 22.75 in. Thus, JC 2 54150 in.4
= 0.6
7f:
By inspection, the reinforcement that is already in the slab is adequate for
moment transfer.
13-18
From Eq. (13-30) and neglecting unbalanced moment about column line 2 (i.e.
about axis y-y),
Mmhwmfm 2 yUMu 2 (1 0.6) X 10 2 4 kip-ft 2 48,000 lb-in.
Then,
VuMpC = 48,000x11.38 2121 psi
Jr 45,150
So,
102000 124000
1) max =+12.1=166 si+12.1 si=178 si< 1) ==202 si
( ) 91x6.75 p p p 91x6.75 p
Thus, the shear is OK at this column.
13-8 Refer to the slab shown in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material
strengths given
in Problem 13-7.
(a) Select slab thickness.
Problems 13-7 and 13-8 refer to the same flat-slab. As a result, the thickness
of the slab was
chosen in part (a) of problem 13-7. Thus, use an 8 in. thick slab.
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for the column and middle strips associated with column line
A.
Because there is no edge beams, orf = 0
0 Compute moments in the slab strip along column line A
A1 A2 A3
[1 (ft) 18.0 18.0
6 (ft) 16.67 16.67
[2 (ft) 11.0 11.0
qu (ka) 0.25 0.25
(Inf 2%: M a = T (kip-ft) 96 96
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -25 +50 -67 -62 +34 -62
Wall load (kip/ft) 0.48 0.48
Wall M0 : qwallg>< n2 167 167
Moments from wall -4.3 8.7 -11.7 -10.9 +5.8 -10.9
(kip-ft)
0 Compute moments in the slab strip along column line B
B1 B2 B3
51 (ft) 18.0 18.0
5,, (ft) 16.67 16.67
[2 (ft) 20.0 20.0
61,, (ka) 0.25 0.25
13-19
(16262 _
M 2% (klp-ft) 174 174
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -45 +90 -122 -113 +61 -113
o Distribute the negative and positive moments to the column and middle strips
and design the
reinforcement.
In each panel, the column strip extends 0.25 X min(t 1 , 2) = 0.25 X (18 X12) =
54 in. on each side
of the column lines. The total width of the column strip is 2>< 54 in.2 108 in.
29 ft . The width of
the middle strip is 9 ft. The edge strip has a width of 54 in. +12 in. 2 66 in.
2 5.5 ft.
Place the steel in the long direction close to the surface of the slab. Try No.
4 bars. Thus,
d 2 8 0.75 0.25 2 7.0 in.
Compute trial As required at the section of maximum moment (column strip at B2).
The largest
M, is 91.5 kip-ft. Assuming that (jd 2 0.95) ,
91.5 * 12000
A . =
1 0.9 * 60000 * 0.95 r 7.0
Compute a and check whether the section is tension controlled:
2 3.06 in.2
_ 3.06*60000 _073.
_0.85*4500*5.5*1z_ ' m'
_ 0.73 _088
C 0.825 ' m
The section is tension-controlled; therefore, 2 0.9 .
Compute the value ofjd :jd = 7 0.88/2 2 6.56 in.
Assuming that a is constant for all sections (conservative assumption), compute
a constant for
computing AS (Eq. A):
Mu * 12000
AS 2 0.9 * 60000 * 6.56 : 0339M
The values of AS required in the following table are computed from Eq. (A).
As,min = 0.0018bh for Grade-60 reinforcement. Maximum bar spacing is 211 (ACI
Code
Section 13.3.2), but not more than 18 in. (ACI Code Section 7.12.2.2). Therefore
maximum is
16 in.
Edge column strip:
Ami 2 0.0018 X (5.5 X12)>< 8 2 0.95 in.2
5.5><12:4-1
Minimum number of bar spaces 2

Therefore, the minimum number of bars is 5.
Other strips:
A 2 0.0018 X (9 X12)>< 8 21.56 in.2
s,min
The minimum number of bars is 8.
13-20
River, NJ 07458.
Division of moment to column and middle strip: east-west strips
Edge Middle Column

Column Strip Strip Strip
Strip Width. ft 9.0 9.0 9.0
Exterior Negative Moments A1 B1
Slab moment (kipft) -25 -45
Moment Coef. 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
Distributed moments to
strips -25 0.0 0.0 -45
Total strip rf1t1)oment (kip _29-3 0.0 _ 4 5
Required AS (in.2) 0.99 0.0 1.52
Minimum A, (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 5 #4 8 #4 8 #4
AS (in.2) provided 1.00 1.60 1.60
End Span Positive Moments
Slab moment (kipft) 50 90
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6
D1str1buted moments to 30 20 18 5 4
strips
Wall moment (kipft) 8.7
Total strip rf1t1)oment (kip 38.7 3 8 5 4
Required A (in.2) 1.31 1.28 1.82
Minimum AS (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56
A, (in.2) provided 1.40 1.60 2.00
First Irifrior Negative A2 B2
oments
Slab moment (kipft) -67 -122
Moment Coef. 0.75 0.25 0.125 0.75
Distributed moments to
strips -50 -17 -15 -91.5
Total strip rf1t1)oment (kip _51-7 _32 _91-5
Required A (in.2) 1.75 1.08 3 .09
Minimum A, (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56
AS (in.2) provided 1.80 1.60 3.10
13-21
Interior Positive Moments

Slab moment (kipft) 34 61
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6
Distributed moments to 20.4 13.6 12.2 36.6
str1ps
Wall moment (kipft) 5.8
Total strip moment (kipft) 26.2 25.8 36.6
Required A, (in.2) 0.89 0.87 1.24
Minimum A, (in.2) 0.95 1.56 1.56
A, (in.2) provided 1.00 1.60 1.60
13-9 For the corner column (A1) in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material
strengths
given in Problem 13-7, select a slab thickness to satisfy ACI Code strength
requirements for two-way shear and moment transfer, and deflection control.
(a) Make the check for moment transfer in only one principal direction (use the
more critical direction).
First determine the thickness to limit deections:
From Table 13-1, the minimum thicknesses of the comer panel is (treat it as an
exterior
column):
Maximum En 2 I20 ftx MEIl6 in 2 224 in
Minimum h22224m
30 30
Like Problem 13-8, try h 2 8.0 in
Now check whether this thickness is OK for shear at column A1, considering
moment transfer in
the more critical direction:
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft2 , it would be
possible to
reduce the live load before factoring it, but this is not the case for column
A1. Therefore the
factored uniform load acting on the corner panel is:
q, =1.2>< 8? x1501b3+25 psf +1.6x60 psf 2246 psf
1n ft
122
ft
Although the shear force acting on the first interior column face is amplified
by 1.15, the ACI
Code does not permit reducing the tributary shear area for an exterior column to
below 0.5 x 5 in
either principal direction. Also note that the critical shear perimeter is
located at d / 2 away from
the interior column faces.
Therefore,
dm 2 8 in 0.75 in 0.5 in = 6.75 in
13-22
River, NJ 07458.
b, =2><(16 in+4 in+6.75 in/2)246.8 in
(23.4 in)2
V 2246 psfx (10 ft+1ft)x(9 ft+1ft) +2 226100 lb :261 k
144%
ft
Now calculate the ultimate shear stress given this V and moment transfer in the
more critical
direction.
bod JG
where:
1 1
yv21221 2 20.4
1 + 3 b, /b, 1+ 3 J1
1712172 2 23.4 in
c 216 in
_ [1(a)2 _ 6.75 in>< (23.4 in)2
CAB _ 2(bld +b2d) _ 4(23.4 in X 6.75 in)
bd3 db3 [2 2
J 2I1+1+de1cABI +bzchB2
25.85 in
12 12 1 2
23.4 6.75 3 6.75 23.4 3 ~ 2
J. = I m X12 1) + m X12 1) + 23.4 in X 6.75 in X I$ 5.85 inI
+ 23.4 in X 6.75 in X (5.85 in)2
J, 218,600 in4
And, the more critical moment transfer axis is along column line 1, which is
presented in the
solution to Problem 13-7.
M = 28 kft
u
Finally, we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment
transfer in the
more critical direction as follows:
0.4 x (28 kft) x 129 x16 in
v, = V i yVMc = _26'1k _ _ 4 20.198 ksi2198 psi

bod JC 46.8 in x 6.75 in 18,600 In
Now compare compute v" to check whether this level of shear stress is
acceptable.
p42JfC' 2 0.75 X 4 ><1>< .[4500 psi 2 201 psi
div, 3 I2+%IIE 20.75><I2+%]>< ./4500 psi 2302 psi

ad . 20x6.75 in
4+2 (I 20.75>< +2 qu4500 si2246 si
I b ] f: { 46.8 in j p p
0
13-23
River, NJ 07458.
Therefore,
vn = 201 psi >198 psi 2 v, OK
(b) Make the check for moment transfer in both principal directions, but permit
a 20 percent increase in the maximum permissible shear stress calculated at
the corner of the critical shear perimeter.
From part (a),
(23.4 in)2
V, 2246 psf>< (10 ft+l ft)X(9 ft+l ft) , 226100 lb ~26.1 k
144;;2
M,1 2 28 kft
Following the same procedure shown in Problem 13-7, the moment in the E-W
direction is:
M,2 2 25 kft
Now we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment
transfer in both
principal directions as follows:
21+ 7vMulc + 7vMu2c
v, _ _
bod J, J,
in in
0.4>< 28 k-ft x122x16n 0.4>< _25 k-ft x122x16n
v: 26.1k _ ( ) 1_ ( )ft 1
46.8in><6.75in 18,600in4 18,600in4
v, = 0.301 ksi 2 301 psi
Now compare compute v" to check whether this level of shear stress is
acceptable.
42\/f, 2 0.75>< 4 ><1>< ./4500 psi 2 201 psi
ms I2+%I\/f,2 0.75xI2+4 Ix,/4500psi2 302 psi
Iabd+2]\/ff:0-75X(2(:1X66+2]x4500pSiZ 246psi
0
Even allowing for a 20% increase in the maximum permissible shear stress, a slab
thickness of 8
in does not seem to be deep enough to satisfy this shear check. Repeat with h =
9.5 in.
21,, e 9.5 in 0.75 in 0.5 in 2 8.25 in
b, =2><(16 in+4 in+8.25 in/2) 248.3 in
(24.1 in)2
V, 2246 psf X (10 ft+1ft)x(9 ft+1ft) _11, 226100 lb 226.1 k
144,22
b, 2192 224.1 in
d(i;,)2 8251n><(2411n) _603_
. 1n
CAB: 2(b1,d+bd) 24(24.1in><8.25in)

13-24
12013 61193 b 2
J,=I 112 + 122 +6de3] +12201cm32
J _ 24.1in><(8.25in)3 +8.25in><(24.1in)3
_ 12 12
. 2
+ 24.1 in X 8.25 in XI24'21m 6.03 inI I
+ 24.1 in X 8.25 in X (6.03 in)2
J, 2 25,200 in4
So, now the shear stress demand is:
v :Li 7vMulc i 7vMu2c

bod J, J,
in in
0.4>< 28 k-ft ><l2i><l6 in 0.4>< 25 k-ft ><l2i><l6 in
v: 26.1k _ ( ) f, _ ( ) f,
M 48.3 in X825 in 25,200 in2 25,200 in2
v, 2 0.227 ksi 2 227 psi
Ifa 9.5 in deep slab is used, then 227 psi 2 v, S 1.2v, 2 241 psi .
(c) Check one-way shear for a critical diagonal section across the corner near
the corner column.
Assume that the critical section for one-way shear at this corner column occurs
at a 45 degree
angle from either of the exterior edges, at a distance, d, from the most
interior corner. If we
assume that d 2 6.75 in, as in part (a), the length of the critical section is
as follows:
e22xI(4 in+16 in)xJ2+6.75 inI270 in
Therefore,
. 2
(35.0 m)
V, 2246 psf x (10 ft+1ft)x(9 ft+1ft) +2 225000 lb 2 25.0 k
144%
ft
The capacity of the section is:
Vn 2 WW, x 6.75 in x 70.0 in 2 0.75 x1.0 x 2x 44,500 psi x 6.75 in x 70.0 in 2
47,500 lb 2 47.5 k
Therefore, a slab with h 2 8 in will not fail in one-way shear along this
diagonal failure plane.
13-25
13-10 For the slab system shown in Fig. P13-7, assume the slab has four equal
spans in the
north-south direction and three equal spans in the east-west direction. Use the
loading and material strengths given in Problem 13-7 and assume a slab thickness
of
7.5 in.
(a) Use an equivalent-frame method to analyze the factored design moments
along column line 2 and compare the results with the moments used in part
(b) of Problem 13-7.
For this solution, structural analysis software is used to model an equivalent
frame used
to represent the column line in question. Before this can be done, an
appropriate equivalent frame
must be defined, which is done here following recommendations from the text.
Column properties:
A, 216 in x 16 in 2 256 in2
3
16 ' 16 '
I = in x( in)
2" 12
I, 2 I, 2 5460 in4
Note that a full 9.5 ft of column will be modeled above and below the slab.
These
elements will be fixed at their ends.
2 5460 in4
Beam properties:
In the positive bending regions and the negative bending regions near interior
columns:
or 2 0.5, ,6 2 0.5
3 3 0.518ft12'/ft 7.5' 3
2%: 0222 2 X X 2 XI 2) 23800 in4
g 12 12 12
I, 261, 20.51, 21900 in4
In the negative bending regions near exterior columns (assumed to be 0.2 X 61 ft
long):
0720.2, [320.33
b7; 07,75,713 0.2 X 18 ft ><12 in/ft X (7.5 in)3
g :3 Z 12 Z 12
I, 2 ,6], 2 0.331, 2500 in4

21520 in4
Loads to be applied:
(10 218 ft>< 7'5i><1501I:+251b2 2 2140E22.14E
12g ft ft ft ft
ft
lb lb k
qL2l8 ftX 602 210802108
ft ft ft
use (1,, 21.2qD +1.6qL with appropriate pattern loading schemes for each
location
13-26
Location Equivalent Frame Analysis with Direct Design Method

Software-Based Model (From Problem 13-7)
Column A-2 -62.8 k-ft -51 k-ft
Midspan A-B 80.3 k-ft 102 k-ft
Exterior of col. B-2 -156 k-ft -137 k-ft
Interior of col. B-2 -130 k-ft -127 k-ft
Midspan B-C 64.5 k-ft 69 k-ft
Column C-2 -126 k-ft -127 k-ft
Note that the remaining locations along column line 2 are symmetrical across
column C-2.
Some discussion should be presented in the solution, in addition to this table,
commenting on the
relative precision of the two approaches, noting that neither is necessarily
accurate nor correct,
although they are hopefully close to reality. It might be noted that similar
discrepancies show up
when the results of a software analysis of a frame system are compared with the
results from
using an ACI moment coefficient approach.
(b) Use an equivalent-frame method to analyze the factored design moments

along column line A and compare the results with the moments used in part
(b) of Problem 13-8.
For this solution, structural analysis software is used to model an equivalent
frame used
to represent the column line in question. Before this can be done, an
appropriate equivalent frame
must be defined, which is done here following recommendations from the text.
Column properties:
A, 216 in x 16 in 2 256 in2
_ 16 in X (16 in)3
g _ 12
I, 2 I, 2 5460 in4
Note that a full 9.5 ft of column will be modeled above and below the slab.
These
elements will be fixed at their ends.
2 5460 in4
Beam properties:
In the positive bending regions and the negative bending regions near interior
columns:
or 2 0.5, ,6 2 0.5
bh3 :(0.5a{2 + 12 in.)h3
I 2 2320 ' .4
9212 12 m
[9 ,821g 20.5>I<2320in.421160in.4
In the negative bending regions near exterior columns (assumed to be 0.2 X 61 ft
long):
0520.2, [320.33
bh3 (0.50.42 + 12 in.)h3 . 4
192122T 11801n.
[9 ,821g 20.33>I<1180in.42390in.4
13-27
River, NJ 07458.
Loads to be applied:
lb lb k
ft3 ft2 ' ft ft
7.51n. k
qD2(9ft+1ft) T*150_+25_ +0421.6
12 '
1b k
q, 2 (9 ft+ 1 ft) (60) 2 0.6
ft
ft2 ft
use qU 21.2qD +1.68], with appropriate pattern loading schemes for each location
Location Equivalent Frame Analysis with Direct Design Method

Software-Based Model (From Problem 13-7)
Column A-1 -52.5 k-ft -29.3 k-ft
Midspan A1-A2 46.9 k-ft 58.7 k-ft
Exterior of col. A-2 -89.6 k-ft -78.7 k-ft
Interior of col. A-2 -78.8 k-ft -72.9 k-ft
Midspan A2-A3 39.4 k-ft 39.8 k-ft
Note that the remaining locations along column line A are symmetrical across
Midspan A2-A3.
Some discussion should be presented in the solution, in addition to this table,
commenting on the
relative precision of the two approaches. It should be mentioned that neither is
necessarily
accurate nor correct, although they are hopefully close to reality. It might
be noted that similar
discrepancies show up when the results of a software analysis of a frame system
are compared
with the results from using an ACI moment coefficient approach.
13-11 For the same floor system described in Problem 13-10 and the loading and
material
strengths given in Problem 13-7, assume the slab thickness has been selected to
be
6.5 in.
(a) For a typical interior floor panel, calculate the immediate deflection due
to
live load and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5 (b).
This solution will follow the approach shown in Example 13-16.
Step 1: Compute the immediate deection of an interior column strip, which
should be taken in
the N -S direction, as these are the longer span column strips. Take the span
between columns B2 and C-2 as the interior span in question.
First compute Ma. The loads we must consider for deection calculations are:
Dead load: 1.0x (Dead Load) 2 65:1 50,21; + 25 psf 2106 psf
t
1222
ft
Service load: 1.0 X (Dead +Live) 2106 psf + 60 psf 2166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 X (Siah Dead Load) 2 2 X (81.3 psi) 2163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the
moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take M,
to be 166/246 2
0.675 times the column strip moments calculated in Problem 13-7b, as follows:
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 X (95.2 kft) 2 64.3 kft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 X 41.1 kft 2 27.7 kft
13-28
Now compute M6,:
. E _ 3 1
_ frlg _ 7.5 4500 p81 x9 ftx12 ft x(6.5 in) /12
y, _ 3.25 in
It is a safe bet that the slab will be cracked in both the positive and negative
moment
regions regardless, due to temperature and shrinkage effects.
2 383,000 lbin 2 31.9 kft
Next, we have to compute I and 1,. For simplicity, we will assume that the
reinforcement
selected in Problem 13-7 is used in this slab as well.
Negative moment region:
- 2
ll><0.311n 20.00486
9 ft><l2><65 in
ft
n _ 29,000,000 psi _
57,000 4500 psi '
pn 2 0.0368
k 2 ,I2pn + (pn)2 pn 2 . I2x 0.0368 + (0.0368)2 0.0368 2 0.237
1,, 2 %b(kd)3 +A,,n(d kd)2
2%x9 ft Xmgx (0.237 ><5.4 in)3 +3.41 in2 x758 X (5.4 in 0.237 ><5.4 in)2 2514
in
64.3 k-ft
3 3
M
I, 21,, +(1, I,,)IM"I 2514 in4 +(2470 in4 514in4)I I 2753 in4
Positive moment region:
I, e I, 2 2470 in4
So, the weighted average value of I, is:
I 2 0.71% + 015(1,l + 1,2) 2 0.7 x 2470 in4 + 015(753 in4 +753 in4) 21950 in4
2(average)
Now we can calculate the immediate deection due to live load. Using the same
logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 67.5% of the loads will be carried by the column
strip.
wL 2 60 psf X 18 ft >< 0.675 2 0.729 k/ft 2 60.8 lb/in
wD 2106 psf ><18 ft >< 0.675 21.29 k/ft 2107 lb/in
. 4
60.81b/in >< I20 ft >< 12EI
)4
Auwmm a... m, 2 0.0048 x M 2 0.0048 x , 2 0.130 in
E1 57,000 4500 psi x 1950in
. in 4
,, 1071b/ian20 itx122I
A WD 2 0.124 in
2 0.0026 >< 2 0.0026
EI
D(column strip max)
X
57,000 4500 psi x1950in4
Step 2: Compute the immediate deection of an interior middle strip, which
should be taken in
the E-W direction, as these are the shorter span middle strips. Take an interior
span between
column lines 2 and 3.
13-29
First compute Ma. The loads we must consider for deection calculations are:
Dead load: 1.0x (Dead Load) 2 652 50,21; + 25 psf 2106 psf
t
129
ft
Service load: 1.0 x (Dead +Live) 2106 psf + 60 psf 2166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 x (Siah Dead Load) 2 2 x (81.3 psi) 2163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the
moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take M,
to be 166/246 2
0.675 times the slab strip moments calculated using the loading described in
Problem 13-7b.
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 X (28.3 kft) 2 19.1 kft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 X 24.4 kft 216.5 kft
Now compute M5,:
. E . 31
:frlg 7.5 45001381><11ft><12><(6.51Il)g2
M .. = _ 2 468,000 lbin 2 39.0 kft
yr 3.25 In
It is unlikely that the middle strip will be significantly cracked given that
the moments
which control the cracking state are so far below the cracking moment for the
strip section.
Therefore, we can assume that:
Negative moment region:
1, e 1, 2 3020 in4
Positive moment region:
1, e 1, 2 3020 in4
And therefore the weighted average value of I, is obviously:
I 2 3020 in4
2 (average )
Now we can calculate the immediate deection due to live load. Using the same
logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 32.5% of the loads will be carried by the middle
strip.
W2 2 60 psf X 20 ft X 0.325 2 0.390 k/ft 2 32.5 lb/in
W17 2106 psf X 20 ft X 0.325 2 0.689 k/ft 2 57.4 lb/in
. 4
32.51b/in x I18 ft x MEI
,4
Aumiddlesmp W) 2 0.0048 X M 2 0.0048 X , 2 0.029 in
E1 57,000 4500 psi X 3020in
. in 4
,4 57.4lb/1nXI18 ftX122]
AMmiddlesmp m) 2 0.0026 X WD 2 0.0026 X 2 0.028 in
E1 57,000 4500 psi x 3020in4
Step 3: Compute the maximum immediate total deection in the panel due to the
live load, and
compare against allowable deections according to ACI Code limits.
Am, 2 0.130 in + 0.029 in 2 0.159 in
13-30
20 ftX 12E
ACI Code Limit 2 J / 360 2 T 2 0.667 in We are OK.
(b) For the same floor panel, calculate the total deflection after the
attachment
of partitions and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5(b) for
partitions that are not likely to be damaged by long term deflections.
Assume that 85 percent of the dead load is acting when the partitions are
attached to the structure and assume that 25 percent of the live load will be
sustained for a period of one year.
We will assume that the total expected deection after the attachment of
partitions is a
sum of the following:
13-12
1. Dead load
Assuming that 85% of the dead load is already acting when the partitions are
attached, consider 15% of the immediate deection due to dead load affects the
partitions.
Ammmm 2 0.1x (0.124 in +0.028 in) 2 0.015 in
2. Live load
Assume that the total instantaneous deection due to live load could occur at
any
time once the partitions are attached, so include the full instantaneous
deection
due to live load.
A 2 0.159 in
Live immediate
3. Long term deections
Assume that the full dead load acts plus 25% of the live load over the
course of a year. Use the suggested deection coefcient of 3.0 to adjust
for long-term amplification effects.
A 2 3.0 X (0.124 in + 0.028 in + 0.25 X 0.159 in) 2 0.575 in
Long term
Therefore, the total expected deection felt by the partitions is:
A 2 A + A + A
partitions Dead immediate
2 0.015 in + 0.159 in + 0.575 in 2 0.749 in
Live immediate Long term
partitions
Compare this to the ACI limit for slab systems supporting partitions which are
not
likely to be damaged by large deections:
20 ftx12E
ACI Code Limit 2 t / 240 2 To 21.0 in We are OK.
Repeat the questions in Problem 13-11 for the following panels.
(a) An exterior panel along the west side of the oor system.
13-31
River, NJ 07458.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The
column
strip in question will still be taken along the N -S direction. The major change
will lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
(b) An exterior panel along the north side of the floor system.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The
column
strip in question will still be taken along the N -S direction. The major change
will again lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
(c) A corner panel.
This solution will again follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 1311. The
column strip in question will still be taken along the N -S direction. The major
change will still lie
in the definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
13-32
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 14
14-1 For the slab panel shown in Fig. P14-1, use the yield-line method to
determine the
minimum value of the area load, q f, at the formation of the critical yield-line
mechanism.
We may need to investigate two yield-line mechanisms to find the minimum (1):.
1. Select first plastic mechanism.
7//////AW////////AV///A
11 9 1 __ 18 ft.
I A B I
Ill/Illll' Ill/Illllllllllli
13 L1
n2mh
Mechanism No. 1
2. Assume a Virtual displacement equal to 5 along the positive yield line from A
to B.
012% andHHZE
3. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
5 9.95
IW,2(mp+mn)*186,2(4+7)*18*m2T
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
5
[Wu 2 (mp) * 209,, 2 (4) r 20 r 9 2 8.95
Therefore, the sum of the internal work is:
21W 2(9'9+89)5 (198+ 178)5
.3 ' .3 '
4. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points A and B
are essentially two
half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 18 ft
x 2[3 x 20 ft. The
central region between points A and B has a triangular cross-section and extends
over a length of
20 ft x (1 2 [3). Thus, the external work is:
5 5
EW2 qu2[3*20*18*+18*(12[3)*20*I 2qf5(18012013)
l4l
River, NJ 07458.
5. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW: 21W and solve for (1,.
(% + 17.8)
qf : (180 12013)
6. Solve for the minimum value of (1,. The solution table below starts with [3 2
0.5 and slowly
decreases [3.
[3 N umerator, kips Denominator, ft2 (1,, ksf
0.50 57.4 120 0.478

0.48 59.1 122 0.482
0.46 60.8 125 0.488
From this table the minimum value of qfis 0.478 ksf and it occurs for a [3 value
of 0.50. Because of
this result, we should investigate a second possible yield-line mechanism.
7. Select a second possible plastic yield-line mechanism.
II
L2=18ft.
orL2
10 ft
20 ft
Mechanism No. 2
8. Assume a Virtual displacement of 5 along positive yield line C D.
5
6, E and 6,, _180:
1W, 2 (mp +m,,)>1< 186, 2 (4+ 7) r 18*%2 19.85
1W,, 2 (mp) * 200,, 2 (4) r 20 *
4.4 8.8
10. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points C and D
are essentially
two half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 20
ft x 2 a: x 18 ft.
5 _ 4.45
1801 a:
142
River, NJ 07458.
The central region between points C and D has a triangular cross-section and
extends over a length of
18 ft x (1 2 0:). Thus, the external work is:
5 5
EW 2qu2a>I< 18*20*+18*(12a)*20*] 2qf5(180120a)
11. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW: Z [W and solve for qf.
(39.6 + 80,28)
qf : (180 1205)
12. Solve for the minimum value of qf. The solution table below starts with a: 2
0.5 and slowly
decreases or.
a: Numerator,
0.50 57.2 120
0.48 57.9 122
0.46 58.7 125
0.44 59.6 127
0.42 60.6 130
kips Denominator, ft2 qf, ksf

0.477
0.475
0.47
0.469
0.468
0.4 61.6 132 0.467

0.38 62.8 134 0.467
From this table the minimum value of qfis 0.467 ksf and it occurs for an a:
value of approximately
0.47. In this case it was important for us to investigate this second possible
yield-line mechanism.
143
River, NJ 07458.
determine the
mechanism.
1. Select plastic yield-line mechanism.
I free edge
7 B //
/ /_ L =201't.
%
2
2
2
2 1
2 L
I / ,1
________________________________________ z
20ft.
Assumed yield-line mechanism

2. Assume a Virtual displacement equal to 5 along the positive yield line from A
to B.
92 d6 2
20,5an " 10
12.55
5
1W,2(m,,+m,,)*209,2(4.5+8)*20*20,, .8

5
1W,, 2 (mp) * 209,, 2 (4.5) r 20 * 2 95
ZIW2%55+2(95)2(%'5+18)5
4. Compute the external work. The end region below the point A is essentially a
half-pyramid with a
base area of 20 ft x [3 x 20 ft. The region between points A and B has a
triangular cross-section and
extends over a length of 20 ft x (1 [3). Thus, the external work is:
5 5
EW=qu*20*20*+20*(1[3)*20*I =qf5(20066-7)
em)
qf : (200 66.7[3)
144
River, NJ 07458.
6. Solve for the minimum value of (1,. The solution table below starts with [3 2
0.75 and increase [3 in
increments of 0.05.
[3 Numerator,
0.75 34.7 150
0.80 33.6 147
0.85 32.7 143
0.90 31.9 140
0.95 31.2 137
1.00 30.5 133
kips Denominator, ft2 qf, ksf

0.231
0.229
0.228
0.228
0.228
0.229
of approximately
0.90.
145
River, NJ 07458.
determine the
mechanism.
1. Select plastic yield-line mechanism.
F
18ft
24ft

This is a complex mechanism with many potential variables. We will select values
for some of the
distances shown in this figure as an initial trial. A few points should be noted
regarding this
mechanism. As stated in the text, a positive yield line between two adjacent
plate segments will
extend to or toward the intersection of the axes of rotation for those two plate
segments. Thus, the
positive yield line A-D starts at the intersection between the axes of rotation
for segments I and II (at
point A). Similarly, the other two positive yield lines branching out from point
D aim toward the
points E (intersection of axes of rotation for segments I and III) and F
(intersection of axes of rotation
for segments II and III). Experience with this particular mechanism indicates
that the minimum value
of (1,: will occur when the point D is relatively close to the corner column
support.
2. Select trial values for the assumed mechanism. The following values were
selected for the
mechanism shown above.
B-E224ft C-F218ft Y215ft X220ft
With these values selected, geometry can be used to determine the additional
values shown on the
following figure. It should be noted that the three lines extending from the
slab to line E-F (the axes
of rotation for segment III) are all perpendicular to that line.
3. Assume a Virtual displacement equal to 5 occurs at the point D.
5 5 5
62;62,and6 2
15 ft 20 ft 2 4.80 ft
146
River, NJ 07458.
18ft
24ft

4. Compute the internal work. For the three slab segments the internal work is:
IW(I) 2 (m, +m,,)X 24 ftXQ,
=(6+8)><24 ftXi=(22.4 k)X5
ft 15 ft
IW(II) 2 (m, +m,,) X 18 ftX 6,,
=(6+8)><18ft><i=(12.6k)><5
k 20ft
IW(III) 2 m, x L1,, x 5,,
26%X860 ftX
2 (10.8 10x5
4.80 ft
ZIW2(45.81<)X6
5. Compute the external work. Rather than calculate a displaced volume, we will
determine the
magnitude of load acting on each plate segment and then multiply that load times
the displacement at
the centroid of the segment. If we did this directly for the defined segments,
it would be difficult to
find the centroids of each segment. Thus, for plate segment I we will calculate
the work done by the
distributed load acting on the triangular segment A-D-E, and then subtract to
work for the triangular
piece outside the actual slab panel. So, for segment I:
EW(I) 2 [A(total) X g A(outside) X W] X q,
1
EW(I) =I:E><48IX15IX%%X24IX12.9IX%:IXqf X5
= (75.6 ft2)qu X5
147
River, NJ 07458.
Similarly, for segment II:
EW(II)=I:%><36IX20IX%%X18IX17.1IX17.2/2'0]qu X5
2(76.1ft2)quX5
And for segment III, where some additional small triangles are used outside the
slab panel:
EW(111)=[X60IX4.80IX%%X26.9IX4.11Xwxz45IX4-09IXW
4.11/4.80 1
X
5.5' X 4.09 X
%><3.10I><4.11I>< w
]qu X5
EW(III) 2 (13.0 ft2)Xq, x5
Thus, the sum of external work is:
ZEW 2 (165 112)), x5
6. Setting the sum of the internal work equal to the sum of the external work
gives:
45.8 kips
165 ft, 2 0.278 ksf
6001031) 2
7. Estimate for the minimum value of (1, Rather than doing several trials, we
will assume that the
selected trial mechanism is reasonable and should give an answer within ten
percent of the true
minimum value for (1,. Thus, we can say:

q, (min) 2 0.9X 0.278 2 0.250 ksf
148
River, NJ 07458.
determine the
mechanism.
1. Select a plastic yield-line mechanism. Try the mechanism shown below. Note
that there is a single
variable for this mechanism, the value of [3.
free edge
11 A_ L,=18ri.
u
2
L2=24 ft.

2. Assume a Virtual displacement equal to 5 occurs at the point A.
9_ 5
" zal)
5
m and 6" =
6. 7 + 5. 33(1 [3)
1W, 2 (mn + mpy(1 13)) r 240,2 (5 + 4(113)) * 2418[3 2I5
5 3.75 + 2.25[3
1w 2 (mn + mpx) * 186,, 2 (5 + 3,5) * 18m 2 IT

_ 6.7+5.33(1[3) 3.75+2.2513
ZIWI ,5 + 1_,, 5
4. Compute the external work. The deected shape is essentially a half-pyramid,

with a combined
base area (18 ft x 24 ft)/2. Thus, the external work is:
18* 24* 5
(6.7 + 5.33(1 [3) + 3.75 + 2.25[3)
.8 1 .8
qf : 72
14-9
River, NJ 07458.
6. Solve for the minimum value of qf. Because the denominator is constant, we
need to minimize the
numerator. It is expected that [3 2 0.5.
[3 Numerator, kips Denominator, ft2 qf, ksf

0.48 29.0 72.0 0.403
0.50 28.5 72.0 0.396
0.52 28.1 72.0 0.390
0.54 27.7 72.0 0.385
0.56 27.5 72.0 0.382
0.58 27.4 72.0 0.381
0.60 27.5 72.0 0.382
of 0.58.
1410
River, NJ 07458.
14-5 The slab panel shown in Fig. P14-5 is 7.5 in. thick and is made of normal
weight
concrete. The slab will need to support a superimposed dead load of 25 psf and a
live
load of 60 psf. Assume that the slab will be designed with isotropic top and
bottom
reinforcement.
(a) Find the critical yield-line mechanism and then use the appropriate load
factors
and strength-reduction factors to determine the required sum of the nominal
negative- and positive-moment capacities (121,, + mp) in units of k-ft/ft.
1. Determine the total factored load to be resisted.
Slab weight is (7.5/12) x 150 2 94 psf: Thus, the total dead load 2 94 + 25 2
119 psf.
The live load can be reduced based on the panel area (20 x 26 2 520 ft2). Note:
KLL 2 1.0. For
this area, the reduced live load is equal to 54.5 psf.
So, the total factored load, (1,, 2 1.2 x 119 + 1.6 x 54.5 2 230 psf2 0.230 ksf
2. Select a possible plastic yield-line mechanism. A couple items should be
noted. First, in text
Example 14-4, the value of [3 was close to 0.5, so having a Virtual displacement
of 5 only at a single
point (point A) will give a relatively good answer. Also, because of the fixed
supports at the support
edges for plate segments I and II, we would like to make the rotations of those
plate segments smaller
than for plate segments III and IV. Thus, [3 will be greater than 0.5.
x26
////////////////////////////////5y
111 Z
. A ,%
20 ft H W Z_
, % x 20 ft
%
2
26 ft

3. Assume a Virtual displacement equal to 5 at point A.
6] 2L ,and 61] 2L
X20ft X26ft
,9], 2;, and ,9], 2;
(1)X20ft (1)X26ft
l4ll
River, NJ 07458.
3. Compute the internal work. For the four slab segments the internal work is:
1.3(m,+m)
1I9(1)=(m,,+m,)X26 ftXQ, 2PX5
0.77(m,,+m)
1II(11)=(m,,+m,)X20 ftX6H 2TPX5
1.
IW(III)2m,,X26 ftXQIH ZlpX6
0.77m
IW(IV) =mp X20 ftXQIV ZlpX
From these, the sum of the internal work is:
_ 2.07(m,, +m,) 2.07m,
21W - T + W 5
At some point in the design process need to make a decision on the ratio between
the exural strength
of the bottom reinforcement, mp, vs. the strength of the top reinforcement, m".
Reading ahead to
problem 14.5(b), we are asked to assume that rm, 2 1.6mp. Thus, the internal
work can be expressed
as a function of mp.
21w =
4. Compute the external work. In previous problems we have solved for the
distributed load, qf, at the
development of a failure mechanism. In this case, (1,: is equivalent to (1,,
divided by the strength
reduction factor, 4'), which will be assume to be equal to 0.9. Thus,
EW2%I20 ftX26 fing2wa73 ft2)X52(44.2 10x5
2.07(1.6m,, + m,) + 2.07m, 5
1
5. Equate the external and internal work.
44.25 2 I2.07(1.6m,, + m,) + 2.07m, 5

1 -
44.2
"P 2 a+
1 -
6. Solve for the minimum required value of mp. The solution table below starts
with [3 2 0.5 and
increase [3 in increments of 0.05.
[3 Required mp, kip-ft/ft

0.50 2.97
0.55 3.07
0.60 3.13
0.65 3.11
From this table the minimum required value of mp is 3.13 kip-ft/ft. Assuming
that rm, 2 1.6mp,
rm, 2 5.0 kip-ft/ft.

1412
River, NJ 07458.
(b) Start with in.,, approximately equal to 1. 6m.,,, and then select top and
bottom
isotropic reinforcement to provide the required combined flexural strength
calculated in part (a). Be sure to check reinforcement spacing requirements
given in ACI Code Section 13.3.2.
1. From part (a), mp 2 3.13 kft/ ft and rm, 2 5.0 kip-ft/ft. Select top and
bottom bars to provide the
required moment strength. Assume fy 2 60 ksi and f, 2 4000 psi. Also, assuming
that #4 bars will
suffice, use d 2 7.5 0.75 db 2 6.25 in.
For negative bending,
kft in.
A571 > Mun _ 5'0? * 12F _ 0 187111.2
ft pf,(0.955) T 0.9 r 60 ksi(0.95 * 6.25 in.) T ' ft
_ 0.187 r 60 _ 0 275
T 0 85 r 4 12 m
0.275 k ft
(mm, 2 0.9 r 0.187 r 60 (6.25 T) 2 T
- 2
Using #4 bars, 5mm 2 001:;111, * 12 in. 2 12.8 in.
' - '2
Using #3 bars, 5mm 2 3% r 12 in. 2 7.1 in.
For positive bending,
kft in.
A5,, > M,,, _ 3'13F* 12? _ 0 117m?
ft 55(0955) T 0.9 r 60 ksi(0.95 * 6.25 in.) T ' ft
_ 0.117 r 60 _ 0 172,
a _0.85*4*12 T ' m'
0.172 k ft
5an 2 0.9 r 0.117 r 60 (6.25 TT) 2 .24
. 0.2m.2 . .
Us1ng #4 bars, 5mpr 2 0 117m, * 12m. 2 20.51n.
' - '2
Using #3 bars, 5mm 2 3% r 12 in. 2 11.3 in.
2. Check reinforcement detailing requirements and select reinforcement:
- 2
Minimum reinforcement area: Asmm 2 0.0018bh 2 0.162 % . This is easily satisfied
by the top and

bottom reinforcement required for strength purposes.
18 in.
2h 2 15 in.
and this maximum spacing requirement, select #3 bars for both top and bottom
reinforcement. Bars
shall be spaced at 7.5 in. and 11 in. along the top and bottom faces of the
slab, respectively, in both
orthogonal directions. Clear cover requirements of 0.75 in. shall be enforced.
Proper anchorage shall
be provided for all slab reinforcement.
Maximum spacing: 5mm, 2 I I 2 15 in. To satisfy the strength requirements from
step 1
1413
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 15
15-1 Design wall footings to be supported 3 ft below grade for the following
conditions.
Assume a soil density of 120 lb/ 11:3 and normal weight concrete for both
problems.
Service dead load is 6 kips/ft, service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 12 in.
thick.
Allowable soil pressure, qa, is 4000 psf. f c 2 3500 psi and f y 2 60000 psi.
The following design is done for a 1 ft length of footing. Although not included
for simplicity, the
per foot notation applies to all units in the following solution.
1) Estimate size of footing and factored net pressure
The bottom face of the footing is 3 ft below the ground surface.
Assume the thickness of the footing is 12 in.
The soil density is 120 lb/ft3
Allowable net soil pressure:
q, 2 4 ksf (1.0 ftX0.15 k/ft3 +2.0 ftX0.12 k/ft3) 2 3.61 ksf
Required footing area:
_6k+8k
,.,_ T 3.61 ksf
Try 4 ft wide strip footing.
Factored net pressure:
2 3.88 ft2
_1.2X6 k+1.6X8 k
q, 25 ksf
4 ftXl ft
2) Check one-way shear

Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used.
d 212 in.3 in.0.5 in. 2 8.5 in.
The distance the footing extends to each side from the column face:
(48 in. 12 in.)/2 218 in.
18 in.8.5 in.
12 in/ft
V, 2 (522,]ngde 2 0.75 x 2s/3500 x12x 8.5 2 9050 lb 2 9.05 k
Since V, is significantly greater than V, , we reduce the footing thickness to
the
V,251<six( Ixiit23961<
minimum allowable by ACI Section 15.7, i.e.:
6 in. + bar dia. + 3 in. cover. 2 10 in.
d 210 in.3 in.0.5 in. 2 6.5 in.
V, 25 ksiXIMIM ft 24.79 k
12 in/ft
(pl/C 2 $22 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 2V3500 * 12 * 6.5 2 6.9 k > Vu
Use 10 in. thick footing
15-1
3) Design reinforcement
(1.5 it)2
M, 2 (5 ksf X 1ft)X T 2 5.63 k-ft
Assume j 2 0.90
_ 5.63 k-ft X 12 in/ft
. T 0.9X60 ksiX(0 9X65 in)
A,min 20.0018bh 0. 0018X12 1n. X10 1n. 20.22 1n.2
Use #4 bars at with a spacing of 10 in. (A, 2 0.24 in.2)
d 2 10 in.3 in.0.25 in. 2 6.75 in.
0.24 in.2 x 60 ksi
2 0.21 in.2
a 2 2 0.4 in.
0.85 X 3.5 psi X 12 in.
_ 6.75 0.4/0.85
e, 2 Ham 2 x 0.003 2 0.040 > 0.005,.~. p 2 0.9
c 0.4/0.85
M, 2 0.9 X 0.24 in.2 X 60 ksi X (6.75 in. 0.4 1n./2)
2 84.9 k-in. 2 7.07 k-ft > M,
4) Check development
Bar spacing exceeds 261,, and cover exceeds db This is Case 2 development.
QT Wall/if _ 1X1X60000 psi
252Jfgdl 25 x1x \/3500 psi
We shall use 90 standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development
length for
a 90 standard hook is:
2.0 02w.f,d :0. 02 x1x 60000 psi
lJfJd IX [3500 Opsi
X0.5 in. 2 20 in. > 18 in.3 in., NG.

(3,,
X0.5 in.210 in. < 18 in.3 in., OK.

5) Temperature requirement for longitudinal reinforcement:
20.00218bh 0.0018X48 1n. X10 In. 20.86 1n.2
As req.
. Use 5 #4 bars for longitudinal reinforcement.
Use 10 in. thick by 4 ft. wide footing with #4 bars at 10 in. o.c. with 90
hooks at both ends in the
transverse direction, and 5 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
15-2 Design wall footings to be supported 3 ft below grade for the following
conditions.
Assume a soil density of 120 lb/ 11:3 and normal weight concrete for both
problems.
Service dead load is 15 kips/ft, service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 16 in.
thick.
Allowable soil pressure, qa, is 6000 psf. f c 2 3000 psi and f y 2 60000 psi.
The bottom face of the footing is 3 ft below the ground surface.
Assume the thickness of the footing is16 in.
The soil density is 120 lb/ft3
15-2
River, NJ 07458.
q, 2 6 ksf (16in. * 0.15 k/ft3 + 20 in. r 0.12 k/ft3) 2 5.6 ksf
A 15 k + 8 k
1- T 5.6 ksf
Try 4.5 ft wide strip footing.
Factored net pressure:
1.2*15k+1.6*8k
qmT 4.5ft*1ft
2 4.1 #2
2 6.84 ksf
Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used.
d 216 in.3 in.0.5 in. 212.5 in.
(54 in. 16 in.)/2 219 in.
19 in.12.5 in.
12 in/ft
V, 2 (522,]?de 2 0.75 x 24/3000 x12x125 212.3 k
Since V, is significantly greater than V,, we reduce the footing thickness to
12 in.:
d 212 in.3 in.O.5 in. 2 8.5 in.
V 26.84 kst m X1ft25.99k
12 in/ft
(pl/C 2 $22 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 2V3000 * 12 * 8.5 2 8.4k > Vu
Use 12 in. thick footing
V,26.84kstI )let23.71k
(1.583 of
M, 2 (6.84 ksf X1ft)X 2 8.58 k-ft
Assume j 2 0.90
8.58 k-ftX12 1n/ft 2 025 in,
. T 0.9X60 ksiX (0.9X8.5 in)
A 20.0018bh 20.0018X12 in.X12 in. 20.26 in.2
Use #5 bars at with a spacing of 12 in. (A, 2 0.31 in.2)
d 212 in.3 in.O.31 in. 28.7 in.
a = 0.31 in.2 X 60 ksi
0.85 X 3.0 psi X 12 in.
e, 2 g, 2 W x 0.003 2 0.033 > 0.005,.~. p 2 0.9
c 0.61/0.85
M, 2 0.9X 0.31 in.2 X 60 ksiX (8.7 in.0.61/2 in.)
2141k-in.211.7 k-ft >M,
2 0.61 in.
15-3
Bar spacing exceeds 261,, and cover exceeds db This is Case 2 development.
, Wei/4f _ 1X 1X 60000 psi
2 T252Jfd 25 x1x 3000 psi
We shall use 90 standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development
length for
a 90 standard hook is:
0 02%fd _.0 02 X 1 X 60000 psi
8
T N761 1X\/3000 Opsi
5) Temperature requirement for longitudinal reinforcement:

A, m, =0. 0018bh2 0. 0018X54 1n. X12 1n. 21.17 1n.2
. Use 6 #4 bars for longitudinal reinforcement.
X 0.625 in. 2 27.4 in. > 19 in. 3 in., NG.
X0.625 in. 2 14 in. < 19 in. 3 in., OK.

Use 12 in. thick by 4 ft 6 in. wide footing with #5 bars at 12 in. o.c. with
90 hooks at both ends
in the transverse direction, and 6 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
15-3 Design a square spread footing for the following conditions:
Service dead load is 350 kips, service live load is 275 kips. Soil density is
130 lb/ 11:3.
Allowable soil pressure is 4500 psf. Column is 18 in. square. f c 2 3500 psi
(normal
weight) and f y 2 60000 psi. Place bottom of footing at 5 ft below floor level.
Estimate thickness between 18 and 36 in., say 30 in.
Assume the oor thickness is 6 in.
51,, 2 4.5 ksf (2.5 ft +0.5 ft)X 0.15 k/ft3 2.0 ftX 0.13 k/ft3 2 3.79 ksf
_ 350k +275 R
,.,_ T 3.79 ksf
. Try 13 ft square footing.
Factored net soil pressure:
_1.2x350 k+1.6X275 R
2 T 169ft2
2165 ft2
2 5.09 ksf
2) Check thickness for two-way shear
Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used. Average effective
depth:
d 230 in.3 in.1in.2 26 in.
. . 2
V, 25.09 kst 169 ft2 m 2792R
12 in./ft
15-4
V, is taken as the smaller of the following:
4 , 4 , r
2 I2+ZI 2&1;er 2 I2+TI 44/prwd = 625de
(Note 5, is the ratio of the column dimensions)
40 X 26 1n.
5,qu bd2 ichf bd2 7.f9}c,I bd
VTZTITIa [:1] E W [2+ (4X 44 )]1n.) ft W ft W
(Note a, = 40 for a column placed at the center of its footing)
V, 2 42]?de
5V, 2 p42 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 4x/3500 * 4 r 44 r 26 2 812 R > V,
. Use 30 in. thick footing.

(156 in. 18 in.)/2 2 69 in.
69
n25m
26
1 1* 13 2 237 R
5V, 2 522 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 2x/3500 * 13 r 12 r 26 2 360 R > V,
2
2 (5.09 ksf x 13 ft)X @ 21095 k-ft
Assume j 2 0.90
1095 k-ft * 121n./ft
A 22104' .2
S 0.9*60ksi*0.9*26in. 1
21mm 2 0.0018bh 2 0.0018 * 156 r 30 2 8.42 in.2
Use 18 #7 (A, 210.8 in.2)
d 2 30 in. 3in. 1.5 r 0.875 in. 2 25.7 in.
10.81n.2 * 60 ksi
22 1.40' .
0.85 r 3.5 ksi * 156 in. 1
_dC _25.71.40/0.850003_0044_ _09
ST c ScmT 1.40/0.85 ' T ' "'T '
5M, 2 0.9 * 10.81n.2 * 60 ksi(25.7 in. 1.40 in./2) 2 1220 k-ft > M,
Bar spacing exceeds 261,, and cover exceeds db This is a Case 2 development.
, wet/4f, _ 1X1X60000 psi
2 T252\/W T25X1X\/3500 psi
Use 13 ft square footing, 30 in. thick with 18 #7 bars each way.
X 0.875 in. 2 35.5 in.<69 in. 3 in., OK.
6) Design footing-column joint

Factored load at base of column:
15-5
River, NJ 07458.
1.2>< 350+1.6>< 275 2 860 kips
Allowable bearing on footing:
0.65X O.85X 3.5x 18>< 18X 2 2 1250 k
Allowable bearing on column (assume column f; 2 4000 psi)
O.65x0.85x4x18x182716 k
860716_
3.7 in.2
0.65 x 60
Area of dowels required 2
Depending on how the column reinforcement is selected, the dowel bars will be
selected
accordingly for construction simplicity.
15-4 Design a rectangular spread footing for the following conditions.
Service dead loads are: axial = 350 k, moment 2 80 k-ft; service live loads are:
axial = 250 k, moment 2 100 k-ft. The moments are acting about the strong axis
of
the column section. Soil density is 120 lb/ft3. Allowable soil pressure is 5500
psf.
Place the bottom of the foundation at 4.5 ft below the basement floor. Assume
the
basement oor is 6 in. thick and supports a total service load of 80 psf. Assume
the
column section is 24 in. X 16 in., is constructed with 5000 psi normal-weight
concrete
and contains 6 No. eight bars (Grade 60) placed to give maximum bending
resistance about the strong axis of the column section. Assume the footing will
use
f'c 2 3500 psi and fy 2 60 ksi.
1) Select footing dimensions based on allowable soil pressure. Assume a footing
thickness of 3
ft. The net permissible bearing pressure is:
61,, 2 5.50 (3 >i< 0.15 + 1.5 >i< 0.12 + 0.5 >i< 0.15 + 0.08) 2 4.72 ksf
Consider only the axial loads to establish the width of the footing.
qns2 2 350 + 250 2 600 k
52 2 600/4.72 2 127 e2
s 2 11.3 ft 2 11 ft
Use axial loads and moments to establish the length of the footing. Assume a
linear
distribution of soil pressure as shown in Fig. 15-5(b). Thus,
Pa 6Ma
qmax : E + SL2
Set qmax 2 qn 2 4.72 ksfand s 2 11 ft.
4 72 350 + 250 6(80 + 100)
1 1L TIT 1 1L2
Solving for the positive root,
L 2 13.2ft
SetL 2 14ft
2) Calculate factored soil pressure:
Factored loads are:
Pu 2 1.2 * 350 + 1.64< 250 2 820 k
Mu 2 1.2 * 80 + 1.6 * 100 2 256 k-ft
With these values, the factored soil pressures are:
15-6
River, NJ 07458.
Pu 6Mu
qmin,max S i m
820 6 * 256
qmin,max : 11* 14 i _11 * 142
qmm = 5.32 0.71 = 4.61 ksf
qmax = 5.32 + 0.71 = 6.04 ksf
3) Check footing thickness for two-way shear:
dEt4in.23642 32in.
Dimension of the critical perimeter are:
24 + 32 2 56 in.
16 + 32 2 48 in.
be 2 208 in.
Therefore,
V t 820k 532 56 48 720k
W) - (5*5)
Calculate the two-way shear capacity, with Vt taken as the smaller of:
4 4
V, 2 (2 + )2 fcbwd 2 (2 +)2 fcbwd 2 4.7 fcbwd
,BC 1.5
(Note t is the ratio of the column dimensions)
40 * 32
208
(Note (15 2 40 for a column placed at the center of its footing)
V. = 4476'de
(pl/C 2 (p42 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 4V3500 * 208 * 32 2 1180 k > Vu
Use 36 in. thick footing.
a: d
Vc = (2 +l)i)/1 fclbwd : <2 + )2 fclbwd = 8-2 fclbwd
0
4) Check for combined transfer of shear and moment:
1 1
1%,)le 1+; 48/56
y, 2 1yf 2 10.62 20.38
b1d3 dbf b1 2 48*323 32*483 48 2
1,22 + +2b2d() 22 + +2*56*32(7)
yf 2 0.62
12 12 2 12 12
2 2.5x106 in.4
v = Vu(net) vauc = 720 + 0.38 * 256 * 12 * 24 = 119 si
bad 1, 208 * 32 2500000 p
<va 2 Mix/E 2 0.75 * 4x/3500 2 177 psi > 12,,
5) Check for one-way shear:
56
Vu 2 6.04(E* 11) 2 310 k
(pl/C 2 (p22 fcbwd 2 0.75 * 2V3500 * 11 * 12 * 32 2 375 k > Vu
6) Design exural reinforcement for long direction:
15-7
River, NJ 07458.
62 2
Mu 2 5.42 * 11 *? + (6.04- 5.42) * 11 * 3 2 1150 k-ft 2 13900 k-in.
Assumejd 2 0.95d, and use q!) 2 0.9
A _ 13900 k-in. _ 8 44. 2
S T 0.9 *60 Rsi * 0.95 * 32 in. T ' 1'
Am, 2 0.0018bh 2 0.0018 * 132 * 32 2 7.6 in.2
..Use 15 #7 (As 2 9 in.2)
d 2 36in. 3in. 1.5 * 0.875 in. 2 31.7 in.
9.0 in.2 * 60 Rsi
a T 0.85 * 3.5 Rsi * 132 in. T 1'38 m'

_ d c _ 31.7 1.38/0.850003 _ 0056. _ 09
3 T c 3 T 1.38/0.85 ' T ' 6 T '
qun 2 0.9 * 9.0 in.2 * 60 ksi(31.7 in. 1.38 in./2) 2 1250 k-ft > Mu
7) Check development:
[(1 = 54.8611, = 4811].
The available length is 72 in., so this is ok.
15-8
River, NJ 07458.
Chapter 17
17-1 The deep beam shown in Fig. P17-1 supports a factored load of 1450 kips.
The beam
and columns are 24 in. Wide. Draw a truss model neglecting the effects of
stirrups
and the dead load of the wall. Check the strength of the nodes and struts, and
design
the tension tie. Use f c 2 4000 psi (normal weight concrete) and f y 2 60000
psi.
69 36
1450 k
1290 k
1290 k
30 24
243
Note: Length units are in inches.
Fig. 5171
1. Compute PM / and reactions
To include in calculations use If, / 21450 kips/0.75 21930 kips
Sum moments about the center of the support at A, assuming the member acts as a
simple
beam and all loads and reactions act along the axes of the columns.
17-1
_ 69+1815
D T 2431215
RA 21930 kips 644 kips 21286 kips 21290 kips
x1930 kips 2 644 kips
2. Select size of beam
Assume R A is the maximum value of V / , and set this equal to ( 6 to 8 ) \lf
cbdfor
b 2 24 in., solve to find d values between 142 and 106 in. Try an overall beam
height h
of 10 ft. and assume that d is approximately 9 ft. 2 108 in.
3. Isolate D-regions
Because the distance between the load and the reactions is less than 2h at both
ends, the
beam consists of two D-regions, one of each side of the load.
4. Draw a strut-and-tie model and establish base dimensions of the nodes
Use a truss with two inclined struts and a tie, as shown below.
Compute fw
Node 1 (CCC node):
fm 2 0.85/inf; 2 0.85 ><1.0 X 4000 psi 2 3400 psi
Node 2 and 3 (CCT nodes):
fm 2 0.85/inf; 2 0.85 X 0.8 X 4000 psi 2 2720 psi
Strut 1-2 (assume sufficient web reinforcement is used to satisfy Eq. 17-10):
fm 2 0.85/33f; 2 0.85 X 0.75 X 4000 psi 2 2550 psi
Select the sizes of the nodes assuming they are hydrostatic nodes with fm 2 2550
psi
Node 1
Divide the load into two components equal to the two reactions.
Width of left part of node 21290 k/(2.55 ksi x 24 in.) 2 21.1 in.
Similarly, the width of the right part of the node 2 10.5 in.
Total node width 2 21.1+10.5 2 31.6 in. < 36 in., OK.
W
Width of node 2 21.1 in. < 30 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
W
Width of node 2 10.5 in. < 24 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
5. Establish geometry of truss and forces in struts and tie:
Assume that dv 2 h 2 ft 210 ft. 2 ft. 2 8 ft. 2 96 in.
Then, tanQ ( left part of span) 2 96 in./(69 +18 15) in., so, 6 ( left )253.1)
Total span length 2 243 12 15 2 216 in.
Then, tani9 (right part of span): 96 in./(216 72)in.; so,i9 (right) 2 33.7"
17-2
Strut 1-2
Axial force 2 1290 kips/sin53.1' 21610 kips
Horizontal component 2 1610 kips x cos53.1" 2 967 kips 2 force in Tie 2-3
Node 2 (Note that was included in force calculations)
Node height 2 force in the Tie 23/(fm X b) 2 967 k/(2.55 ksi X 24 in.)
Node height 2 15.8 in.: this is also the height of Node 1.
At this point we must check the assumed value for dv
Revised: dv 2 h 2 X (15.8 in./2)2120 in. 15.8 in. 2104.2 in. (should
recycle)
Assume: dv 2104 in.
With this value: (9 (left): 55.3" and (9 (right) 2 35.8
Axial forces: Strut 1-2 2 1570 kips and Tie 2-3 2 893 kip
Heights of nodes 1 and 2 2 14.6 in., and dv 2120 in. 2>< (14.6 in./2) 2 105.4
in., OK.
m
Axial force: 644 kips/sin35.8' 21100 kips
Horizontal component: 1100 kips x cos35.8 2 892 kips ( approx. 893 kips, OK.)
6. Select reinforcement for Tie 2-3 (Note that was included in force
calculations)
A 2893 k/60 ksi 2 14.9 in.2
Use 16 #9 bars (A: 216.0 in.2)
Provide 4 layers of 4 No. 9 hooked bars. These must be anchored into the column
at each
end with anchorage starting where the centroid of the tie first meets the
inclined struts at
each end of the beam. The length required for a 90 standard hook is 21.4 in.
for a No. 9
bar, which is less than the dimension of each support of column. Thus, this
should be OK.
The centroid of the bars should be at about the mid-height of the nodal zones at
each end,
i.e. about 7.5 in. above the bottom of the beam.
7. Minimum web reinforcement to control cracking inclined struts

Because ,6: 2 0.75 was used for the inclined struts in both the left and right
spans,
minimum web reinforcement that satisfies Eq. 17-10 is required throughout the
length of
the beam. For a deep beam, it is a good practice to also satisfy the
reinforcement
requirements in ACI sections 11.8.4 and 11.8.5
Part of the beam to the left of the concentrated load:
For horizontal reinforcement, try #5 bars on the front and back faces at a
vertical spacing
of 12 in.
_ 2><0.31in.2
12 111.X 24 in.
y, 2 90" 55.3" 2 34.7
2 0.0022 2 0.0015 (OK)
pk
For vertical reinforcement, try #5 two-legged stirrups at a spacing of 10 in.
17-3
_ 2 X 0.31 in.2
P, 10 in. X 24 in.
yv 2 55.3
2 0.0026 2 0.0025 (OK.)
Checking Eq. 17-10:
212W Sin 77 : Zpi Sin 77'
St
2 (0.0022) X (sin 34.7 )+ (0.0026) X (sin 55.3) 2 0.0034 2 0.003, OK.

Part of the beam to the right of the concentrated load:
Use the same reinforcement. Here 7v 2 35.8 and 7h 2 90 35.8 2 54.2
Zpl. sin 7.- 2 0.00174 + 0.001512 0.00325 > 0.003 (OK)
Therefore throughout the span use 2 #5 horizontal bars at a vertical spacing of
12 in. and use #5
two-legged stirrups as a spacing of 10 in.
17-2
17-3
Repeat Problem 17-1, but include the dead load of the wall. Assume that stirrups
crossing the lines AB and CD have a capacity (I) Z A], f yt equal to one-third
or more
of the shear due to the column load.
This problem is solved similarly to Problem 17-1. The factored dead load of the
wall can
be added to the factored load applied on top of the beam. In this case, the
vertical
reinforcement is designed such that the dead load of the wall portion below the
lines AB
and CD can be transferred to the level at least above those lines.
Design a corbel to support a factored vertical load of 120 kips acting at 5 in.
from
the face of a column. You should include a horizontal load equal to 20 percent
of the
factored vertical load. The column and corbel are 14 in. Wide. The concrete in
the
column and corbel was cast monolithically. Use 5000-psi normal-weight concrete
and fy 2 60000 psi.
Interface transfer shear stress is limited to the smallest of
0.2fc 21000 psi
480 + 0.08fc 2 880 psi and
1600 psi
The transfer shear stress is taken as 880 psi.
Compute minimum effective depth: d 2 2 0.75 X 880 X 14
Tryd216in.andh218in.
Factored shear 2 120 kips 2 120,000 lbs.
Normal force 2 0.2 X 120 kips 2 24 kips 2 24000 lbs.
Moment 2 120 X 5 + 24 X 2 2 648 k-in.
(Note: 2-in. moment arm assumed between horizontal load and horizontal
reinforcement)
17-4
Shear Friction Steel
V 120
Avf : =
,ufy 0.75 X (1.4 X 1.0) X 60
(Note that we have used ,u 2 1.42 for monolithic concrete and A 2 1 for normalweight
21.90 in.2
concrete)
Flexural Steel
648
A, 2210in.2
0.75X60X(0.9Xl6)
1.0X 60
a22 11]
0.85 X 5X 14
A, 2 i 2 0.93 in.2
0.75 X 60(16 1/2)
Direct Tension Steel
A" 2 i 2 0.53 in.2
0.75 X 60
Area of Tension Tie will be taken as the largest of:
A]. + A" 2 (0.93 + 0.53) 21.5 in.2
2A./2+An =2X1.90/3+0.5321.8 in.2
= 0.041%de 0.04x5
y
Use 3 #7 bars (or 2 #9), AS 21.80 in.2 (or 2.00 in.2)
X14X1620.75 in.2
samin
Horizontal Stirrups
Area required: AW. / 3 2 0.63 in.2
Use 2 #4 closed stirrups, A: 2 0.80 in.2
Anchor tension tie into column
Use 90 standard hooks to anchor the tension tie. Use #7 bars.
Also assume that the ties are inside the column cage; therefore a modification
factor of
0.7 is multiplied to the basic development length per ACI Code Section
12.5.3(a):
0.02
we]; db 2 0.7 X W X 0.875 210.4 in.
2J7; 1X s/5000
Assume a column size of 14 in. X 14 in., #8 bars used for column longitudinal
reinforcement, and a concrete cover of 2.5 in. to the longitudinal bars. The
available
space for anchorage is:
14 in. 2.5 in.+0.5 in. 212 in. >10.4 in., OK.
0.7dh 2 0.7 X
Fig. S17-2 shows the detailed reinforcement of the corbel.
17-5
River, NJ 07458.
$
3 #7 welded
to the angle T
plate 21
2 #4 CE
closed ties _T
2 #4 3
bars \ Ox
1
14 in. 8 in.
Fig. S 17-2
17-4 Repeat Problem 17-3, but with a factored vertical load of 100 kips and a
factored
horizontal load of 40 kips.
The problem is solved similar to Problem 17-3.
17-5 Figure P17-5 shows the dapped support region of a simple beam. The factored
vertical reaction is 100 kips, and you should include a horizontal reaction of
20 kips.
Use normal-weight concrete with f c 2 5000 psi and reinforcement with f y 2
60000 psi (weldable). The beam is 16 in. Wide.
(a) Isolate the D-region.
(b) Draw a truss to support the reaction.
(c) Detail the reinforcement.
The factored load on the dap is 100 kips. To include in the design we shall
design the dap for
V" 2100/0.75 2133 kips
In addition, design the dap for a horizontal force of
H,1 2 0.2X133 2 26.6 kips
(a) Isolate the D-region.
Fig S17-3(a) shows the D-region.
17-6
River, NJ 07458.
(a! Truss model
<Dregion> in
(\i
_ _ _ _ _ _ _12_0 __________ i
l B F
In 9/ II In.
4 \ w 0
/<47.9 N, 2
147 /
A x D / AT 2
m
a I / ll (2
T b / In
0), m .
.2 \/ 3 67.2" E
C/g 422 /
147 E 203 v G
117
4 l 6 3.5 16 10.5 Nl
10 30
b Reinforcement details
17
4 #5 closed 4 #5 Ustirrups @ 3 in.
doubleleg stirrups BR :4 #5 Ustirrups @ 2 in. top reinforcement
2 #4 U bars
@ 3.5 in.
5 # 7 with left ends

welded to the angle plate
2 #5 U bars @ 3.8 in.
2 #8 U bar
E G .
22 bottom re1nforcement
48
Note: Force units are in kips, length units are in inches.

17-7
(b) Draw a truss to support the reaction.
1. Select a strut-and-tie model
There are two basic types of truss which can be drawn:
- Vertical stirrups at end of deeper part
- Inclined stirrups in the end
We shall use the former detail. Fig. S17-3(a) shows the assumed truss model.
2. Locate nodes at A, B, and C
(ZV)B 202>NBC 2133 kips
A 2133/6022.22 in.2
:,required
Use 4 #5 closed double leg stirrups (AS 2 2.48 in.2). Place them as shown in
Fig. S17-3(b)
because these must be as close to the end of the deeper part of the beam as
possible.
The centroid of this group is at 1.5 + (2X 0.625) + 0.75 2 3.5 in. from the end
of the
deeper section.
Assume 2.5 in. from the bottom of the beam to the centroid of the steel at C, 2
in. at A,
and assume the centroid of the compression force B-F is 2.5 in. below the top of
the
beam.
4. Compute the strut and tie forces
Solve Join at A
10.5 in.
9.5 in.
NAB 2133/sin47.9 2179 kips ()
tan62 21.11362479
Nip = 19045; 133 + 26.6 2147 Rips (+)

Solve Joint at B
EV 202>NBC 2133 kips (+)
ZH=02>NBF 2190+TSX1332120kips ()
Locate node at D
Strut CD is axially compressed by the horizontal tensile force in AD and the
vertical tensile force in DE. The horizontal distance from C to D is
147 X 14.5 216.0 in.
The axial force in CD is 198 kips.
The horizontal distance EG is 30 in. 3.5 in. 16 in. 210.5 in.
Solve Joint at E
Horizontal component in EF 2 % X 133 2 55.9 kips
Axial force in EF 2 144 kips
Force in EG 2 147 + 55.9 2 203
17-8
Joint F
Horizontal force to the right of F 2 176 kips
As a check on the calculations, cut a section parallel to EF and sum moments
about F to calculate the force in EG 133 X 36 in. +266 X 10.5 2 TEF X 25
TE, 2 203 Rips OK
5. Compute strut widths and see if they will fit
fm 2 0.85/33f; 2 0.85 X 0.75 X 5000 2 3190 psi
(Note that the struts are assumed to have conf1nement steel, hence ,6; 2 0.75)
Strut AB
Assume the concrete outside the ties spalls at B. Remaining thickness of strut
2162X15 213 in.
Width 2 i 2 4.32 in.
3.19X13
M
Width 2 2 2.89 in.
3.19X13
Strut CD
Use full thickness.
3.19X16
Strut BE
3.19X16
Struts having these approximate widths are shown in the drawing.
6. Select reinforcement for the ties
Tie BC
We have already chosen 4 #5 double leg closed stirrups in two groups of two
stirrups.
Ties DE and F G
Use 4 #5 double leg stirrups with 135 hooks spaced at 3 in. o.c. for tie DE and
4
#5 double-leg stirrups with 135 hooks spaced at 2-in. for tie FG.
Ties AD
AS 2147/60 2 2.45 in.2
Use 5 #7 bars. Weld these to the angle at A.
We need to extend these bars past D a distance equal to the development length.
These bars are considered top bars, from Table A-6, Ed 2 55.2 2 48.3 in. So,
extend the bars 50 in past D.
17-9
Tie CE
AS 2 2.45 in.2
Provide 2 #8 U bars spaced 1 in. clear above the bottom steel. Lap splice them
with the tension reinforcement in the bottom of the beam using a splice length
of
1.3%,; 2 1.3 * 42.4 2 55 in.
7. Design confinement reinforcement:
Strut AB. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #4 U bars spaced equally at 3.5 in.
o.c.
- 2
Pt 2 AS,1 = 2X0.20 1n. = 0.0071
bsv l6 1n.X 3.5 1n.
yh 2 479
pk sin yh 2 0.0053 > 0.0030, OK.
Strut CD. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #5 U bars spaced equally at 3.83 in.
o.c.
- 2
pk 2 Ash zzomm
bsv l6 1n.X 3.83 1n.
y, 2 42.2
p, sin y, 2 0.0068 > 00030, OK.
17-10
Chapter 18
18-1 Check moment and shear strength at the base of the structural wall shown in
Fig. P181. Also, show that the given horizontal and vertical reinforcement satisfies all
of the ACI
Code requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum
spacing. The given lateral loads are equivalent Wind forces, considering both
direct
lateral forces and the effects of any torsion. Use a load factor of 1.6 for the
Wind load
effects. The given vertical loads represent dead loads, and you can assume that
the
vertical live loads are equal to 60 percent of the dead loads. Assume the wall
is
constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a compressive strength of 4500
psi.
Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
1. Calculate factored loads at base of wall.
Mu(base) 2 1.6X (7 kX15 ft+12 kX 26 ft+18 kX 37 ft+22 kX 48 ft+20 kX59 ft)
2 5310 kip-ft
Vu(base) 2 1.6X (7 +12+18+22+20)kips 2126 kips
Nupn (base) 2 0.9 X 230 k 2 207 kips
2. Calculate exural strength. The total area of ve1tical wall reinforcement is:
. . 240 i . .
AS, 2 2X 0.20 in.2 X W 2 0.40 in.2 X +1 2 8.00 in.2
s 12 in.
From Eq. (18-26a), the percentage of vertical (longitudinal) reinforcement is:
A 8.00 in.2
pi I St = + = 0.00333
hXiw 10 1n.X240 in.
From Eq. (18-26b), the ve1tical reinforcement index is:
k .
a) 2 p, X i 2 0.00333X 60 SI. 2 0.0444
f 4.5 ks1
From Eq. (18-27), the axial load index is:
a N 207 klps 2 0.0192
T hngXfC' T 10 in.X240in.X4.5 Rsi
For 4500 psi concrete, 6] 2 0.825. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the
neutral axis is:
( a+w J1, ( 0.0192+0.0444
C : W :
]240 in. 219.3 in.
0.851+2a) 0.85X0.825+2X0.0444
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 KW), so this is clearly a
tension-controlled section
and 2 0.9. From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement
is:
T2Astf [WTC 28.00in.2X60ksi M 2441kips
y t 240
w
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
Mn 2T _W +Nu wc 2441k 240 in. +207 k 240 1n.19.3 1n.
2 2 2 2
2 53, 000 k-in. + 22, 800 k-in. 2 75, 800 k-in. 2 6320 k-ft
Using the strength reduction factor, , the design strength is:

Mn 2 0.9 X 6320 2 5690 k-ft > Mu (o.k.)
3. Check shear strength. Because the wall is subjected to compression, we are
permitted to use
Eq. (18-41) to determine the concrete contribution to shear strength. For this
calculation we will
assume d 2 0.8 x KW 2 0.8 x 240 2 192 in., as permitted in ACI Code Section
11.9.4.
V, 2 22")"; X hd 2 2X1 4500 psi X 10 in.X 192 in.
2 258, 000 lbs 2 258 Rips
Using (I) 2 0.75 for shear, the design strength contribution from the concrete
is:
Vc 20.75X 258 2193 kips >VM
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However,
because V, exceeds
one-half of VC, the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must
be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement:
From Eq. (18-45a), the percentage of horizontal reinforcement is:
AW... 2 X 0.20 in.2
p,
f 2 0.0025 2 0.0025 (o.k.)
h X s2 10 1n.X 16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the
smallest of KW/S (48
in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the spacing of 16 in. for the horizontal
reinforcement is ok.
Vertical reinforcement:
Because the wall aspect ratio, hM/ZW 2 59ft/20ft 2 2.95, exceeds 2.5, the
minimum required
percentage of vertical reinforcement is 0.0025. From step 2, pg 2 0.00333, which
exceeds the
minimum value. The maximum center-to-center spacing for the vertical
reinforcement is the
smallest ofKM/3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of
12 in. for the
vertical reinforcement is ok.
18-2 Design a uniform distribution of vertical and horizontal reinforcement for
the
structural wall shown in Fig. P18-2. Your design must satisfy all of the ACI
Code
requirements, as well as the requirements for minimum reinforcement percentage
and
minimum spacing. The given lateral loads are equivalent Wind forces, considering
both
direct lateral forces and the effects of any torsion. Use a load factor of 1.6
for the Wind

load effects. Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that
has a
compressive strength of 4000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
1. Calculate factored loads at base of wall.
MM (base) 2 1.6X (75 k X 12 ft +100 k X 24 ft) 2 5280 kip-ft
V (base) 21.6 X (75 + 100) kips 2 280 kips
Nu,min (base) 2 0.9 X (70 + 40) kips 2 99.0 kips
2. Flexural design. Based on the results from Problem 18-1 (a wall with similar
design base
moment and similar dimensions), select a trial value for pg 2 0.0035. Then, from
Eq. (18-26b),
k .
a) 2 p, X i 2 00035 X 60 Sjl 2 0.0525
4 ks1
L
From Eq. (18-27), the axial load index is:
N 99.0 kips
u
20.0103
a: :
hxgwxfc' 10 in.X24O in.X4ksi
For 4000 psi concrete, 6] 2 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the
neutral axis is:
C _( a+w J, _( 0.0103+0.0525
240 in. 2 18.2 in.
0.8561+2a) 0.85X0.85+2X0.0525]
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 KW), so this is clearly a
and 2 0.9. The total area of vertical wall reinforcement is:
A 2 p, X hX 6W 2 0.0035 X 10 in. X 240 in. 2 8.40 in.2
From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement is:
T 2 A, f E 2 8.40 in.2 X 60 ksi(w] 2 466 Rips
y t 240
w
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
M. :T(%]+NM (AZC] 2466 k[24(;in.]+99.0 k[240 111.2182 111.]
2 55,900 k-in.+11, 000 k-in. 2 66, 900 k-in. 2 5570 k-ft
Using the strength reduction factor, , the design strength is:

Mn 2 0.9 X 5570 2 5020 k-ft < MM (not o.k.)
For a wall with relatively low axial load, the nominal moment strength should
increase approximately
linearly with increases in the percentage of vertical reinforcement. Thus,
#4 5280
'd. 2 ,tr'al _.:0_0035 20.00368
(qu ) m 1 WXMn(trial) X5020
Round this up a little and try pg 2 0.0038. Then, redo the calculations to find:
a) 2 0.0570, c 219.3 in., A 29.12 in.2, T 2503 kips, and
Mn 2 5350 k-ft > MM (o.k.)
Select ve1tical reinforcement as:
No. 4 bars at 10 in. spacing in each face (EF), results in pg 2 0.00400
No. 5 bars at 16 in. spacing in each face (EF), results in pg 2 0.00388
Either selection will work. To use less total bars, select No. 5 bars at 16 in.
spacing, EF. It is good
practice to replace the pair of No. 5 bars at the edges of the wall with a pair
of No. 6 bars.
3. Shear Design. The aspect ratio for this wall is, hM/ZW 2 24/20 2 1.20. Thus,
this is a short wall and
the shear strength contribution from the concrete is probably given by Eq. (1843). Using d 2 0.8 x 5,,
2 192 in., results in:
V, =3-3NfJ hd+N
Md
46W
99, 000 lbs X192 in.

4 X 240 in.
2 (401, 000 + 19,800) lbs 2 421, 000 lbs 2 421 kips
2 3.3X1 4000 psi X10 in.X192 in.+
Before accepting this value, we will check the value of VC from Eq. (18-44). For
this exural-shear
strength equation, we need to evaluate the ratio of M/V, at the critical section
above the base of the
wall, as defined in Fig. 18-19. For this wall, 5.4/2 2 10 ft, governs. At that
section the factored
moment is,
M M (crit. sect.) 2 M M (base) V (base) WEW
2 5280 kip-ft 280 Rip X 10 ft 2 2480 kip-ft
Thus, the ratio of M ,/V,, 2 2480/280 2 8.86 ft. Using this value, the
denominator in the second term
of Eq. (18-43) is,
Mu WW28.86 ft10 ft21.14 ft
V 2
u
Because this is a negative number, Eq. (18-44) is not valid for this wall. So,
using 2 0.75 and the
value for V, from Eq. (18-43):
VC 20.75X 421kips 2 316 kips >Vu
River, NJ 07458.
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However,
because V, exceeds
one-half of VC, the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must
be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement:
Use 2 No. 4 bars at 16 in. spacing in each face. Then, from Eq. (18-45a), the
percentage of
horizontal reinforcement is:
AV,h0riz 2 X 0.20 in.2
p; T T
+ 2 0.0025 2 0.0025 (o.k.)
h X s2 10 1n.X 16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the
smallest of KW/S (48
in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of 16 in. for the
horizontal reinforcement is
ok.
Vertical reinforcement:
Because p, 2 0.0025, the minimum value for pg in Eq. (18-46) is 0.0025. From the
exural
design, the provided value for pg 2 0.00388, so it is o.k. Also, the selected
spacing of 16 in. is less
than the smallest onW/3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. (o.k.)
18-3 The structural wall shown in Fig. P18-3 is subjected to gravity loads (D 2
150 kip
and L 2 100 kip) and an equivalent, static, lateral earthquake load, E 2 150
kip)
(torsion effects included). Check the moment strength at the base of the
structural
wall assuming that the distance, x, from the base of the structure to the
lateral force,
E, is equal to two-thirds of the wall height. Use a capacity-design approach to
check
the shear strength of the wall and assume the distance, x, is equal to one-half
of the
wall height for this check. Also, show that the given horizontal and vertical
reinforcement in the web of the structural wall satisfies all of the ACI Code
requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum spacing.
Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive
strength of 5000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
Use:
x 2 40 ft for the exural strength check
x 2 30 ft for the capacity-based shear strength check
1. Calculate factored loads for exural strength check at base of wall.
MM (base) 2 1.0 X 150 k X 2/3 X60 ft 2 6000 kip-ft
Nu,min (base) 2 0.9 X 150 k 2135 kips
2. Flexural strength. For a boundary element in tension, use Eq. (18-30) to
find:
T 2 Asfy 212X 0.79 in.2 X60 Rsi 2 569 Rips
Assuming that the depth of the compression stress block does not exceed the size
of the boundary
element, use Eq. (18-32) to find:
a TTN" 569k+135k 28.28in.(s20in.,o.k.)
T 0.85' b T 0.85X5 RsiX20 in.
Assume d 2 KW 20in./2 2 180 10 2 170 in. Then, from Eq. (18-33), the nominal
moment
strength is:
Mn 2T(dEJ+NM T
2 2
8.28 in.
2 569 k X (170 in.

j+135 k[180 1n.8.28 In.)
2 (94, 400 +11, 600)k-in. 2 8830 kip-ft
With a 2 8.28 in., it is clear that this is a tension-controlled section, and
thus 2 0.9. So,
Mn 2 0.9 X 8830 2 7950 kip-ft >> M,
The wall is substantially over-designed in exure and we should reduce the steel
in the boundary
element to reduce the shear required to develop the exural strength. One
possible redesign is to
use eight No. 9 bars in each boundary element. This leads to the final result of
Mn 2 6860 kip-ft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original exural
design). Assume
that the probable axial load is:
NP, 2ND+NL 2150R+100R2250 Rips
With this axial load the wall moment strength will be reevaluated and referred
to as the probable
moment strength, MP).

First, the depth of the compression stress block is,
a_ T+NM _ 569k+250k 29.64in.
T 0.85)"; b T 0.85 X5 Rsi X 20 in.
This is larger than calculated previously, but it is still clear that the
tension steel in the boundary
element will be yielding. With this value of a, the moment strength is:
u EWu
Mpr=T(d]+Npr[ 2 j
2 94, 000 k-in. + 21, 300 k-in.
2 115, 000 kip-in. 2 9610 kip-ft

With this moment and assuming that x 2 0.5 x 60 ft 2 30 ft, the capacity-based
design shear is,
Mp, _ 9610 k-ft
V ca -based 2 _
"W p W 0.5hw 0.5X60 ft
2 320 kips
4. Check shear strength. For this wall, the value of Am in Eq. (18-48) is:
AW 2 h- EW 210 in.X1801n.21800in.2
Because this is a slender wall, at, 2 2.0. Eq. (18-45b) will be used to
determine p, for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
AM,Z 2 X 0.20 in.2
pt T T
. . 20.0025
h-s2 10 1n.X16 in.
Using the values calculated here, the nominal shear strength of the wall from
Eq. (11-48) is,
V. = 4.. (MJTH/ij)
21800 in.2 (2 X1 5000 psi +0.0025 X 60, 000 psi)
2 1800 in.2 (141 psi +150 psi) 2 524,000 lbs 2 524 kips
Using 2 0.75 for shear,
Vn 2 0.75 X 524 k 2 393 kips > VM(cap-based) (o.k.)
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both
0.0025) and the bar spacing
(16 in. both horizontal and vertical) satisfy the requirements of ACI Code
Section 11.9.9, which are
applicable for this wall.
18-4 The structural wall shown in Fig. P18-4 is subjected to gravity loads (D 2
80 kip and
L 2 40 kip) and a single, equivalent, static, lateral earthquake load (E 2 220
kip) at the
top of the wall (at roof level). For the given uniform distribution of vertical
and
horizontal reinforcement, check the moment strength at the base of the wall and
use a
capacity-deisgn approach to check the shear strength of the wall. Also, show
that the
given horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the structural wall satisfies all
of the ACI
Code requirements regarding minimum reinforcement percentage and maximum
spacing. Assume the wall is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength of 4000 psi. Assume all of the steel is Grade-60.
1. Calculate factored loads for exural strength check at base of wall.
MM (base) 2 1.0 X 220 k X 15 ft 2 3300 kip-ft
Nu,min (base) 2 0.9 X 80 k 2 72 kips
2. Flexural strength. From Eq. (18-454a) the vertical reinforcement percentage
is:
AW 2X0.31 in.2
1). _
. . 20.00388
th1 101n.X161n.
From Eq. (18-26b) the reinforcement ratio for the vertical reinforcement is:
a) 2 p, i 2 0.00388X 60 ks} 2 0.0582
f6 4 ks1
From Eq. (18-27) the axial load ratio is:

N 72 kips
u
r 2 . . . 20.00750
hfwfc 10 1n.X2401n.X4k81
a:
For 4000 psi concrete, 6] 2 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28), the depth to the
neutral axis is:
_( 6+6 )5 _( 0.0075+0.0582
240 in. 2 18.8 in.
0.8561 +26) 0.85X0.85+2X0.0582]
This is very small compared to d (0.85,, 2 192 in.), so this is clearly a
and 2 0.9. For the longitudinal steel,
AS, 2 2X 0.31 in.2 X 240,1 2 9.30 in.2
1 1n.
Then, from Eq. (18-25a), the exural tension force is:

,6 , .
TZAsify[ WI C]=9.301n.2X60k81(
w
240 in.18.8 in.
240 in.
)2514 kips
Finally, the nominal moment capacity is found using Eq. (18-29):
M, 2T(WW]+NM(WWTC]
2 2
240 in.
2514kX(
j+72 k(240 1n.18.8 In.)
2 (61, 700 + 7960)k-in. 2 5810 kip-ft
Applying the strength factor, the design exural strength is,
Mn 2 0.9 X 5810 2 5230 kip-ft >> Mu
The wall is substantially over-designed in exure and we should reduce the
vertical
reinforcement in the wall to reduce the shear required to develop the exural
strength. One
possible redesign is to use two No. 4 bars at a 16 in. spacing in each face. For
this reinforcement
pg 2 0.0025 (the minimum value) and the design exural strength, Mn 2 3670 kipft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original exural
design). Assume
that the probable axial load is:
NP, 2ND+NL 280R+40R2120Rips
With this axial load, the axial load ratio is:
120 kips
0t 2 2 0.0125
10 in.X 240 in.X 4 ksi
And, the depth to the neutral axis is:
_( 0.0125+0.0581
240 in. 2 20.2 in.
0.85 X 0.85 + 2 X 0.0581]
Then, the exural tension force is:
,6 , .
TZAsify[ WI C]=9.301n.2X60k81(
w
240 in.20.2 in.
240 in.
)2511kips
Finally, the probably moment capacity iS;
M... =5111<X(%)+120 1((W)
2 (61, 300 +13, 200)k-in. 2 6210 kip-ft
With this probable moment strength, the capacity-based design shear is,
MP, _ 6210 k-ft
hW 15 ft
V (cap-based) 2 2 414 kips

4. Check shear strength. For this wall, Eq. (18-45b) will be used to determine
p, for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
_ AW",Z _ 2X 0.20 in.2
. . 20.0025
h-s2 10 1n.X16 in.
P:
The effective wall shear area from Eq. (18-48) is:
AW 2 h- KW 210 in.X 240 in. 2 2400 in.2
Because this is a squat wall (hw/JZW 2 0.75), at, 2 3.0. Thus, the nominal shear
strength of the wall from
Eq. (11-48) is,
V. = 4. (064Jf61Ptfy)
2 2400 in.2 (3 X1 4000 psi + 0.0025 X 60, 000 psi)
2 2400 in.2 (190 psi +150 psi) 2 815,000 lbs 2 815 kips
Using 2 0.75 for shear,
Vn 2 0.75 X 815 k 2 612 kips > VM(cap-based) (o.k.)
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both 2
0.0025) and the bar
spacing (16 in. both horizontal and ve1tical) satisfy the requirements of ACI
Code Section 11.9.9,
which are applicable for this wall.
18-5 Design a uniform distribution of vertical and horizontal reinforcement for
the first story
of the structural wall shown in Fig. P18-5. The given horizontal loads are
strength-level
static equivalent earthquake forces, so use a load factor of 1.0. The vertical
dead and
live loads are from the tributary area adjacent to the wall. Assume the given
lateral
loads include the direct shear force and any torsional effects that need to be
considered.

River, NJ 07458.
Use a compressive strength of 4000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement. Your nal
design
should satisfy all ACI Code requirements for minimum reinforcement percentages
and
maximum spacing.
Try using pv(pp) 2 ph(pt) 2 0.0025. Use 2#4 bars at 16in. both ways.
{WW/5 2 38.4
51 2 52 2 0.4/(10 * 0.0025) 2 16 in. 3
3h 2 30
18
Start with exural design. Calculate Mn:
60
a) 2 pp 2 0.00257 2 0.0375
Nu(min.) 2 0.9(70 + 50 + 35) 2 140 kip
N 140 0 0182
TilMW *f, T10*192*4T'
C _ a) + a _ 0.0375 + 0.0182 _ 0 0698
/{w T 08581 + 26) T 0.85 * 0.85 + 2 * 0.0375 T '
c 2 13.4 in.
As, 2 p); * h * {1w 2 0.0025 * 10 * 192 2 4.80 in.2
71,, c 192 13.4
T 2 Astfy (T) 2 4.8 * 60 () 2 268 R
W
192
{w {w
Mn 2 T7 +
qun 2 0.9
Calculate
C 192 192 13.4 .

Nu 2 2 268 2 + 140 2 2 38200 k-1n. 2 3190 k-ft
* 3190 2 2870 k-ft
Mu:
Mu 2 Mum) 2 (22 * 40 + 24 * 28 + 20 * 16) 2 1870 k-ft

Therefore, qun 2 2870 k-ft > 1870 k-ft 2 Mu, and the two curtains of #4 ve1tical
bars spaced at 16
in. on-center are OK.
Continue with the shear design. Calculate Vu(cap. based) based on the probable
moment capacity of
the wall and assuming that the lateral force resultant is located at 0.5hw.
Nu(max.) 2 1.0(70 + 50 + 35) + 0.5(60 + 40 + 25) 2 218 Rip
N 218 0 0284
T hHw *f, T10*192*4T'
C _ a) + a _ 0.0375 + 0.0284 _ 0 0826
/{w T 08581 + 26) T 0.85 * 0.85 + 2 * 0.0375 T '
c 2 15.9 in.
As, 2 p); * h * {1w 2 0.0025 * 10 * 192 2 4.80 in.2
T A
:
fy
{1w
Mp,
(WW T C) 48 60 (192 T 15'9) 264R

: _ >l< :
[W 192
8,, c 192 192 15.9 .
2 T7 + NuT 2 2647 + 218T 2 44500 k-1n.2 3710 k-ft
1810
River, NJ 07458.
M
_ pr _ 3710 _
Vu<cap. based) 0.5hw /0.5(16 + 12 + 12) 186 k
Calculate Vn:
ac(hw/{w 2 2.5) 2 2.0
Vn 2 Am, (Wu/E + ptfy) 2 10 * 192(20 * 104/4000 + 0.0025 * 60) 2 243 R
Therefore,
qan 2 0.75 * 243 2 183 k 2 Vumlp based) 2 186 k
The capacity and demand are approximately equal, so the horizontal reinforcement
is adequate.
Final design:
Vertical Reinforcement: 2 cu1tains of #4 bars spaced at 16 in. on-center.
Horizontal Reinforcement: 2 cu1tains of #4 bars spaced at 16 in. on-center.
1811
Chapter 19
19-1 Use Eq. (19-28) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements
in the
structural wall described in Problem 18-3. Assume the design displacement, 6,,
at the
top of the wall is 0.6 ft. Use all of the dimensions, loading information, and
material
properties given in Problem 18-3. If a specially confined boundary element is
required,
define the required vertical and horizontal dimensions for the boundary element.
1. Building drift ratio. The ratio, 5,/hw, represents the building drift ratio
due to the design
ealthquake for the building in question. We are given a value for the design
displacement, 5,, at the
top of the building, so the building drift ratio is:
6 _ 0.6 ft
Building drift ratio 2 2 0.010 (1%)
h 60 ft
w
2. Limit for neutral axis depth. Eq. (19-27) gives a limiting value for the
neutral axis depth. For

larger values, the wall boundary elements must be confined.
_ 15 ftX12 in./ft
w
2 30.0 in.
600(6, /hw) 600X0.010
C(limit) 2
3. Calculated neutral axis depth. The depth of the neutral axis for this check
should come from
the calculation of the probable moment strength of the wall, which was
calculated in step 3 of
Problem 18-3. In that calculation the depth of the equivalent stress block, a,
was found to be 9.64
in. Then, using 61 2 0.80 for 5000 psi concrete, the corresponding neutral axis
depth is:
C _ i _ 9.64 in.
A 0.80
212.1 in. < C(limit)

Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall
boundary elements.
191
19-2 Use Eq. (19-29) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements
in the
structural wall described in Problem 18-3. Use all of the dimensions, loading
information, and material properties given in Problem 18-3. If a specially
confined
boundary element is required, define the required vertical and horizontal
dimensions
for the boundary element.
1. Factored loads at base of wall. From step 1 of Problem 18-3:
M (base) 2 6000 kip-ft 2 72, 000 kip-in.
(base)2135 kips
Nu, min
2. Wall section properties. To determine the gross area and moment of inertia of
the wall, divide
the wall into rectangular pieces representing the web and the two boundary
elements. Then,
A 2 A(web) + 2A(boundary)
2 10 in.X 140 in.+2X (20 in.)2 2 2200 in.2
And,
10 X 1403 20 X 203
I: I.+A._.2 2+0+2 +20X20X802
;( . .y. ) 12 ( 12 )
27.43X106 in.4
Also,
y2WW2180m'290in
2 2
3. Combined stress in edge of wall at base of wall. Eq. (19-28) will be used to
find the combined
stress at the edge of the wall at its base. If that stress exceeds the limit of
0.2f,, then we will need use
special confinement reinforcement in the wall boundary and continue that
reinforcement up the wall
until we reach a section where the combined stress in the edge of the wall is
less than 0.15f,. Using
the values from steps 1 and 2:
NM +M y
I
A135 k + 72,000 k-in.X 90 in.
T 2200 in.2 7.43 X 106 in.4
2 0.061 Rsi + 0.872 Rsi 2 0.934 Rsi < 0.2 X 5 Rsi21.0 Rsi
fCTA
Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall

boundary elements.
192

Reinforced Concrete Mechanics Design Sol

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Reinforced Concrete Mechanics Design Sol

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Chapter 3

3-1 What is the signicance of the critical stress?

From Eq. 3-6:

(g) Exposure to carbon dioxide tends to increase shrinkage.

Where: V = 20 in. * 20 in. * 12 ft * 12% = 57,600 in.3

Sec (t, to) 2

permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited

Weight/ft = x 0.15 = 0.3 kips/ft

' = _ .2 a = 5.04 = For fC 3500ps1, ,610.85.Therefore, c /,31 4.85 5.93 in.

Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):

3.00x 60000x (21.5 E

'2 ~ = :07 22.79 2 ~

Using. Eq.(4-18) 8 (=5 )={d_c]g ={ij0.003=0.011> 0.0021

M =Af 01z =]=334kip-ft

For Beam 1, qun = 167 kip-ft

a: = [316 = 4.10 in.

For Beam 2, qun = 250 kip-ft

a: = [31C 3.53 in.

For Beam 3, qun = 219 kip-ft

For Beam 4, qun = 171 kip-ft

For Beam 5, qun = 257 kip-ft

Thus, as > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fx 2 fy ).

x16x15.5=0.82 in.2< AS (o.k.)

likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write

A 2 )Iwad=&x12xl9=0.76 in.2< A. (9k)

We can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :

<i>Mn Asfy (4 5) 12000 _ 209 k1p-ft

and for the 11ft. span is: 11 f

Negative moment region

this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the

Try 0 251/4245 in.

Thus, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

publication is protected by Copyright and written

Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fe 2 fy ).

However, for a statically determinate beam, 17W should be replaced by the

_ Asfy _ 7.11*60000 _418. <h _5. 0K

a 0.9 * 7.11 * 60000 (32.5 g)

For fe 25000 psi, .31 20.80. Therefore, 6 2 /B 2 5-6 2 7.06 in.

Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fe 2 fy ).

Since, 81 > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and q 20.9.

However, for a statically determined beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller

include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance

Thus, SS > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( fe 2 fy ).

fs' 2 Esss 2 29,000 * 0.00206 2 59.7 ksi (<fy)

Try C 2 6.5 in.

Clearly, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

Clearly, the steel is yielding (SS > 0.00207) and it is a tension-controlled

publication is protected by Copyright and written

this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the

Try C 2 61/4 2 5.5 in.

reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in

2 20.0154 Note: 2 0.825 for s2 4,500 si

From Eq. (5-16):

permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited

Note that other combinations of b, h, and As may also be correct if different

From Eq. (5-22):

pf, (d %) O.9>< 60 ksi>< (17.5 in 316 1)

From Eq. (5-17):

From Eq. (5-16):

No further iterations are necessary since the solution has essentially

For fs = 5,000 psi, 3% = 212 so use 3 fs'

Me = ijy (d g) = 0.9 X 2.0 in2 X 60 ksi X (17.5 in ) 21780 k-in

gee + 5e 0.003 + 0.0075